Català-Valencià – Catalan中文 – Chinese (Simplified)中文 – Chinese (Traditional)Česky – CzechDansk – DanishNederlands – DutchEnglish – EnglishSuomi – FinnishFrançais – FrenchDeutsch – Germanעברית – Hebrewहिंदी – HindiMagyar – HungarianBahasa Indonesia – IndonesianItaliano – Italian日本語 – Japanese한국어 – KoreanМакедонски – Macedonianमराठी – MarathiNorsk – NorwegianPolski – PolishPortuguês – PortuguesePortuguês – Portuguese (Brazil)Русский – RussianSlovenčina – SlovakSlovenščina – SlovenianEspañol – SpanishSvenska – SwedishTürkçe – TurkishУкраїнська – UkrainianOëzbekcha – Uzbek

nexmon – Blame information for rev 1

Rev	Author	Line No.	Line
1	office	1	% texinfo.tex -- TeX macros to handle Texinfo files.
		2	%
		3	% Load plain if necessary, i.e., if running under initex.
		4	\expandafter\ifx\csname fmtname\endcsname\relax\input plain\fi
		5	%
		6	\def\texinfoversion{2014-12-03.16}
		7	%
		8	% Copyright 1985, 1986, 1988, 1990, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995,
		9	% 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006,
		10	% 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010, 2011, 2012, 2013, 2014 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
		11	%
		12	% This texinfo.tex file is free software: you can redistribute it and/or
		13	% modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as
		14	% published by the Free Software Foundation, either version 3 of the
		15	% License, or (at your option) any later version.
		16	%
		17	% This texinfo.tex file is distributed in the hope that it will be
		18	% useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty
		19	% of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
		20	% General Public License for more details.
		21	%
		22	% You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
		23	% along with this program. If not, see <http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>.
		24	%
		25	% As a special exception, when this file is read by TeX when processing
		26	% a Texinfo source document, you may use the result without
		27	% restriction. This Exception is an additional permission under section 7
		28	% of the GNU General Public License, version 3 ("GPLv3").
		29	%
		30	% Please try the latest version of texinfo.tex before submitting bug
		31	% reports; you can get the latest version from:
		32	% http://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/texinfo/ (the Texinfo release area), or
		33	% http://ftpmirror.gnu.org/texinfo/ (same, via a mirror), or
		34	% http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo/ (the Texinfo home page)
		35	% The texinfo.tex in any given distribution could well be out
		36	% of date, so if that's what you're using, please check.
		37	%
		38	% Send bug reports to bug-texinfo@gnu.org. Please include including a
		39	% complete document in each bug report with which we can reproduce the
		40	% problem. Patches are, of course, greatly appreciated.
		41	%
		42	% To process a Texinfo manual with TeX, it's most reliable to use the
		43	% texi2dvi shell script that comes with the distribution. For a simple
		44	% manual foo.texi, however, you can get away with this:
		45	% tex foo.texi
		46	% texindex foo.??
		47	% tex foo.texi
		48	% tex foo.texi
		49	% dvips foo.dvi -o # or whatever; this makes foo.ps.
		50	% The extra TeX runs get the cross-reference information correct.
		51	% Sometimes one run after texindex suffices, and sometimes you need more
		52	% than two; texi2dvi does it as many times as necessary.
		53	%
		54	% It is possible to adapt texinfo.tex for other languages, to some
		55	% extent. You can get the existing language-specific files from the
		56	% full Texinfo distribution.
		57	%
		58	% The GNU Texinfo home page is http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo.
		59
		60
		61	\message{Loading texinfo [version \texinfoversion]:}
		62
		63	% If in a .fmt file, print the version number
		64	% and turn on active characters that we couldn't do earlier because
		65	% they might have appeared in the input file name.
		66	\everyjob{\message{[Texinfo version \texinfoversion]}%
		67	\catcode`+=\active \catcode`\_=\active}
		68
		69	\chardef\other=12
		70
		71	% We never want plain's \outer definition of \+ in Texinfo.
		72	% For @tex, we can use \tabalign.
		73	\let\+ = \relax
		74
		75	% Save some plain tex macros whose names we will redefine.
		76	\let\ptexb=\b
		77	\let\ptexbullet=\bullet
		78	\let\ptexc=\c
		79	\let\ptexcomma=\,
		80	\let\ptexdot=\.
		81	\let\ptexdots=\dots
		82	\let\ptexend=\end
		83	\let\ptexequiv=\equiv
		84	\let\ptexexclam=\!
		85	\let\ptexfootnote=\footnote
		86	\let\ptexgtr=>
		87	\let\ptexhat=^
		88	\let\ptexi=\i
		89	\let\ptexindent=\indent
		90	\let\ptexinsert=\insert
		91	\let\ptexlbrace=\{
		92	\let\ptexless=<
		93	\let\ptexnewwrite\newwrite
		94	\let\ptexnoindent=\noindent
		95	\let\ptexplus=+
		96	\let\ptexraggedright=\raggedright
		97	\let\ptexrbrace=\}
		98	\let\ptexslash=\/
		99	\let\ptexsp=\sp
		100	\let\ptexstar=\*
		101	\let\ptexsup=\sup
		102	\let\ptext=\t
		103	\let\ptextop=\top
		104	{\catcode`\'=\active \global\let\ptexquoteright'}% active in plain's math mode
		105
		106	% If this character appears in an error message or help string, it
		107	% starts a new line in the output.
		108	\newlinechar = `^^J
		109
		110	% Use TeX 3.0's \inputlineno to get the line number, for better error
		111	% messages, but if we're using an old version of TeX, don't do anything.
		112	%
		113	\ifx\inputlineno\thisisundefined
		114	\let\linenumber = \empty % Pre-3.0.
		115	\else
		116	\def\linenumber{l.\the\inputlineno:\space}
		117	\fi
		118
		119	% Set up fixed words for English if not already set.
		120	\ifx\putwordAppendix\undefined \gdef\putwordAppendix{Appendix}\fi
		121	\ifx\putwordChapter\undefined \gdef\putwordChapter{Chapter}\fi
		122	\ifx\putworderror\undefined \gdef\putworderror{error}\fi
		123	\ifx\putwordfile\undefined \gdef\putwordfile{file}\fi
		124	\ifx\putwordin\undefined \gdef\putwordin{in}\fi
		125	\ifx\putwordIndexIsEmpty\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexIsEmpty{(Index is empty)}\fi
		126	\ifx\putwordIndexNonexistent\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexNonexistent{(Index is nonexistent)}\fi
		127	\ifx\putwordInfo\undefined \gdef\putwordInfo{Info}\fi
		128	\ifx\putwordInstanceVariableof\undefined \gdef\putwordInstanceVariableof{Instance Variable of}\fi
		129	\ifx\putwordMethodon\undefined \gdef\putwordMethodon{Method on}\fi
		130	\ifx\putwordNoTitle\undefined \gdef\putwordNoTitle{No Title}\fi
		131	\ifx\putwordof\undefined \gdef\putwordof{of}\fi
		132	\ifx\putwordon\undefined \gdef\putwordon{on}\fi
		133	\ifx\putwordpage\undefined \gdef\putwordpage{page}\fi
		134	\ifx\putwordsection\undefined \gdef\putwordsection{section}\fi
		135	\ifx\putwordSection\undefined \gdef\putwordSection{Section}\fi
		136	\ifx\putwordsee\undefined \gdef\putwordsee{see}\fi
		137	\ifx\putwordSee\undefined \gdef\putwordSee{See}\fi
		138	\ifx\putwordShortTOC\undefined \gdef\putwordShortTOC{Short Contents}\fi
		139	\ifx\putwordTOC\undefined \gdef\putwordTOC{Table of Contents}\fi
		140	%
		141	\ifx\putwordMJan\undefined \gdef\putwordMJan{January}\fi
		142	\ifx\putwordMFeb\undefined \gdef\putwordMFeb{February}\fi
		143	\ifx\putwordMMar\undefined \gdef\putwordMMar{March}\fi
		144	\ifx\putwordMApr\undefined \gdef\putwordMApr{April}\fi
		145	\ifx\putwordMMay\undefined \gdef\putwordMMay{May}\fi
		146	\ifx\putwordMJun\undefined \gdef\putwordMJun{June}\fi
		147	\ifx\putwordMJul\undefined \gdef\putwordMJul{July}\fi
		148	\ifx\putwordMAug\undefined \gdef\putwordMAug{August}\fi
		149	\ifx\putwordMSep\undefined \gdef\putwordMSep{September}\fi
		150	\ifx\putwordMOct\undefined \gdef\putwordMOct{October}\fi
		151	\ifx\putwordMNov\undefined \gdef\putwordMNov{November}\fi
		152	\ifx\putwordMDec\undefined \gdef\putwordMDec{December}\fi
		153	%
		154	\ifx\putwordDefmac\undefined \gdef\putwordDefmac{Macro}\fi
		155	\ifx\putwordDefspec\undefined \gdef\putwordDefspec{Special Form}\fi
		156	\ifx\putwordDefvar\undefined \gdef\putwordDefvar{Variable}\fi
		157	\ifx\putwordDefopt\undefined \gdef\putwordDefopt{User Option}\fi
		158	\ifx\putwordDeffunc\undefined \gdef\putwordDeffunc{Function}\fi
		159
		160	% Since the category of space is not known, we have to be careful.
		161	\chardef\spacecat = 10
		162	\def\spaceisspace{\catcode`\ =\spacecat}
		163
		164	% sometimes characters are active, so we need control sequences.
		165	\chardef\ampChar = `\&
		166	\chardef\colonChar = `\:
		167	\chardef\commaChar = `\,
		168	\chardef\dashChar = `\-
		169	\chardef\dotChar = `\.
		170	\chardef\exclamChar= `\!
		171	\chardef\hashChar = `\#
		172	\chardef\lquoteChar= `\`
		173	\chardef\questChar = `\?
		174	\chardef\rquoteChar= `\'
		175	\chardef\semiChar = `\;
		176	\chardef\slashChar = `\/
		177	\chardef\underChar = `\_
		178
		179	% Ignore a token.
		180	%
		181	\def\gobble#1{}
		182
		183	% The following is used inside several \edef's.
		184	\def\makecsname#1{\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname}
		185
		186	% Hyphenation fixes.
		187	\hyphenation{
		188	Flor-i-da Ghost-script Ghost-view Mac-OS Post-Script
		189	ap-pen-dix bit-map bit-maps
		190	data-base data-bases eshell fall-ing half-way long-est man-u-script
		191	man-u-scripts mini-buf-fer mini-buf-fers over-view par-a-digm
		192	par-a-digms rath-er rec-tan-gu-lar ro-bot-ics se-vere-ly set-up spa-ces
		193	spell-ing spell-ings
		194	stand-alone strong-est time-stamp time-stamps which-ever white-space
		195	wide-spread wrap-around
		196	}
		197
		198	% Margin to add to right of even pages, to left of odd pages.
		199	\newdimen\bindingoffset
		200	\newdimen\normaloffset
		201	\newdimen\pagewidth \newdimen\pageheight
		202
		203	% For a final copy, take out the rectangles
		204	% that mark overfull boxes (in case you have decided
		205	% that the text looks ok even though it passes the margin).
		206	%
		207	\def\finalout{\overfullrule=0pt }
		208
		209	% Sometimes it is convenient to have everything in the transcript file
		210	% and nothing on the terminal. We don't just call \tracingall here,
		211	% since that produces some useless output on the terminal. We also make
		212	% some effort to order the tracing commands to reduce output in the log
		213	% file; cf. trace.sty in LaTeX.
		214	%
		215	\def\gloggingall{\begingroup \globaldefs = 1 \loggingall \endgroup}%
		216	\def\loggingall{%
		217	\tracingstats2
		218	\tracingpages1
		219	\tracinglostchars2 % 2 gives us more in etex
		220	\tracingparagraphs1
		221	\tracingoutput1
		222	\tracingmacros2
		223	\tracingrestores1
		224	\showboxbreadth\maxdimen \showboxdepth\maxdimen
		225	\ifx\eTeXversion\thisisundefined\else % etex gives us more logging
		226	\tracingscantokens1
		227	\tracingifs1
		228	\tracinggroups1
		229	\tracingnesting2
		230	\tracingassigns1
		231	\fi
		232	\tracingcommands3 % 3 gives us more in etex
		233	\errorcontextlines16
		234	}%
		235
		236	% @errormsg{MSG}. Do the index-like expansions on MSG, but if things
		237	% aren't perfect, it's not the end of the world, being an error message,
		238	% after all.
		239	%
		240	\def\errormsg{\begingroup \indexnofonts \doerrormsg}
		241	\def\doerrormsg#1{\errmessage{#1}}
		242
		243	% add check for \lastpenalty to plain's definitions. If the last thing
		244	% we did was a \nobreak, we don't want to insert more space.
		245	%
		246	\def\smallbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\smallskipamount
		247	\removelastskip\penalty-50\smallskip\fi\fi}
		248	\def\medbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\medskipamount
		249	\removelastskip\penalty-100\medskip\fi\fi}
		250	\def\bigbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\bigskipamount
		251	\removelastskip\penalty-200\bigskip\fi\fi}
		252
		253	% Do @cropmarks to get crop marks.
		254	%
		255	\newif\ifcropmarks
		256	\let\cropmarks = \cropmarkstrue
		257	%
		258	% Dimensions to add cropmarks at corners.
		259	% Added by P. A. MacKay, 12 Nov. 1986
		260	%
		261	\newdimen\outerhsize \newdimen\outervsize % set by the paper size routines
		262	\newdimen\cornerlong \cornerlong=1pc
		263	\newdimen\cornerthick \cornerthick=.3pt
		264	\newdimen\topandbottommargin \topandbottommargin=.75in
		265
		266	% Output a mark which sets \thischapter, \thissection and \thiscolor.
		267	% We dump everything together because we only have one kind of mark.
		268	% This works because we only use \botmark / \topmark, not \firstmark.
		269	%
		270	% A mark contains a subexpression of the \ifcase ... \fi construct.
		271	% \get*marks macros below extract the needed part using \ifcase.
		272	%
		273	% Another complication is to let the user choose whether \thischapter
		274	% (\thissection) refers to the chapter (section) in effect at the top
		275	% of a page, or that at the bottom of a page. The solution is
		276	% described on page 260 of The TeXbook. It involves outputting two
		277	% marks for the sectioning macros, one before the section break, and
		278	% one after. I won't pretend I can describe this better than DEK...
		279	\def\domark{%
		280	\toks0=\expandafter{\lastchapterdefs}%
		281	\toks2=\expandafter{\lastsectiondefs}%
		282	\toks4=\expandafter{\prevchapterdefs}%
		283	\toks6=\expandafter{\prevsectiondefs}%
		284	\toks8=\expandafter{\lastcolordefs}%
		285	\mark{%
		286	\the\toks0 \the\toks2 % 0: top marks (\last...)
		287	\noexpand\or \the\toks4 \the\toks6 % 1: bottom marks (default, \prev...)
		288	\noexpand\else \the\toks8 % 2: color marks
		289	}%
		290	}
		291	% \topmark doesn't work for the very first chapter (after the title
		292	% page or the contents), so we use \firstmark there -- this gets us
		293	% the mark with the chapter defs, unless the user sneaks in, e.g.,
		294	% @setcolor (or @url, or @link, etc.) between @contents and the very
		295	% first @chapter.
		296	\def\gettopheadingmarks{%
		297	\ifcase0\topmark\fi
		298	\ifx\thischapter\empty \ifcase0\firstmark\fi \fi
		299	}
		300	\def\getbottomheadingmarks{\ifcase1\botmark\fi}
		301	\def\getcolormarks{\ifcase2\topmark\fi}
		302
		303	% Avoid "undefined control sequence" errors.
		304	\def\lastchapterdefs{}
		305	\def\lastsectiondefs{}
		306	\def\prevchapterdefs{}
		307	\def\prevsectiondefs{}
		308	\def\lastcolordefs{}
		309
		310	% Main output routine.
		311	\chardef\PAGE = 255
		312	\output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}
		313
		314	\newbox\headlinebox
		315	\newbox\footlinebox
		316
		317	% \onepageout takes a vbox as an argument. Note that \pagecontents
		318	% does insertions, but you have to call it yourself.
		319	\def\onepageout#1{%
		320	\ifcropmarks \hoffset=0pt \else \hoffset=\normaloffset \fi
		321	%
		322	\ifodd\pageno \advance\hoffset by \bindingoffset
		323	\else \advance\hoffset by -\bindingoffset\fi
		324	%
		325	% Do this outside of the \shipout so @code etc. will be expanded in
		326	% the headline as they should be, not taken literally (outputting ''code).
		327	\def\commmonheadfootline{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \texinfochars}
		328	%
		329	\ifodd\pageno \getoddheadingmarks \else \getevenheadingmarks \fi
		330	\global\setbox\headlinebox = \vbox{\commmonheadfootline \makeheadline}%
		331	%
		332	\ifodd\pageno \getoddfootingmarks \else \getevenfootingmarks \fi
		333	\global\setbox\footlinebox = \vbox{\commmonheadfootline \makefootline}%
		334	%
		335	{%
		336	% Have to do this stuff outside the \shipout because we want it to
		337	% take effect in \write's, yet the group defined by the \vbox ends
		338	% before the \shipout runs.
		339	%
		340	\indexdummies % don't expand commands in the output.
		341	\normalturnoffactive % \ in index entries must not stay \, e.g., if
		342	% the page break happens to be in the middle of an example.
		343	% We don't want .vr (or whatever) entries like this:
		344	% \entry{{\tt \indexbackslash }acronym}{32}{\code {\acronym}}
		345	% "\acronym" won't work when it's read back in;
		346	% it needs to be
		347	% {\code {{\tt \backslashcurfont }acronym}
		348	\shipout\vbox{%
		349	% Do this early so pdf references go to the beginning of the page.
		350	\ifpdfmakepagedest \pdfdest name{\the\pageno} xyz\fi
		351	%
		352	\ifcropmarks \vbox to \outervsize\bgroup
		353	\hsize = \outerhsize
		354	\vskip-\topandbottommargin
		355	\vtop to0pt{%
		356	\line{\ewtop\hfil\ewtop}%
		357	\nointerlineskip
		358	\line{%
		359	\vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nstop}%
		360	\hfill
		361	\vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nstop}%
		362	}%
		363	\vss}%
		364	\vskip\topandbottommargin
		365	\line\bgroup
		366	\hfil % center the page within the outer (page) hsize.
		367	\ifodd\pageno\hskip\bindingoffset\fi
		368	\vbox\bgroup
		369	\fi
		370	%
		371	\unvbox\headlinebox
		372	\pagebody{#1}%
		373	\ifdim\ht\footlinebox > 0pt
		374	% Only leave this space if the footline is nonempty.
		375	% (We lessened \vsize for it in \oddfootingyyy.)
		376	% The \baselineskip=24pt in plain's \makefootline has no effect.
		377	\vskip 24pt
		378	\unvbox\footlinebox
		379	\fi
		380	%
		381	\ifcropmarks
		382	\egroup % end of \vbox\bgroup
		383	\hfil\egroup % end of (centering) \line\bgroup
		384	\vskip\topandbottommargin plus1fill minus1fill
		385	\boxmaxdepth = \cornerthick
		386	\vbox to0pt{\vss
		387	\line{%
		388	\vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nsbot}%
		389	\hfill
		390	\vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nsbot}%
		391	}%
		392	\nointerlineskip
		393	\line{\ewbot\hfil\ewbot}%
		394	}%
		395	\egroup % \vbox from first cropmarks clause
		396	\fi
		397	}% end of \shipout\vbox
		398	}% end of group with \indexdummies
		399	\advancepageno
		400	\ifnum\outputpenalty>-20000 \else\dosupereject\fi
		401	}
		402
		403	\newinsert\margin \dimen\margin=\maxdimen
		404
		405	\def\pagebody#1{\vbox to\pageheight{\boxmaxdepth=\maxdepth #1}}
		406	{\catcode`\@ =11
		407	\gdef\pagecontents#1{\ifvoid\topins\else\unvbox\topins\fi
		408	% marginal hacks, juha@viisa.uucp (Juha Takala)
		409	\ifvoid\margin\else % marginal info is present
		410	\rlap{\kern\hsize\vbox to\z@{\kern1pt\box\margin \vss}}\fi
		411	\dimen@=\dp#1\relax \unvbox#1\relax
		412	\ifvoid\footins\else\vskip\skip\footins\footnoterule \unvbox\footins\fi
		413	\ifr@ggedbottom \kern-\dimen@ \vfil \fi}
		414	}
		415
		416	% Here are the rules for the cropmarks. Note that they are
		417	% offset so that the space between them is truly \outerhsize or \outervsize
		418	% (P. A. MacKay, 12 November, 1986)
		419	%
		420	\def\ewtop{\vrule height\cornerthick depth0pt width\cornerlong}
		421	\def\nstop{\vbox
		422	{\hrule height\cornerthick depth\cornerlong width\cornerthick}}
		423	\def\ewbot{\vrule height0pt depth\cornerthick width\cornerlong}
		424	\def\nsbot{\vbox
		425	{\hrule height\cornerlong depth\cornerthick width\cornerthick}}
		426
		427	% Parse an argument, then pass it to #1. The argument is the rest of
		428	% the input line (except we remove a trailing comment). #1 should be a
		429	% macro which expects an ordinary undelimited TeX argument.
		430	%
		431	\def\parsearg{\parseargusing{}}
		432	\def\parseargusing#1#2{%
		433	\def\argtorun{#2}%
		434	\begingroup
		435	\obeylines
		436	\spaceisspace
		437	#1%
		438	\parseargline\empty% Insert the \empty token, see \finishparsearg below.
		439	}
		440
		441	{\obeylines %
		442	\gdef\parseargline#1^^M{%
		443	\endgroup % End of the group started in \parsearg.
		444	\argremovecomment #1\comment\ArgTerm%
		445	}%
		446	}
		447
		448	% First remove any @comment, then any @c comment.
		449	\def\argremovecomment#1\comment#2\ArgTerm{\argremovec #1\c\ArgTerm}
		450	\def\argremovec#1\c#2\ArgTerm{\argcheckspaces#1\^^M\ArgTerm}
		451
		452	% Each occurrence of `\^^M' or `<space>\^^M' is replaced by a single space.
		453	%
		454	% \argremovec might leave us with trailing space, e.g.,
		455	% @end itemize @c foo
		456	% This space token undergoes the same procedure and is eventually removed
		457	% by \finishparsearg.
		458	%
		459	\def\argcheckspaces#1\^^M{\argcheckspacesX#1\^^M \^^M}
		460	\def\argcheckspacesX#1 \^^M{\argcheckspacesY#1\^^M}
		461	\def\argcheckspacesY#1\^^M#2\^^M#3\ArgTerm{%
		462	\def\temp{#3}%
		463	\ifx\temp\empty
		464	% Do not use \next, perhaps the caller of \parsearg uses it; reuse \temp:
		465	\let\temp\finishparsearg
		466	\else
		467	\let\temp\argcheckspaces
		468	\fi
		469	% Put the space token in:
		470	\temp#1 #3\ArgTerm
		471	}
		472
		473	% If a _delimited_ argument is enclosed in braces, they get stripped; so
		474	% to get _exactly_ the rest of the line, we had to prevent such situation.
		475	% We prepended an \empty token at the very beginning and we expand it now,
		476	% just before passing the control to \argtorun.
		477	% (Similarly, we have to think about #3 of \argcheckspacesY above: it is
		478	% either the null string, or it ends with \^^M---thus there is no danger
		479	% that a pair of braces would be stripped.
		480	%
		481	% But first, we have to remove the trailing space token.
		482	%
		483	\def\finishparsearg#1 \ArgTerm{\expandafter\argtorun\expandafter{#1}}
		484
		485	% \parseargdef\foo{...}
		486	% is roughly equivalent to
		487	% \def\foo{\parsearg\Xfoo}
		488	% \def\Xfoo#1{...}
		489	%
		490	% Actually, I use \csname\string\foo\endcsname, ie. \\foo, as it is my
		491	% favourite TeX trick. --kasal, 16nov03
		492
		493	\def\parseargdef#1{%
		494	\expandafter \doparseargdef \csname\string#1\endcsname #1%
		495	}
		496	\def\doparseargdef#1#2{%
		497	\def#2{\parsearg#1}%
		498	\def#1##1%
		499	}
		500
		501	% Several utility definitions with active space:
		502	{
		503	\obeyspaces
		504	\gdef\obeyedspace{ }
		505
		506	% Make each space character in the input produce a normal interword
		507	% space in the output. Don't allow a line break at this space, as this
		508	% is used only in environments like @example, where each line of input
		509	% should produce a line of output anyway.
		510	%
		511	\gdef\sepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\tie}
		512
		513	% If an index command is used in an @example environment, any spaces
		514	% therein should become regular spaces in the raw index file, not the
		515	% expansion of \tie (\leavevmode \penalty \@M \ ).
		516	\gdef\unsepspaces{\let =\space}
		517	}
		518
		519
		520	\def\flushcr{\ifx\par\lisppar \def\next##1{}\else \let\next=\relax \fi \next}
		521
		522	% Define the framework for environments in texinfo.tex. It's used like this:
		523	%
		524	% \envdef\foo{...}
		525	% \def\Efoo{...}
		526	%
		527	% It's the responsibility of \envdef to insert \begingroup before the
		528	% actual body; @end closes the group after calling \Efoo. \envdef also
		529	% defines \thisenv, so the current environment is known; @end checks
		530	% whether the environment name matches. The \checkenv macro can also be
		531	% used to check whether the current environment is the one expected.
		532	%
		533	% Non-false conditionals (@iftex, @ifset) don't fit into this, so they
		534	% are not treated as environments; they don't open a group. (The
		535	% implementation of @end takes care not to call \endgroup in this
		536	% special case.)
		537
		538
		539	% At run-time, environments start with this:
		540	\def\startenvironment#1{\begingroup\def\thisenv{#1}}
		541	% initialize
		542	\let\thisenv\empty
		543
		544	% ... but they get defined via ``\envdef\foo{...}'':
		545	\long\def\envdef#1#2{\def#1{\startenvironment#1#2}}
		546	\def\envparseargdef#1#2{\parseargdef#1{\startenvironment#1#2}}
		547
		548	% Check whether we're in the right environment:
		549	\def\checkenv#1{%
		550	\def\temp{#1}%
		551	\ifx\thisenv\temp
		552	\else
		553	\badenverr
		554	\fi
		555	}
		556
		557	% Environment mismatch, #1 expected:
		558	\def\badenverr{%
		559	\errhelp = \EMsimple
		560	\errmessage{This command can appear only \inenvironment\temp,
		561	not \inenvironment\thisenv}%
		562	}
		563	\def\inenvironment#1{%
		564	\ifx#1\empty
		565	outside of any environment%
		566	\else
		567	in environment \expandafter\string#1%
		568	\fi
		569	}
		570
		571	% @end foo executes the definition of \Efoo.
		572	% But first, it executes a specialized version of \checkenv
		573	%
		574	\parseargdef\end{%
		575	\if 1\csname iscond.#1\endcsname
		576	\else
		577	% The general wording of \badenverr may not be ideal.
		578	\expandafter\checkenv\csname#1\endcsname
		579	\csname E#1\endcsname
		580	\endgroup
		581	\fi
		582	}
		583
		584	\newhelp\EMsimple{Press RETURN to continue.}
		585
		586
		587	% Be sure we're in horizontal mode when doing a tie, since we make space
		588	% equivalent to this in @example-like environments. Otherwise, a space
		589	% at the beginning of a line will start with \penalty -- and
		590	% since \penalty is valid in vertical mode, we'd end up putting the
		591	% penalty on the vertical list instead of in the new paragraph.
		592	{\catcode`@ = 11
		593	% Avoid using \@M directly, because that causes trouble
		594	% if the definition is written into an index file.
		595	\global\let\tiepenalty = \@M
		596	\gdef\tie{\leavevmode\penalty\tiepenalty\ }
		597	}
		598
		599	% @: forces normal size whitespace following.
		600	\def\:{\spacefactor=1000 }
		601
		602	% @* forces a line break.
		603	\def\*{\unskip\hfil\break\hbox{}\ignorespaces}
		604
		605	% @/ allows a line break.
		606	\let\/=\allowbreak
		607
		608	% @. is an end-of-sentence period.
		609	\def\.{.\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space}
		610
		611	% @! is an end-of-sentence bang.
		612	\def\!{!\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space}
		613
		614	% @? is an end-of-sentence query.
		615	\def\?{?\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space}
		616
		617	% @frenchspacing on|off says whether to put extra space after punctuation.
		618	%
		619	\def\onword{on}
		620	\def\offword{off}
		621	%
		622	\parseargdef\frenchspacing{%
		623	\def\temp{#1}%
		624	\ifx\temp\onword \plainfrenchspacing
		625	\else\ifx\temp\offword \plainnonfrenchspacing
		626	\else
		627	\errhelp = \EMsimple
		628	\errmessage{Unknown @frenchspacing option `\temp', must be on|off}%
		629	\fi\fi
		630	}
		631
		632	% @w prevents a word break. Without the \leavevmode, @w at the
		633	% beginning of a paragraph, when TeX is still in vertical mode, would
		634	% produce a whole line of output instead of starting the paragraph.
		635	\def\w#1{\leavevmode\hbox{#1}}
		636
		637	% @group ... @end group forces ... to be all on one page, by enclosing
		638	% it in a TeX vbox. We use \vtop instead of \vbox to construct the box
		639	% to keep its height that of a normal line. According to the rules for
		640	% \topskip (p.114 of the TeXbook), the glue inserted is
		641	% max (\topskip - \ht (first item), 0). If that height is large,
		642	% therefore, no glue is inserted, and the space between the headline and
		643	% the text is small, which looks bad.
		644	%
		645	% Another complication is that the group might be very large. This can
		646	% cause the glue on the previous page to be unduly stretched, because it
		647	% does not have much material. In this case, it's better to add an
		648	% explicit \vfill so that the extra space is at the bottom. The
		649	% threshold for doing this is if the group is more than \vfilllimit
		650	% percent of a page (\vfilllimit can be changed inside of @tex).
		651	%
		652	\newbox\groupbox
		653	\def\vfilllimit{0.7}
		654	%
		655	\envdef\group{%
		656	\ifnum\catcode`\^^M=\active \else
		657	\errhelp = \groupinvalidhelp
		658	\errmessage{@group invalid in context where filling is enabled}%
		659	\fi
		660	\startsavinginserts
		661	%
		662	\setbox\groupbox = \vtop\bgroup
		663	% Do @comment since we are called inside an environment such as
		664	% @example, where each end-of-line in the input causes an
		665	% end-of-line in the output. We don't want the end-of-line after
		666	% the `@group' to put extra space in the output. Since @group
		667	% should appear on a line by itself (according to the Texinfo
		668	% manual), we don't worry about eating any user text.
		669	\comment
		670	}
		671	%
		672	% The \vtop produces a box with normal height and large depth; thus, TeX puts
		673	% \baselineskip glue before it, and (when the next line of text is done)
		674	% \lineskip glue after it. Thus, space below is not quite equal to space
		675	% above. But it's pretty close.
		676	\def\Egroup{%
		677	% To get correct interline space between the last line of the group
		678	% and the first line afterwards, we have to propagate \prevdepth.
		679	\endgraf % Not \par, as it may have been set to \lisppar.
		680	\global\dimen1 = \prevdepth
		681	\egroup % End the \vtop.
		682	% \dimen0 is the vertical size of the group's box.
		683	\dimen0 = \ht\groupbox \advance\dimen0 by \dp\groupbox
		684	% \dimen2 is how much space is left on the page (more or less).
		685	\dimen2 = \pageheight \advance\dimen2 by -\pagetotal
		686	% if the group doesn't fit on the current page, and it's a big big
		687	% group, force a page break.
		688	\ifdim \dimen0 > \dimen2
		689	\ifdim \pagetotal < \vfilllimit\pageheight
		690	\page
		691	\fi
		692	\fi
		693	\box\groupbox
		694	\prevdepth = \dimen1
		695	\checkinserts
		696	}
		697	%
		698	% TeX puts in an \escapechar (i.e., `@') at the beginning of the help
		699	% message, so this ends up printing `@group can only ...'.
		700	%
		701	\newhelp\groupinvalidhelp{%
		702	group can only be used in environments such as @example,^^J%
		703	where each line of input produces a line of output.}
		704
		705	% @need space-in-mils
		706	% forces a page break if there is not space-in-mils remaining.
		707
		708	\newdimen\mil \mil=0.001in
		709
		710	\parseargdef\need{%
		711	% Ensure vertical mode, so we don't make a big box in the middle of a
		712	% paragraph.
		713	\par
		714	%
		715	% If the @need value is less than one line space, it's useless.
		716	\dimen0 = #1\mil
		717	\dimen2 = \ht\strutbox
		718	\advance\dimen2 by \dp\strutbox
		719	\ifdim\dimen0 > \dimen2
		720	%
		721	% Do a \strut just to make the height of this box be normal, so the
		722	% normal leading is inserted relative to the preceding line.
		723	% And a page break here is fine.
		724	\vtop to #1\mil{\strut\vfil}%
		725	%
		726	% TeX does not even consider page breaks if a penalty added to the
		727	% main vertical list is 10000 or more. But in order to see if the
		728	% empty box we just added fits on the page, we must make it consider
		729	% page breaks. On the other hand, we don't want to actually break the
		730	% page after the empty box. So we use a penalty of 9999.
		731	%
		732	% There is an extremely small chance that TeX will actually break the
		733	% page at this \penalty, if there are no other feasible breakpoints in
		734	% sight. (If the user is using lots of big @group commands, which
		735	% almost-but-not-quite fill up a page, TeX will have a hard time doing
		736	% good page breaking, for example.) However, I could not construct an
		737	% example where a page broke at this \penalty; if it happens in a real
		738	% document, then we can reconsider our strategy.
		739	\penalty9999
		740	%
		741	% Back up by the size of the box, whether we did a page break or not.
		742	\kern -#1\mil
		743	%
		744	% Do not allow a page break right after this kern.
		745	\nobreak
		746	\fi
		747	}
		748
		749	% @br forces paragraph break (and is undocumented).
		750
		751	\let\br = \par
		752
		753	% @page forces the start of a new page.
		754	%
		755	\def\page{\par\vfill\supereject}
		756
		757	% @exdent text....
		758	% outputs text on separate line in roman font, starting at standard page margin
		759
		760	% This records the amount of indent in the innermost environment.
		761	% That's how much \exdent should take out.
		762	\newskip\exdentamount
		763
		764	% This defn is used inside fill environments such as @defun.
		765	\parseargdef\exdent{\hfil\break\hbox{\kern -\exdentamount{\rm#1}}\hfil\break}
		766
		767	% This defn is used inside nofill environments such as @example.
		768	\parseargdef\nofillexdent{{\advance \leftskip by -\exdentamount
		769	\leftline{\hskip\leftskip{\rm#1}}}}
		770
		771	% @inmargin{WHICH}{TEXT} puts TEXT in the WHICH margin next to the current
		772	% paragraph. For more general purposes, use the \margin insertion
		773	% class. WHICH is `l' or `r'. Not documented, written for gawk manual.
		774	%
		775	\newskip\inmarginspacing \inmarginspacing=1cm
		776	\def\strutdepth{\dp\strutbox}
		777	%
		778	\def\doinmargin#1#2{\strut\vadjust{%
		779	\nobreak
		780	\kern-\strutdepth
		781	\vtop to \strutdepth{%
		782	\baselineskip=\strutdepth
		783	\vss
		784	% if you have multiple lines of stuff to put here, you'll need to
		785	% make the vbox yourself of the appropriate size.
		786	\ifx#1l%
		787	\llap{\ignorespaces #2\hskip\inmarginspacing}%
		788	\else
		789	\rlap{\hskip\hsize \hskip\inmarginspacing \ignorespaces #2}%
		790	\fi
		791	\null
		792	}%
		793	}}
		794	\def\inleftmargin{\doinmargin l}
		795	\def\inrightmargin{\doinmargin r}
		796	%
		797	% @inmargin{TEXT [, RIGHT-TEXT]}
		798	% (if RIGHT-TEXT is given, use TEXT for left page, RIGHT-TEXT for right;
		799	% else use TEXT for both).
		800	%
		801	\def\inmargin#1{\parseinmargin #1,,\finish}
		802	\def\parseinmargin#1,#2,#3\finish{% not perfect, but better than nothing.
		803	\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
		804	\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
		805	\def\lefttext{#1}% have both texts
		806	\def\righttext{#2}%
		807	\else
		808	\def\lefttext{#1}% have only one text
		809	\def\righttext{#1}%
		810	\fi
		811	%
		812	\ifodd\pageno
		813	\def\temp{\inrightmargin\righttext}% odd page -> outside is right margin
		814	\else
		815	\def\temp{\inleftmargin\lefttext}%
		816	\fi
		817	\temp
		818	}
		819
		820	% @| inserts a changebar to the left of the current line. It should
		821	% surround any changed text. This approach does *not* work if the
		822	% change spans more than two lines of output. To handle that, we would
		823	% have adopt a much more difficult approach (putting marks into the main
		824	% vertical list for the beginning and end of each change). This command
		825	% is not documented, not supported, and doesn't work.
		826	%
		827	\def\|{%
		828	% \vadjust can only be used in horizontal mode.
		829	\leavevmode
		830	%
		831	% Append this vertical mode material after the current line in the output.
		832	\vadjust{%
		833	% We want to insert a rule with the height and depth of the current
		834	% leading; that is exactly what \strutbox is supposed to record.
		835	\vskip-\baselineskip
		836	%
		837	% \vadjust-items are inserted at the left edge of the type. So
		838	% the \llap here moves out into the left-hand margin.
		839	\llap{%
		840	%
		841	% For a thicker or thinner bar, change the `1pt'.
		842	\vrule height\baselineskip width1pt
		843	%
		844	% This is the space between the bar and the text.
		845	\hskip 12pt
		846	}%
		847	}%
		848	}
		849
		850	% @include FILE -- \input text of FILE.
		851	%
		852	\def\include{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\includezzz}
		853	\def\includezzz#1{%
		854	\pushthisfilestack
		855	\def\thisfile{#1}%
		856	{%
		857	\makevalueexpandable % we want to expand any @value in FILE.
		858	\turnoffactive % and allow special characters in the expansion
		859	\indexnofonts % Allow `@@' and other weird things in file names.
		860	\wlog{texinfo.tex: doing @include of #1^^J}%
		861	\edef\temp{\noexpand\input #1 }%
		862	%
		863	% This trickery is to read FILE outside of a group, in case it makes
		864	% definitions, etc.
		865	\expandafter
		866	}\temp
		867	\popthisfilestack
		868	}
		869	\def\filenamecatcodes{%
		870	\catcode`\\=\other
		871	\catcode`~=\other
		872	\catcode`^=\other
		873	\catcode`_=\other
		874	\catcode`|=\other
		875	\catcode`<=\other
		876	\catcode`>=\other
		877	\catcode`+=\other
		878	\catcode`-=\other
		879	\catcode`\`=\other
		880	\catcode`\'=\other
		881	}
		882
		883	\def\pushthisfilestack{%
		884	\expandafter\pushthisfilestackX\popthisfilestack\StackTerm
		885	}
		886	\def\pushthisfilestackX{%
		887	\expandafter\pushthisfilestackY\thisfile\StackTerm
		888	}
		889	\def\pushthisfilestackY #1\StackTerm #2\StackTerm {%
		890	\gdef\popthisfilestack{\gdef\thisfile{#1}\gdef\popthisfilestack{#2}}%
		891	}
		892
		893	\def\popthisfilestack{\errthisfilestackempty}
		894	\def\errthisfilestackempty{\errmessage{Internal error:
		895	the stack of filenames is empty.}}
		896	%
		897	\def\thisfile{}
		898
		899	% @center line
		900	% outputs that line, centered.
		901	%
		902	\parseargdef\center{%
		903	\ifhmode
		904	\let\centersub\centerH
		905	\else
		906	\let\centersub\centerV
		907	\fi
		908	\centersub{\hfil \ignorespaces#1\unskip \hfil}%
		909	\let\centersub\relax % don't let the definition persist, just in case
		910	}
		911	\def\centerH#1{{%
		912	\hfil\break
		913	\advance\hsize by -\leftskip
		914	\advance\hsize by -\rightskip
		915	\line{#1}%
		916	\break
		917	}}
		918	%
		919	\newcount\centerpenalty
		920	\def\centerV#1{%
		921	% The idea here is the same as in \startdefun, \cartouche, etc.: if
		922	% @center is the first thing after a section heading, we need to wipe
		923	% out the negative parskip inserted by \sectionheading, but still
		924	% prevent a page break here.
		925	\centerpenalty = \lastpenalty
		926	\ifnum\centerpenalty>10000 \vskip\parskip \fi
		927	\ifnum\centerpenalty>9999 \penalty\centerpenalty \fi
		928	\line{\kern\leftskip #1\kern\rightskip}%
		929	}
		930
		931	% @sp n outputs n lines of vertical space
		932	%
		933	\parseargdef\sp{\vskip #1\baselineskip}
		934
		935	% @comment ...line which is ignored...
		936	% @c is the same as @comment
		937	% @ignore ... @end ignore is another way to write a comment
		938	%
		939	\def\comment{\begingroup \catcode`\^^M=\other%
		940	\catcode`\@=\other \catcode`\{=\other \catcode`\}=\other%
		941	\commentxxx}
		942	{\catcode`\^^M=\other \gdef\commentxxx#1^^M{\endgroup}}
		943	%
		944	\let\c=\comment
		945
		946	% @paragraphindent NCHARS
		947	% We'll use ems for NCHARS, close enough.
		948	% NCHARS can also be the word `asis' or `none'.
		949	% We cannot feasibly implement @paragraphindent asis, though.
		950	%
		951	\def\asisword{asis} % no translation, these are keywords
		952	\def\noneword{none}
		953	%
		954	\parseargdef\paragraphindent{%
		955	\def\temp{#1}%
		956	\ifx\temp\asisword
		957	\else
		958	\ifx\temp\noneword
		959	\defaultparindent = 0pt
		960	\else
		961	\defaultparindent = #1em
		962	\fi
		963	\fi
		964	\parindent = \defaultparindent
		965	}
		966
		967	% @exampleindent NCHARS
		968	% We'll use ems for NCHARS like @paragraphindent.
		969	% It seems @exampleindent asis isn't necessary, but
		970	% I preserve it to make it similar to @paragraphindent.
		971	\parseargdef\exampleindent{%
		972	\def\temp{#1}%
		973	\ifx\temp\asisword
		974	\else
		975	\ifx\temp\noneword
		976	\lispnarrowing = 0pt
		977	\else
		978	\lispnarrowing = #1em
		979	\fi
		980	\fi
		981	}
		982
		983	% @firstparagraphindent WORD
		984	% If WORD is `none', then suppress indentation of the first paragraph
		985	% after a section heading. If WORD is `insert', then do indent at such
		986	% paragraphs.
		987	%
		988	% The paragraph indentation is suppressed or not by calling
		989	% \suppressfirstparagraphindent, which the sectioning commands do.
		990	% We switch the definition of this back and forth according to WORD.
		991	% By default, we suppress indentation.
		992	%
		993	\def\suppressfirstparagraphindent{\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent}
		994	\def\insertword{insert}
		995	%
		996	\parseargdef\firstparagraphindent{%
		997	\def\temp{#1}%
		998	\ifx\temp\noneword
		999	\let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \dosuppressfirstparagraphindent
		1000	\else\ifx\temp\insertword
		1001	\let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \relax
		1002	\else
		1003	\errhelp = \EMsimple
		1004	\errmessage{Unknown @firstparagraphindent option `\temp'}%
		1005	\fi\fi
		1006	}
		1007
		1008	% Here is how we actually suppress indentation. Redefine \everypar to
		1009	% \kern backwards by \parindent, and then reset itself to empty.
		1010	%
		1011	% We also make \indent itself not actually do anything until the next
		1012	% paragraph.
		1013	%
		1014	\gdef\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent{%
		1015	\gdef\indent {\restorefirstparagraphindent \indent}%
		1016	\gdef\noindent{\restorefirstparagraphindent \noindent}%
		1017	\global\everypar = {\kern -\parindent \restorefirstparagraphindent}%
		1018	}
		1019	%
		1020	\gdef\restorefirstparagraphindent{%
		1021	\global\let\indent = \ptexindent
		1022	\global\let\noindent = \ptexnoindent
		1023	\global\everypar = {}%
		1024	}
		1025
		1026
		1027	% @refill is a no-op.
		1028	\let\refill=\relax
		1029
		1030	% If working on a large document in chapters, it is convenient to
		1031	% be able to disable indexing, cross-referencing, and contents, for test runs.
		1032	% This is done with @novalidate (before @setfilename).
		1033	%
		1034	\newif\iflinks \linkstrue % by default we want the aux files.
		1035	\let\novalidate = \linksfalse
		1036
		1037	% @setfilename is done at the beginning of every texinfo file.
		1038	% So open here the files we need to have open while reading the input.
		1039	% This makes it possible to make a .fmt file for texinfo.
		1040	\def\setfilename{%
		1041	\fixbackslash % Turn off hack to swallow `\input texinfo'.
		1042	\iflinks
		1043	\tryauxfile
		1044	% Open the new aux file. TeX will close it automatically at exit.
		1045	\immediate\openout\auxfile=\jobname.aux
		1046	\fi % \openindices needs to do some work in any case.
		1047	\openindices
		1048	\let\setfilename=\comment % Ignore extra @setfilename cmds.
		1049	%
		1050	% If texinfo.cnf is present on the system, read it.
		1051	% Useful for site-wide @afourpaper, etc.
		1052	\openin 1 texinfo.cnf
		1053	\ifeof 1 \else \input texinfo.cnf \fi
		1054	\closein 1
		1055	%
		1056	\comment % Ignore the actual filename.
		1057	}
		1058
		1059	% Called from \setfilename.
		1060	%
		1061	\def\openindices{%
		1062	\newindex{cp}%
		1063	\newcodeindex{fn}%
		1064	\newcodeindex{vr}%
		1065	\newcodeindex{tp}%
		1066	\newcodeindex{ky}%
		1067	\newcodeindex{pg}%
		1068	}
		1069
		1070	% @bye.
		1071	\outer\def\bye{\pagealignmacro\tracingstats=1\ptexend}
		1072
		1073
		1074	\message{pdf,}
		1075	% adobe `portable' document format
		1076	\newcount\tempnum
		1077	\newcount\lnkcount
		1078	\newtoks\filename
		1079	\newcount\filenamelength
		1080	\newcount\pgn
		1081	\newtoks\toksA
		1082	\newtoks\toksB
		1083	\newtoks\toksC
		1084	\newtoks\toksD
		1085	\newbox\boxA
		1086	\newcount\countA
		1087	\newif\ifpdf
		1088	\newif\ifpdfmakepagedest
		1089
		1090	% when pdftex is run in dvi mode, \pdfoutput is defined (so \pdfoutput=1
		1091	% can be set). So we test for \relax and 0 as well as being undefined.
		1092	\ifx\pdfoutput\thisisundefined
		1093	\else
		1094	\ifx\pdfoutput\relax
		1095	\else
		1096	\ifcase\pdfoutput
		1097	\else
		1098	\pdftrue
		1099	\fi
		1100	\fi
		1101	\fi
		1102
		1103	% PDF uses PostScript string constants for the names of xref targets,
		1104	% for display in the outlines, and in other places. Thus, we have to
		1105	% double any backslashes. Otherwise, a name like "\node" will be
		1106	% interpreted as a newline (\n), followed by o, d, e. Not good.
		1107	%
		1108	% See http://www.ntg.nl/pipermail/ntg-pdftex/2004-July/000654.html and
		1109	% related messages. The final outcome is that it is up to the TeX user
		1110	% to double the backslashes and otherwise make the string valid, so
		1111	% that's what we do. pdftex 1.30.0 (ca.2005) introduced a primitive to
		1112	% do this reliably, so we use it.
		1113
		1114	% #1 is a control sequence in which to do the replacements,
		1115	% which we \xdef.
		1116	\def\txiescapepdf#1{%
		1117	\ifx\pdfescapestring\thisisundefined
		1118	% No primitive available; should we give a warning or log?
		1119	% Many times it won't matter.
		1120	\else
		1121	% The expandable \pdfescapestring primitive escapes parentheses,
		1122	% backslashes, and other special chars.
		1123	\xdef#1{\pdfescapestring{#1}}%
		1124	\fi
		1125	}
		1126
		1127	\newhelp\nopdfimagehelp{Texinfo supports .png, .jpg, .jpeg, and .pdf images
		1128	with PDF output, and none of those formats could be found. (.eps cannot
		1129	be supported due to the design of the PDF format; use regular TeX (DVI
		1130	output) for that.)}
		1131
		1132	\ifpdf
		1133	%
		1134	% Color manipulation macros using ideas from pdfcolor.tex,
		1135	% except using rgb instead of cmyk; the latter is said to render as a
		1136	% very dark gray on-screen and a very dark halftone in print, instead
		1137	% of actual black. The dark red here is dark enough to print on paper as
		1138	% nearly black, but still distinguishable for online viewing. We use
		1139	% black by default, though.
		1140	\def\rgbDarkRed{0.50 0.09 0.12}
		1141	\def\rgbBlack{0 0 0}
		1142	%
		1143	% k sets the color for filling (usual text, etc.);
		1144	% K sets the color for stroking (thin rules, e.g., normal _'s).
		1145	\def\pdfsetcolor#1{\pdfliteral{#1 rg #1 RG}}
		1146	%
		1147	% Set color, and create a mark which defines \thiscolor accordingly,
		1148	% so that \makeheadline knows which color to restore.
		1149	\def\setcolor#1{%
		1150	\xdef\lastcolordefs{\gdef\noexpand\thiscolor{#1}}%
		1151	\domark
		1152	\pdfsetcolor{#1}%
		1153	}
		1154	%
		1155	\def\maincolor{\rgbBlack}
		1156	\pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}
		1157	\edef\thiscolor{\maincolor}
		1158	\def\lastcolordefs{}
		1159	%
		1160	\def\makefootline{%
		1161	\baselineskip24pt
		1162	\line{\pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}\the\footline}%
		1163	}
		1164	%
		1165	\def\makeheadline{%
		1166	\vbox to 0pt{%
		1167	\vskip-22.5pt
		1168	\line{%
		1169	\vbox to8.5pt{}%
		1170	% Extract \thiscolor definition from the marks.
		1171	\getcolormarks
		1172	% Typeset the headline with \maincolor, then restore the color.
		1173	\pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}\the\headline\pdfsetcolor{\thiscolor}%
		1174	}%
		1175	\vss
		1176	}%
		1177	\nointerlineskip
		1178	}
		1179	%
		1180	%
		1181	\pdfcatalog{/PageMode /UseOutlines}
		1182	%
		1183	% #1 is image name, #2 width (might be empty/whitespace), #3 height (ditto).
		1184	\def\dopdfimage#1#2#3{%
		1185	\def\pdfimagewidth{#2}\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
		1186	\def\pdfimageheight{#3}\setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}%
		1187	%
		1188	% pdftex (and the PDF format) support .pdf, .png, .jpg (among
		1189	% others). Let's try in that order, PDF first since if
		1190	% someone has a scalable image, presumably better to use that than a
		1191	% bitmap.
		1192	\let\pdfimgext=\empty
		1193	\begingroup
		1194	\openin 1 #1.pdf \ifeof 1
		1195	\openin 1 #1.PDF \ifeof 1
		1196	\openin 1 #1.png \ifeof 1
		1197	\openin 1 #1.jpg \ifeof 1
		1198	\openin 1 #1.jpeg \ifeof 1
		1199	\openin 1 #1.JPG \ifeof 1
		1200	\errhelp = \nopdfimagehelp
		1201	\errmessage{Could not find image file #1 for pdf}%
		1202	\else \gdef\pdfimgext{JPG}%
		1203	\fi
		1204	\else \gdef\pdfimgext{jpeg}%
		1205	\fi
		1206	\else \gdef\pdfimgext{jpg}%
		1207	\fi
		1208	\else \gdef\pdfimgext{png}%
		1209	\fi
		1210	\else \gdef\pdfimgext{PDF}%
		1211	\fi
		1212	\else \gdef\pdfimgext{pdf}%
		1213	\fi
		1214	\closein 1
		1215	\endgroup
		1216	%
		1217	% without \immediate, ancient pdftex seg faults when the same image is
		1218	% included twice. (Version 3.14159-pre-1.0-unofficial-20010704.)
		1219	\ifnum\pdftexversion < 14
		1220	\immediate\pdfimage
		1221	\else
		1222	\immediate\pdfximage
		1223	\fi
		1224	\ifdim \wd0 >0pt width \pdfimagewidth \fi
		1225	\ifdim \wd2 >0pt height \pdfimageheight \fi
		1226	\ifnum\pdftexversion<13
		1227	#1.\pdfimgext
		1228	\else
		1229	{#1.\pdfimgext}%
		1230	\fi
		1231	\ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 \else
		1232	\pdfrefximage \pdflastximage
		1233	\fi}
		1234	%
		1235	\def\pdfmkdest#1{{%
		1236	% We have to set dummies so commands such as @code, and characters
		1237	% such as \, aren't expanded when present in a section title.
		1238	\indexnofonts
		1239	\turnoffactive
		1240	\makevalueexpandable
		1241	\def\pdfdestname{#1}%
		1242	\txiescapepdf\pdfdestname
		1243	\safewhatsit{\pdfdest name{\pdfdestname} xyz}%
		1244	}}
		1245	%
		1246	% used to mark target names; must be expandable.
		1247	\def\pdfmkpgn#1{#1}
		1248	%
		1249	% by default, use black for everything.
		1250	\def\urlcolor{\rgbBlack}
		1251	\def\linkcolor{\rgbBlack}
		1252	\def\endlink{\setcolor{\maincolor}\pdfendlink}
		1253	%
		1254	% Adding outlines to PDF; macros for calculating structure of outlines
		1255	% come from Petr Olsak
		1256	\def\expnumber#1{\expandafter\ifx\csname#1\endcsname\relax 0%
		1257	\else \csname#1\endcsname \fi}
		1258	\def\advancenumber#1{\tempnum=\expnumber{#1}\relax
		1259	\advance\tempnum by 1
		1260	\expandafter\xdef\csname#1\endcsname{\the\tempnum}}
		1261	%
		1262	% #1 is the section text, which is what will be displayed in the
		1263	% outline by the pdf viewer. #2 is the pdf expression for the number
		1264	% of subentries (or empty, for subsubsections). #3 is the node text,
		1265	% which might be empty if this toc entry had no corresponding node.
		1266	% #4 is the page number
		1267	%
		1268	\def\dopdfoutline#1#2#3#4{%
		1269	% Generate a link to the node text if that exists; else, use the
		1270	% page number. We could generate a destination for the section
		1271	% text in the case where a section has no node, but it doesn't
		1272	% seem worth the trouble, since most documents are normally structured.
		1273	\edef\pdfoutlinedest{#3}%
		1274	\ifx\pdfoutlinedest\empty
		1275	\def\pdfoutlinedest{#4}%
		1276	\else
		1277	\txiescapepdf\pdfoutlinedest
		1278	\fi
		1279	%
		1280	% Also escape PDF chars in the display string.
		1281	\edef\pdfoutlinetext{#1}%
		1282	\txiescapepdf\pdfoutlinetext
		1283	%
		1284	\pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\pdfoutlinedest}}#2{\pdfoutlinetext}%
		1285	}
		1286	%
		1287	\def\pdfmakeoutlines{%
		1288	\begingroup
		1289	% Read toc silently, to get counts of subentries for \pdfoutline.
		1290	\def\partentry##1##2##3##4{}% ignore parts in the outlines
		1291	\def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{%
		1292	\def\thischapnum{##2}%
		1293	\def\thissecnum{0}%
		1294	\def\thissubsecnum{0}%
		1295	}%
		1296	\def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
		1297	\advancenumber{chap\thischapnum}%
		1298	\def\thissecnum{##2}%
		1299	\def\thissubsecnum{0}%
		1300	}%
		1301	\def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
		1302	\advancenumber{sec\thissecnum}%
		1303	\def\thissubsecnum{##2}%
		1304	}%
		1305	\def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
		1306	\advancenumber{subsec\thissubsecnum}%
		1307	}%
		1308	\def\thischapnum{0}%
		1309	\def\thissecnum{0}%
		1310	\def\thissubsecnum{0}%
		1311	%
		1312	% use \def rather than \let here because we redefine \chapentry et
		1313	% al. a second time, below.
		1314	\def\appentry{\numchapentry}%
		1315	\def\appsecentry{\numsecentry}%
		1316	\def\appsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}%
		1317	\def\appsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}%
		1318	\def\unnchapentry{\numchapentry}%
		1319	\def\unnsecentry{\numsecentry}%
		1320	\def\unnsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}%
		1321	\def\unnsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}%
		1322	\readdatafile{toc}%
		1323	%
		1324	% Read toc second time, this time actually producing the outlines.
		1325	% The `-' means take the \expnumber as the absolute number of
		1326	% subentries, which we calculated on our first read of the .toc above.
		1327	%
		1328	% We use the node names as the destinations.
		1329	\def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{%
		1330	\dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{chap##2}}{##3}{##4}}%
		1331	\def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
		1332	\dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{sec##2}}{##3}{##4}}%
		1333	\def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
		1334	\dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{subsec##2}}{##3}{##4}}%
		1335	\def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% count is always zero
		1336	\dopdfoutline{##1}{}{##3}{##4}}%
		1337	%
		1338	% PDF outlines are displayed using system fonts, instead of
		1339	% document fonts. Therefore we cannot use special characters,
		1340	% since the encoding is unknown. For example, the eogonek from
		1341	% Latin 2 (0xea) gets translated to a | character. Info from
		1342	% Staszek Wawrykiewicz, 19 Jan 2004 04:09:24 +0100.
		1343	%
		1344	% TODO this right, we have to translate 8-bit characters to
		1345	% their "best" equivalent, based on the @documentencoding. Too
		1346	% much work for too little return. Just use the ASCII equivalents
		1347	% we use for the index sort strings.
		1348	%
		1349	\indexnofonts
		1350	\setupdatafile
		1351	% We can have normal brace characters in the PDF outlines, unlike
		1352	% Texinfo index files. So set that up.
		1353	\def\{{\lbracecharliteral}%
		1354	\def\}{\rbracecharliteral}%
		1355	\catcode`\\=\active \otherbackslash
		1356	\input \tocreadfilename
		1357	\endgroup
		1358	}
		1359	{\catcode`[=1 \catcode`]=2
		1360	\catcode`{=\other \catcode`}=\other
		1361	\gdef\lbracecharliteral[{]%
		1362	\gdef\rbracecharliteral[}]%
		1363	]
		1364	%
		1365	\def\skipspaces#1{\def\PP{#1}\def\D{|}%
		1366	\ifx\PP\D\let\nextsp\relax
		1367	\else\let\nextsp\skipspaces
		1368	\addtokens{\filename}{\PP}%
		1369	\advance\filenamelength by 1
		1370	\fi
		1371	\nextsp}
		1372	\def\getfilename#1{%
		1373	\filenamelength=0
		1374	% If we don't expand the argument now, \skipspaces will get
		1375	% snagged on things like "@value{foo}".
		1376	\edef\temp{#1}%
		1377	\expandafter\skipspaces\temp|\relax
		1378	}
		1379	\ifnum\pdftexversion < 14
		1380	\let \startlink \pdfannotlink
		1381	\else
		1382	\let \startlink \pdfstartlink
		1383	\fi
		1384	% make a live url in pdf output.
		1385	\def\pdfurl#1{%
		1386	\begingroup
		1387	% it seems we really need yet another set of dummies; have not
		1388	% tried to figure out what each command should do in the context
		1389	% of @url. for now, just make @/ a no-op, that's the only one
		1390	% people have actually reported a problem with.
		1391	%
		1392	\normalturnoffactive
		1393	\def\@{@}%
		1394	\let\/=\empty
		1395	\makevalueexpandable
		1396	% do we want to go so far as to use \indexnofonts instead of just
		1397	% special-casing \var here?
		1398	\def\var##1{##1}%
		1399	%
		1400	\leavevmode\setcolor{\urlcolor}%
		1401	\startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}%
		1402	user{/Subtype /Link /A << /S /URI /URI (#1) >>}%
		1403	\endgroup}
		1404	\def\pdfgettoks#1.{\setbox\boxA=\hbox{\toksA={#1.}\toksB={}\maketoks}}
		1405	\def\addtokens#1#2{\edef\addtoks{\noexpand#1={\the#1#2}}\addtoks}
		1406	\def\adn#1{\addtokens{\toksC}{#1}\global\countA=1\let\next=\maketoks}
		1407	\def\poptoks#1#2|ENDTOKS|{\let\first=#1\toksD={#1}\toksA={#2}}
		1408	\def\maketoks{%
		1409	\expandafter\poptoks\the\toksA|ENDTOKS|\relax
		1410	\ifx\first0\adn0
		1411	\else\ifx\first1\adn1 \else\ifx\first2\adn2 \else\ifx\first3\adn3
		1412	\else\ifx\first4\adn4 \else\ifx\first5\adn5 \else\ifx\first6\adn6
		1413	\else\ifx\first7\adn7 \else\ifx\first8\adn8 \else\ifx\first9\adn9
		1414	\else
		1415	\ifnum0=\countA\else\makelink\fi
		1416	\ifx\first.\let\next=\done\else
		1417	\let\next=\maketoks
		1418	\addtokens{\toksB}{\the\toksD}
		1419	\ifx\first,\addtokens{\toksB}{\space}\fi
		1420	\fi
		1421	\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
		1422	\next}
		1423	\def\makelink{\addtokens{\toksB}%
		1424	{\noexpand\pdflink{\the\toksC}}\toksC={}\global\countA=0}
		1425	\def\pdflink#1{%
		1426	\startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]} goto name{\pdfmkpgn{#1}}
		1427	\setcolor{\linkcolor}#1\endlink}
		1428	\def\done{\edef\st{\global\noexpand\toksA={\the\toksB}}\st}
		1429	\else
		1430	% non-pdf mode
		1431	\let\pdfmkdest = \gobble
		1432	\let\pdfurl = \gobble
		1433	\let\endlink = \relax
		1434	\let\setcolor = \gobble
		1435	\let\pdfsetcolor = \gobble
		1436	\let\pdfmakeoutlines = \relax
		1437	\fi % \ifx\pdfoutput
		1438
		1439
		1440	\message{fonts,}
		1441
		1442	% Change the current font style to #1, remembering it in \curfontstyle.
		1443	% For now, we do not accumulate font styles: @b{@i{foo}} prints foo in
		1444	% italics, not bold italics.
		1445	%
		1446	\def\setfontstyle#1{%
		1447	\def\curfontstyle{#1}% not as a control sequence, because we are \edef'd.
		1448	\csname ten#1\endcsname % change the current font
		1449	}
		1450
		1451	% Select #1 fonts with the current style.
		1452	%
		1453	\def\selectfonts#1{\csname #1fonts\endcsname \csname\curfontstyle\endcsname}
		1454
		1455	\def\rm{\fam=0 \setfontstyle{rm}}
		1456	\def\it{\fam=\itfam \setfontstyle{it}}
		1457	\def\sl{\fam=\slfam \setfontstyle{sl}}
		1458	\def\bf{\fam=\bffam \setfontstyle{bf}}\def\bfstylename{bf}
		1459	\def\tt{\fam=\ttfam \setfontstyle{tt}}
		1460
		1461	% Unfortunately, we have to override this for titles and the like, since
		1462	% in those cases "rm" is bold. Sigh.
		1463	\def\rmisbold{\rm\def\curfontstyle{bf}}
		1464
		1465	% Texinfo sort of supports the sans serif font style, which plain TeX does not.
		1466	% So we set up a \sf.
		1467	\newfam\sffam
		1468	\def\sf{\fam=\sffam \setfontstyle{sf}}
		1469	\let\li = \sf % Sometimes we call it \li, not \sf.
		1470
		1471	% We don't need math for this font style.
		1472	\def\ttsl{\setfontstyle{ttsl}}
		1473
		1474
		1475	% Set the baselineskip to #1, and the lineskip and strut size
		1476	% correspondingly. There is no deep meaning behind these magic numbers
		1477	% used as factors; they just match (closely enough) what Knuth defined.
		1478	%
		1479	\def\lineskipfactor{.08333}
		1480	\def\strutheightpercent{.70833}
		1481	\def\strutdepthpercent {.29167}
		1482	%
		1483	% can get a sort of poor man's double spacing by redefining this.
		1484	\def\baselinefactor{1}
		1485	%
		1486	\newdimen\textleading
		1487	\def\setleading#1{%
		1488	\dimen0 = #1\relax
		1489	\normalbaselineskip = \baselinefactor\dimen0
		1490	\normallineskip = \lineskipfactor\normalbaselineskip
		1491	\normalbaselines
		1492	\setbox\strutbox =\hbox{%
		1493	\vrule width0pt height\strutheightpercent\baselineskip
		1494	depth \strutdepthpercent \baselineskip
		1495	}%
		1496	}
		1497
		1498	% PDF CMaps. See also LaTeX's t1.cmap.
		1499	%
		1500	% do nothing with this by default.
		1501	\expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1\endcsname\gobble
		1502	\expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1IT\endcsname\gobble
		1503	\expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1TT\endcsname\gobble
		1504
		1505	% if we are producing pdf, and we have \pdffontattr, then define cmaps.
		1506	% (\pdffontattr was introduced many years ago, but people still run
		1507	% older pdftex's; it's easy to conditionalize, so we do.)
		1508	\ifpdf \ifx\pdffontattr\thisisundefined \else
		1509	\begingroup
		1510	\catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char.
		1511	\catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap
		1512	%%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit)
		1513	%%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit)
		1514	%%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1-0)
		1515	%%Title: (TeX-OT1-0 TeX OT1 0)
		1516	%%Version: 1.000
		1517	%%EndComments
		1518	/CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin
		1519	12 dict begin
		1520	begincmap
		1521	/CIDSystemInfo
		1522	<< /Registry (TeX)
		1523	/Ordering (OT1)
		1524	/Supplement 0
		1525	>> def
		1526	/CMapName /TeX-OT1-0 def
		1527	/CMapType 2 def
		1528	1 begincodespacerange
		1529	<00> <7F>
		1530	endcodespacerange
		1531	8 beginbfrange
		1532	<00> <01> <0393>
		1533	<09> <0A> <03A8>
		1534	<23> <26> <0023>
		1535	<28> <3B> <0028>
		1536	<3F> <5B> <003F>
		1537	<5D> <5E> <005D>
		1538	<61> <7A> <0061>
		1539	<7B> <7C> <2013>
		1540	endbfrange
		1541	40 beginbfchar
		1542	<02> <0398>
		1543	<03> <039B>
		1544	<04> <039E>
		1545	<05> <03A0>
		1546	<06> <03A3>
		1547	<07> <03D2>
		1548	<08> <03A6>
		1549	<0B> <00660066>
		1550	<0C> <00660069>
		1551	<0D> <0066006C>
		1552	<0E> <006600660069>
		1553	<0F> <00660066006C>
		1554	<10> <0131>
		1555	<11> <0237>
		1556	<12> <0060>
		1557	<13> <00B4>
		1558	<14> <02C7>
		1559	<15> <02D8>
		1560	<16> <00AF>
		1561	<17> <02DA>
		1562	<18> <00B8>
		1563	<19> <00DF>
		1564	<1A> <00E6>
		1565	<1B> <0153>
		1566	<1C> <00F8>
		1567	<1D> <00C6>
		1568	<1E> <0152>
		1569	<1F> <00D8>
		1570	<21> <0021>
		1571	<22> <201D>
		1572	<27> <2019>
		1573	<3C> <00A1>
		1574	<3D> <003D>
		1575	<3E> <00BF>
		1576	<5C> <201C>
		1577	<5F> <02D9>
		1578	<60> <2018>
		1579	<7D> <02DD>
		1580	<7E> <007E>
		1581	<7F> <00A8>
		1582	endbfchar
		1583	endcmap
		1584	CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop
		1585	end
		1586	end
		1587	%%EndResource
		1588	%%EOF
		1589	}\endgroup
		1590	\expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1\endcsname#1{%
		1591	\pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}%
		1592	}%
		1593	%
		1594	% \cmapOT1IT
		1595	\begingroup
		1596	\catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char.
		1597	\catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap
		1598	%%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit)
		1599	%%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit)
		1600	%%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1IT-0)
		1601	%%Title: (TeX-OT1IT-0 TeX OT1IT 0)
		1602	%%Version: 1.000
		1603	%%EndComments
		1604	/CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin
		1605	12 dict begin
		1606	begincmap
		1607	/CIDSystemInfo
		1608	<< /Registry (TeX)
		1609	/Ordering (OT1IT)
		1610	/Supplement 0
		1611	>> def
		1612	/CMapName /TeX-OT1IT-0 def
		1613	/CMapType 2 def
		1614	1 begincodespacerange
		1615	<00> <7F>
		1616	endcodespacerange
		1617	8 beginbfrange
		1618	<00> <01> <0393>
		1619	<09> <0A> <03A8>
		1620	<25> <26> <0025>
		1621	<28> <3B> <0028>
		1622	<3F> <5B> <003F>
		1623	<5D> <5E> <005D>
		1624	<61> <7A> <0061>
		1625	<7B> <7C> <2013>
		1626	endbfrange
		1627	42 beginbfchar
		1628	<02> <0398>
		1629	<03> <039B>
		1630	<04> <039E>
		1631	<05> <03A0>
		1632	<06> <03A3>
		1633	<07> <03D2>
		1634	<08> <03A6>
		1635	<0B> <00660066>
		1636	<0C> <00660069>
		1637	<0D> <0066006C>
		1638	<0E> <006600660069>
		1639	<0F> <00660066006C>
		1640	<10> <0131>
		1641	<11> <0237>
		1642	<12> <0060>
		1643	<13> <00B4>
		1644	<14> <02C7>
		1645	<15> <02D8>
		1646	<16> <00AF>
		1647	<17> <02DA>
		1648	<18> <00B8>
		1649	<19> <00DF>
		1650	<1A> <00E6>
		1651	<1B> <0153>
		1652	<1C> <00F8>
		1653	<1D> <00C6>
		1654	<1E> <0152>
		1655	<1F> <00D8>
		1656	<21> <0021>
		1657	<22> <201D>
		1658	<23> <0023>
		1659	<24> <00A3>
		1660	<27> <2019>
		1661	<3C> <00A1>
		1662	<3D> <003D>
		1663	<3E> <00BF>
		1664	<5C> <201C>
		1665	<5F> <02D9>
		1666	<60> <2018>
		1667	<7D> <02DD>
		1668	<7E> <007E>
		1669	<7F> <00A8>
		1670	endbfchar
		1671	endcmap
		1672	CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop
		1673	end
		1674	end
		1675	%%EndResource
		1676	%%EOF
		1677	}\endgroup
		1678	\expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1IT\endcsname#1{%
		1679	\pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}%
		1680	}%
		1681	%
		1682	% \cmapOT1TT
		1683	\begingroup
		1684	\catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char.
		1685	\catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap
		1686	%%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit)
		1687	%%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit)
		1688	%%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1TT-0)
		1689	%%Title: (TeX-OT1TT-0 TeX OT1TT 0)
		1690	%%Version: 1.000
		1691	%%EndComments
		1692	/CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin
		1693	12 dict begin
		1694	begincmap
		1695	/CIDSystemInfo
		1696	<< /Registry (TeX)
		1697	/Ordering (OT1TT)
		1698	/Supplement 0
		1699	>> def
		1700	/CMapName /TeX-OT1TT-0 def
		1701	/CMapType 2 def
		1702	1 begincodespacerange
		1703	<00> <7F>
		1704	endcodespacerange
		1705	5 beginbfrange
		1706	<00> <01> <0393>
		1707	<09> <0A> <03A8>
		1708	<21> <26> <0021>
		1709	<28> <5F> <0028>
		1710	<61> <7E> <0061>
		1711	endbfrange
		1712	32 beginbfchar
		1713	<02> <0398>
		1714	<03> <039B>
		1715	<04> <039E>
		1716	<05> <03A0>
		1717	<06> <03A3>
		1718	<07> <03D2>
		1719	<08> <03A6>
		1720	<0B> <2191>
		1721	<0C> <2193>
		1722	<0D> <0027>
		1723	<0E> <00A1>
		1724	<0F> <00BF>
		1725	<10> <0131>
		1726	<11> <0237>
		1727	<12> <0060>
		1728	<13> <00B4>
		1729	<14> <02C7>
		1730	<15> <02D8>
		1731	<16> <00AF>
		1732	<17> <02DA>
		1733	<18> <00B8>
		1734	<19> <00DF>
		1735	<1A> <00E6>
		1736	<1B> <0153>
		1737	<1C> <00F8>
		1738	<1D> <00C6>
		1739	<1E> <0152>
		1740	<1F> <00D8>
		1741	<20> <2423>
		1742	<27> <2019>
		1743	<60> <2018>
		1744	<7F> <00A8>
		1745	endbfchar
		1746	endcmap
		1747	CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop
		1748	end
		1749	end
		1750	%%EndResource
		1751	%%EOF
		1752	}\endgroup
		1753	\expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1TT\endcsname#1{%
		1754	\pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}%
		1755	}%
		1756	\fi\fi
		1757
		1758
		1759	% Set the font macro #1 to the font named \fontprefix#2.
		1760	% #3 is the font's design size, #4 is a scale factor, #5 is the CMap
		1761	% encoding (only OT1, OT1IT and OT1TT are allowed, or empty to omit).
		1762	% Example:
		1763	% #1 = \textrm
		1764	% #2 = \rmshape
		1765	% #3 = 10
		1766	% #4 = \mainmagstep
		1767	% #5 = OT1
		1768	%
		1769	\def\setfont#1#2#3#4#5{%
		1770	\font#1=\fontprefix#2#3 scaled #4
		1771	\csname cmap#5\endcsname#1%
		1772	}
		1773	% This is what gets called when #5 of \setfont is empty.
		1774	\let\cmap\gobble
		1775	%
		1776	% (end of cmaps)
		1777
		1778	% Use cm as the default font prefix.
		1779	% To specify the font prefix, you must define \fontprefix
		1780	% before you read in texinfo.tex.
		1781	\ifx\fontprefix\thisisundefined
		1782	\def\fontprefix{cm}
		1783	\fi
		1784	% Support font families that don't use the same naming scheme as CM.
		1785	\def\rmshape{r}
		1786	\def\rmbshape{bx} % where the normal face is bold
		1787	\def\bfshape{b}
		1788	\def\bxshape{bx}
		1789	\def\ttshape{tt}
		1790	\def\ttbshape{tt}
		1791	\def\ttslshape{sltt}
		1792	\def\itshape{ti}
		1793	\def\itbshape{bxti}
		1794	\def\slshape{sl}
		1795	\def\slbshape{bxsl}
		1796	\def\sfshape{ss}
		1797	\def\sfbshape{ss}
		1798	\def\scshape{csc}
		1799	\def\scbshape{csc}
		1800
		1801	% Definitions for a main text size of 11pt. (The default in Texinfo.)
		1802	%
		1803	\def\definetextfontsizexi{%
		1804	% Text fonts (11.2pt, magstep1).
		1805	\def\textnominalsize{11pt}
		1806	\edef\mainmagstep{\magstephalf}
		1807	\setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
		1808	\setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT}
		1809	\setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
		1810	\setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1IT}
		1811	\setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
		1812	\setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
		1813	\setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
		1814	\setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT}
		1815	\font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep
		1816	\font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep
		1817	\def\textecsize{1095}
		1818
		1819	% A few fonts for @defun names and args.
		1820	\setfont\defbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1}
		1821	\setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT}
		1822	\setfont\defttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT}
		1823	\def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenbf = \defbf \let\tenttsl=\defttsl \bf}
		1824
		1825	% Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt).
		1826	\def\smallnominalsize{9pt}
		1827	\setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
		1828	\setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT}
		1829	\setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1}
		1830	\setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT}
		1831	\setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
		1832	\setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
		1833	\setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1}
		1834	\setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT}
		1835	\font\smalli=cmmi9
		1836	\font\smallsy=cmsy9
		1837	\def\smallecsize{0900}
		1838
		1839	% Fonts for small examples (8pt).
		1840	\def\smallernominalsize{8pt}
		1841	\setfont\smallerrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
		1842	\setfont\smallertt\ttshape{8}{1000}{OT1TT}
		1843	\setfont\smallerbf\bfshape{10}{800}{OT1}
		1844	\setfont\smallerit\itshape{8}{1000}{OT1IT}
		1845	\setfont\smallersl\slshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
		1846	\setfont\smallersf\sfshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
		1847	\setfont\smallersc\scshape{10}{800}{OT1}
		1848	\setfont\smallerttsl\ttslshape{10}{800}{OT1TT}
		1849	\font\smalleri=cmmi8
		1850	\font\smallersy=cmsy8
		1851	\def\smallerecsize{0800}
		1852
		1853	% Fonts for title page (20.4pt):
		1854	\def\titlenominalsize{20pt}
		1855	\setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1}
		1856	\setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1IT}
		1857	\setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1}
		1858	\setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1TT}
		1859	\setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1TT}
		1860	\setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}{OT1}
		1861	\let\titlebf=\titlerm
		1862	\setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1}
		1863	\font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3
		1864	\font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4
		1865	\def\titleecsize{2074}
		1866
		1867	% Chapter (and unnumbered) fonts (17.28pt).
		1868	\def\chapnominalsize{17pt}
		1869	\setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep2}{OT1}
		1870	\setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1IT}
		1871	\setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1}
		1872	\setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep2}{OT1TT}
		1873	\setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1TT}
		1874	\setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{17}{1000}{OT1}
		1875	\let\chapbf=\chaprm
		1876	\setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1}
		1877	\font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep2
		1878	\font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep3
		1879	\def\chapecsize{1728}
		1880
		1881	% Section fonts (14.4pt).
		1882	\def\secnominalsize{14pt}
		1883	\setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1}
		1884	\setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1IT}
		1885	\setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1}
		1886	\setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1TT}
		1887	\setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1TT}
		1888	\setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1}
		1889	\let\secbf\secrm
		1890	\setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1}
		1891	\font\seci=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1
		1892	\font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2
		1893	\def\sececsize{1440}
		1894
		1895	% Subsection fonts (13.15pt).
		1896	\def\ssecnominalsize{13pt}
		1897	\setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1}
		1898	\setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1315}{OT1IT}
		1899	\setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1315}{OT1}
		1900	\setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT}
		1901	\setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1315}{OT1TT}
		1902	\setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1}
		1903	\let\ssecbf\ssecrm
		1904	\setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{1315}{OT1}
		1905	\font\sseci=cmmi12 scaled \magstephalf
		1906	\font\ssecsy=cmsy10 scaled 1315
		1907	\def\ssececsize{1200}
		1908
		1909	% Reduced fonts for @acro in text (10pt).
		1910	\def\reducednominalsize{10pt}
		1911	\setfont\reducedrm\rmshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
		1912	\setfont\reducedtt\ttshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT}
		1913	\setfont\reducedbf\bfshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
		1914	\setfont\reducedit\itshape{10}{1000}{OT1IT}
		1915	\setfont\reducedsl\slshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
		1916	\setfont\reducedsf\sfshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
		1917	\setfont\reducedsc\scshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
		1918	\setfont\reducedttsl\ttslshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT}
		1919	\font\reducedi=cmmi10
		1920	\font\reducedsy=cmsy10
		1921	\def\reducedecsize{1000}
		1922
		1923	\textleading = 13.2pt % line spacing for 11pt CM
		1924	\textfonts % reset the current fonts
		1925	\rm
		1926	} % end of 11pt text font size definitions, \definetextfontsizexi
		1927
		1928
		1929	% Definitions to make the main text be 10pt Computer Modern, with
		1930	% section, chapter, etc., sizes following suit. This is for the GNU
		1931	% Press printing of the Emacs 22 manual. Maybe other manuals in the
		1932	% future. Used with @smallbook, which sets the leading to 12pt.
		1933	%
		1934	\def\definetextfontsizex{%
		1935	% Text fonts (10pt).
		1936	\def\textnominalsize{10pt}
		1937	\edef\mainmagstep{1000}
		1938	\setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
		1939	\setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT}
		1940	\setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
		1941	\setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1IT}
		1942	\setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
		1943	\setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
		1944	\setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
		1945	\setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT}
		1946	\font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep
		1947	\font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep
		1948	\def\textecsize{1000}
		1949
		1950	% A few fonts for @defun names and args.
		1951	\setfont\defbf\bfshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1}
		1952	\setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT}
		1953	\setfont\defttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT}
		1954	\def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenbf = \defbf \let\tenttsl=\defttsl \bf}
		1955
		1956	% Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt).
		1957	\def\smallnominalsize{9pt}
		1958	\setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
		1959	\setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT}
		1960	\setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1}
		1961	\setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT}
		1962	\setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
		1963	\setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
		1964	\setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1}
		1965	\setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT}
		1966	\font\smalli=cmmi9
		1967	\font\smallsy=cmsy9
		1968	\def\smallecsize{0900}
		1969
		1970	% Fonts for small examples (8pt).
		1971	\def\smallernominalsize{8pt}
		1972	\setfont\smallerrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
		1973	\setfont\smallertt\ttshape{8}{1000}{OT1TT}
		1974	\setfont\smallerbf\bfshape{10}{800}{OT1}
		1975	\setfont\smallerit\itshape{8}{1000}{OT1IT}
		1976	\setfont\smallersl\slshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
		1977	\setfont\smallersf\sfshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
		1978	\setfont\smallersc\scshape{10}{800}{OT1}
		1979	\setfont\smallerttsl\ttslshape{10}{800}{OT1TT}
		1980	\font\smalleri=cmmi8
		1981	\font\smallersy=cmsy8
		1982	\def\smallerecsize{0800}
		1983
		1984	% Fonts for title page (20.4pt):
		1985	\def\titlenominalsize{20pt}
		1986	\setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1}
		1987	\setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1IT}
		1988	\setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1}
		1989	\setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1TT}
		1990	\setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1TT}
		1991	\setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}{OT1}
		1992	\let\titlebf=\titlerm
		1993	\setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1}
		1994	\font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3
		1995	\font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4
		1996	\def\titleecsize{2074}
		1997
		1998	% Chapter fonts (14.4pt).
		1999	\def\chapnominalsize{14pt}
		2000	\setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1}
		2001	\setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1IT}
		2002	\setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1}
		2003	\setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1TT}
		2004	\setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1TT}
		2005	\setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1}
		2006	\let\chapbf\chaprm
		2007	\setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1}
		2008	\font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1
		2009	\font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2
		2010	\def\chapecsize{1440}
		2011
		2012	% Section fonts (12pt).
		2013	\def\secnominalsize{12pt}
		2014	\setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{1000}{OT1}
		2015	\setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1IT}
		2016	\setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1}
		2017	\setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{1000}{OT1TT}
		2018	\setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT}
		2019	\setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{1000}{OT1}
		2020	\let\secbf\secrm
		2021	\setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1}
		2022	\font\seci=cmmi12
		2023	\font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep1
		2024	\def\sececsize{1200}
		2025
		2026	% Subsection fonts (10pt).
		2027	\def\ssecnominalsize{10pt}
		2028	\setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
		2029	\setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1000}{OT1IT}
		2030	\setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
		2031	\setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT}
		2032	\setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT}
		2033	\setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
		2034	\let\ssecbf\ssecrm
		2035	\setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
		2036	\font\sseci=cmmi10
		2037	\font\ssecsy=cmsy10
		2038	\def\ssececsize{1000}
		2039
		2040	% Reduced fonts for @acro in text (9pt).
		2041	\def\reducednominalsize{9pt}
		2042	\setfont\reducedrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
		2043	\setfont\reducedtt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT}
		2044	\setfont\reducedbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1}
		2045	\setfont\reducedit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT}
		2046	\setfont\reducedsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
		2047	\setfont\reducedsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
		2048	\setfont\reducedsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1}
		2049	\setfont\reducedttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT}
		2050	\font\reducedi=cmmi9
		2051	\font\reducedsy=cmsy9
		2052	\def\reducedecsize{0900}
		2053
		2054	\divide\parskip by 2 % reduce space between paragraphs
		2055	\textleading = 12pt % line spacing for 10pt CM
		2056	\textfonts % reset the current fonts
		2057	\rm
		2058	} % end of 10pt text font size definitions, \definetextfontsizex
		2059
		2060
		2061	% We provide the user-level command
		2062	% @fonttextsize 10
		2063	% (or 11) to redefine the text font size. pt is assumed.
		2064	%
		2065	\def\xiword{11}
		2066	\def\xword{10}
		2067	\def\xwordpt{10pt}
		2068	%
		2069	\parseargdef\fonttextsize{%
		2070	\def\textsizearg{#1}%
		2071	%\wlog{doing @fonttextsize \textsizearg}%
		2072	%
		2073	% Set \globaldefs so that documents can use this inside @tex, since
		2074	% makeinfo 4.8 does not support it, but we need it nonetheless.
		2075	%
		2076	\begingroup \globaldefs=1
		2077	\ifx\textsizearg\xword \definetextfontsizex
		2078	\else \ifx\textsizearg\xiword \definetextfontsizexi
		2079	\else
		2080	\errhelp=\EMsimple
		2081	\errmessage{@fonttextsize only supports `10' or `11', not `\textsizearg'}
		2082	\fi\fi
		2083	\endgroup
		2084	}
		2085
		2086	% In order for the font changes to affect most math symbols and letters,
		2087	% we have to define the \textfont of the standard families. We don't
		2088	% bother to reset \scriptfont and \scriptscriptfont; awaiting user need.
		2089	%
		2090	\def\resetmathfonts{%
		2091	\textfont0=\tenrm \textfont1=\teni \textfont2=\tensy
		2092	\textfont\itfam=\tenit \textfont\slfam=\tensl \textfont\bffam=\tenbf
		2093	\textfont\ttfam=\tentt \textfont\sffam=\tensf
		2094	}
		2095
		2096	% The font-changing commands redefine the meanings of \tenSTYLE, instead
		2097	% of just \STYLE. We do this because \STYLE needs to also set the
		2098	% current \fam for math mode. Our \STYLE (e.g., \rm) commands hardwire
		2099	% \tenSTYLE to set the current font.
		2100	%
		2101	% Each font-changing command also sets the names \lsize (one size lower)
		2102	% and \lllsize (three sizes lower). These relative commands are used
		2103	% in, e.g., the LaTeX logo and acronyms.
		2104	%
		2105	% This all needs generalizing, badly.
		2106	%
		2107	\def\textfonts{%
		2108	\let\tenrm=\textrm \let\tenit=\textit \let\tensl=\textsl
		2109	\let\tenbf=\textbf \let\tentt=\texttt \let\smallcaps=\textsc
		2110	\let\tensf=\textsf \let\teni=\texti \let\tensy=\textsy
		2111	\let\tenttsl=\textttsl
		2112	\def\curfontsize{text}%
		2113	\def\lsize{reduced}\def\lllsize{smaller}%
		2114	\resetmathfonts \setleading{\textleading}}
		2115	\def\titlefonts{%
		2116	\let\tenrm=\titlerm \let\tenit=\titleit \let\tensl=\titlesl
		2117	\let\tenbf=\titlebf \let\tentt=\titlett \let\smallcaps=\titlesc
		2118	\let\tensf=\titlesf \let\teni=\titlei \let\tensy=\titlesy
		2119	\let\tenttsl=\titlettsl
		2120	\def\curfontsize{title}%
		2121	\def\lsize{chap}\def\lllsize{subsec}%
		2122	\resetmathfonts \setleading{27pt}}
		2123	\def\titlefont#1{{\titlefonts\rmisbold #1}}
		2124	\def\chapfonts{%
		2125	\let\tenrm=\chaprm \let\tenit=\chapit \let\tensl=\chapsl
		2126	\let\tenbf=\chapbf \let\tentt=\chaptt \let\smallcaps=\chapsc
		2127	\let\tensf=\chapsf \let\teni=\chapi \let\tensy=\chapsy
		2128	\let\tenttsl=\chapttsl
		2129	\def\curfontsize{chap}%
		2130	\def\lsize{sec}\def\lllsize{text}%
		2131	\resetmathfonts \setleading{19pt}}
		2132	\def\secfonts{%
		2133	\let\tenrm=\secrm \let\tenit=\secit \let\tensl=\secsl
		2134	\let\tenbf=\secbf \let\tentt=\sectt \let\smallcaps=\secsc
		2135	\let\tensf=\secsf \let\teni=\seci \let\tensy=\secsy
		2136	\let\tenttsl=\secttsl
		2137	\def\curfontsize{sec}%
		2138	\def\lsize{subsec}\def\lllsize{reduced}%
		2139	\resetmathfonts \setleading{17pt}}
		2140	\def\subsecfonts{%
		2141	\let\tenrm=\ssecrm \let\tenit=\ssecit \let\tensl=\ssecsl
		2142	\let\tenbf=\ssecbf \let\tentt=\ssectt \let\smallcaps=\ssecsc
		2143	\let\tensf=\ssecsf \let\teni=\sseci \let\tensy=\ssecsy
		2144	\let\tenttsl=\ssecttsl
		2145	\def\curfontsize{ssec}%
		2146	\def\lsize{text}\def\lllsize{small}%
		2147	\resetmathfonts \setleading{15pt}}
		2148	\let\subsubsecfonts = \subsecfonts
		2149	\def\reducedfonts{%
		2150	\let\tenrm=\reducedrm \let\tenit=\reducedit \let\tensl=\reducedsl
		2151	\let\tenbf=\reducedbf \let\tentt=\reducedtt \let\reducedcaps=\reducedsc
		2152	\let\tensf=\reducedsf \let\teni=\reducedi \let\tensy=\reducedsy
		2153	\let\tenttsl=\reducedttsl
		2154	\def\curfontsize{reduced}%
		2155	\def\lsize{small}\def\lllsize{smaller}%
		2156	\resetmathfonts \setleading{10.5pt}}
		2157	\def\smallfonts{%
		2158	\let\tenrm=\smallrm \let\tenit=\smallit \let\tensl=\smallsl
		2159	\let\tenbf=\smallbf \let\tentt=\smalltt \let\smallcaps=\smallsc
		2160	\let\tensf=\smallsf \let\teni=\smalli \let\tensy=\smallsy
		2161	\let\tenttsl=\smallttsl
		2162	\def\curfontsize{small}%
		2163	\def\lsize{smaller}\def\lllsize{smaller}%
		2164	\resetmathfonts \setleading{10.5pt}}
		2165	\def\smallerfonts{%
		2166	\let\tenrm=\smallerrm \let\tenit=\smallerit \let\tensl=\smallersl
		2167	\let\tenbf=\smallerbf \let\tentt=\smallertt \let\smallcaps=\smallersc
		2168	\let\tensf=\smallersf \let\teni=\smalleri \let\tensy=\smallersy
		2169	\let\tenttsl=\smallerttsl
		2170	\def\curfontsize{smaller}%
		2171	\def\lsize{smaller}\def\lllsize{smaller}%
		2172	\resetmathfonts \setleading{9.5pt}}
		2173
		2174	% Fonts for short table of contents.
		2175	\setfont\shortcontrm\rmshape{12}{1000}{OT1}
		2176	\setfont\shortcontbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1} % no cmb12
		2177	\setfont\shortcontsl\slshape{12}{1000}{OT1}
		2178	\setfont\shortconttt\ttshape{12}{1000}{OT1TT}
		2179
		2180	% Define these just so they can be easily changed for other fonts.
		2181	\def\angleleft{$\langle$}
		2182	\def\angleright{$\rangle$}
		2183
		2184	% Set the fonts to use with the @small... environments.
		2185	\let\smallexamplefonts = \smallfonts
		2186
		2187	% About \smallexamplefonts. If we use \smallfonts (9pt), @smallexample
		2188	% can fit this many characters:
		2189	% 8.5x11=86 smallbook=72 a4=90 a5=69
		2190	% If we use \scriptfonts (8pt), then we can fit this many characters:
		2191	% 8.5x11=90+ smallbook=80 a4=90+ a5=77
		2192	% For me, subjectively, the few extra characters that fit aren't worth
		2193	% the additional smallness of 8pt. So I'm making the default 9pt.
		2194	%
		2195	% By the way, for comparison, here's what fits with @example (10pt):
		2196	% 8.5x11=71 smallbook=60 a4=75 a5=58
		2197	% --karl, 24jan03.
		2198
		2199	% Set up the default fonts, so we can use them for creating boxes.
		2200	%
		2201	\definetextfontsizexi
		2202
		2203
		2204	\message{markup,}
		2205
		2206	% Check if we are currently using a typewriter font. Since all the
		2207	% Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero interword stretch (and
		2208	% shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all typewriter fonts to have
		2209	% this property, we can check that font parameter.
		2210	%
		2211	\def\ifmonospace{\ifdim\fontdimen3\font=0pt }
		2212
		2213	% Markup style infrastructure. \defmarkupstylesetup\INITMACRO will
		2214	% define and register \INITMACRO to be called on markup style changes.
		2215	% \INITMACRO can check \currentmarkupstyle for the innermost
		2216	% style and the set of \ifmarkupSTYLE switches for all styles
		2217	% currently in effect.
		2218	\newif\ifmarkupvar
		2219	\newif\ifmarkupsamp
		2220	\newif\ifmarkupkey
		2221	%\newif\ifmarkupfile % @file == @samp.
		2222	%\newif\ifmarkupoption % @option == @samp.
		2223	\newif\ifmarkupcode
		2224	\newif\ifmarkupkbd
		2225	%\newif\ifmarkupenv % @env == @code.
		2226	%\newif\ifmarkupcommand % @command == @code.
		2227	\newif\ifmarkuptex % @tex (and part of @math, for now).
		2228	\newif\ifmarkupexample
		2229	\newif\ifmarkupverb
		2230	\newif\ifmarkupverbatim
		2231
		2232	\let\currentmarkupstyle\empty
		2233
		2234	\def\setupmarkupstyle#1{%
		2235	\csname markup#1true\endcsname
		2236	\def\currentmarkupstyle{#1}%
		2237	\markupstylesetup
		2238	}
		2239
		2240	\let\markupstylesetup\empty
		2241
		2242	\def\defmarkupstylesetup#1{%
		2243	\expandafter\def\expandafter\markupstylesetup
		2244	\expandafter{\markupstylesetup #1}%
		2245	\def#1%
		2246	}
		2247
		2248	% Markup style setup for left and right quotes.
		2249	\defmarkupstylesetup\markupsetuplq{%
		2250	\expandafter\let\expandafter \temp
		2251	\csname markupsetuplq\currentmarkupstyle\endcsname
		2252	\ifx\temp\relax \markupsetuplqdefault \else \temp \fi
		2253	}
		2254
		2255	\defmarkupstylesetup\markupsetuprq{%
		2256	\expandafter\let\expandafter \temp
		2257	\csname markupsetuprq\currentmarkupstyle\endcsname
		2258	\ifx\temp\relax \markupsetuprqdefault \else \temp \fi
		2259	}
		2260
		2261	{
		2262	\catcode`\'=\active
		2263	\catcode`\`=\active
		2264
		2265	\gdef\markupsetuplqdefault{\let`\lq}
		2266	\gdef\markupsetuprqdefault{\let'\rq}
		2267
		2268	\gdef\markupsetcodequoteleft{\let`\codequoteleft}
		2269	\gdef\markupsetcodequoteright{\let'\codequoteright}
		2270	}
		2271
		2272	\let\markupsetuplqcode \markupsetcodequoteleft
		2273	\let\markupsetuprqcode \markupsetcodequoteright
		2274	%
		2275	\let\markupsetuplqexample \markupsetcodequoteleft
		2276	\let\markupsetuprqexample \markupsetcodequoteright
		2277	%
		2278	\let\markupsetuplqkbd \markupsetcodequoteleft
		2279	\let\markupsetuprqkbd \markupsetcodequoteright
		2280	%
		2281	\let\markupsetuplqsamp \markupsetcodequoteleft
		2282	\let\markupsetuprqsamp \markupsetcodequoteright
		2283	%
		2284	\let\markupsetuplqverb \markupsetcodequoteleft
		2285	\let\markupsetuprqverb \markupsetcodequoteright
		2286	%
		2287	\let\markupsetuplqverbatim \markupsetcodequoteleft
		2288	\let\markupsetuprqverbatim \markupsetcodequoteright
		2289
		2290	% Allow an option to not use regular directed right quote/apostrophe
		2291	% (char 0x27), but instead the undirected quote from cmtt (char 0x0d).
		2292	% The undirected quote is ugly, so don't make it the default, but it
		2293	% works for pasting with more pdf viewers (at least evince), the
		2294	% lilypond developers report. xpdf does work with the regular 0x27.
		2295	%
		2296	\def\codequoteright{%
		2297	\expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxicodequoteundirected\endcsname\relax
		2298	\expandafter\ifx\csname SETcodequoteundirected\endcsname\relax
		2299	'%
		2300	\else \char'15 \fi
		2301	\else \char'15 \fi
		2302	}
		2303	%
		2304	% and a similar option for the left quote char vs. a grave accent.
		2305	% Modern fonts display ASCII 0x60 as a grave accent, so some people like
		2306	% the code environments to do likewise.
		2307	%
		2308	\def\codequoteleft{%
		2309	\expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxicodequotebacktick\endcsname\relax
		2310	\expandafter\ifx\csname SETcodequotebacktick\endcsname\relax
		2311	% [Knuth] pp. 380,381,391
		2312	% \relax disables Spanish ligatures ?` and !` of \tt font.
		2313	\relax`%
		2314	\else \char'22 \fi
		2315	\else \char'22 \fi
		2316	}
		2317
		2318	% Commands to set the quote options.
		2319	%
		2320	\parseargdef\codequoteundirected{%
		2321	\def\temp{#1}%
		2322	\ifx\temp\onword
		2323	\expandafter\let\csname SETtxicodequoteundirected\endcsname
		2324	= t%
		2325	\else\ifx\temp\offword
		2326	\expandafter\let\csname SETtxicodequoteundirected\endcsname
		2327	= \relax
		2328	\else
		2329	\errhelp = \EMsimple
		2330	\errmessage{Unknown @codequoteundirected value `\temp', must be on|off}%
		2331	\fi\fi
		2332	}
		2333	%
		2334	\parseargdef\codequotebacktick{%
		2335	\def\temp{#1}%
		2336	\ifx\temp\onword
		2337	\expandafter\let\csname SETtxicodequotebacktick\endcsname
		2338	= t%
		2339	\else\ifx\temp\offword
		2340	\expandafter\let\csname SETtxicodequotebacktick\endcsname
		2341	= \relax
		2342	\else
		2343	\errhelp = \EMsimple
		2344	\errmessage{Unknown @codequotebacktick value `\temp', must be on|off}%
		2345	\fi\fi
		2346	}
		2347
		2348	% [Knuth] pp. 380,381,391, disable Spanish ligatures ?` and !` of \tt font.
		2349	\def\noligaturesquoteleft{\relax\lq}
		2350
		2351	% Count depth in font-changes, for error checks
		2352	\newcount\fontdepth \fontdepth=0
		2353
		2354	% Font commands.
		2355
		2356	% #1 is the font command (\sl or \it), #2 is the text to slant.
		2357	% If we are in a monospaced environment, however, 1) always use \ttsl,
		2358	% and 2) do not add an italic correction.
		2359	\def\dosmartslant#1#2{%
		2360	\ifusingtt
		2361	{{\ttsl #2}\let\next=\relax}%
		2362	{\def\next{{#1#2}\futurelet\next\smartitaliccorrection}}%
		2363	\next
		2364	}
		2365	\def\smartslanted{\dosmartslant\sl}
		2366	\def\smartitalic{\dosmartslant\it}
		2367
		2368	% Output an italic correction unless \next (presumed to be the following
		2369	% character) is such as not to need one.
		2370	\def\smartitaliccorrection{%
		2371	\ifx\next,%
		2372	\else\ifx\next-%
		2373	\else\ifx\next.%
		2374	\else\ifx\next\.%
		2375	\else\ifx\next\comma%
		2376	\else\ptexslash
		2377	\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
		2378	\aftersmartic
		2379	}
		2380
		2381	% Unconditional use \ttsl, and no ic. @var is set to this for defuns.
		2382	\def\ttslanted#1{{\ttsl #1}}
		2383
		2384	% @cite is like \smartslanted except unconditionally use \sl. We never want
		2385	% ttsl for book titles, do we?
		2386	\def\cite#1{{\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitaliccorrection}
		2387
		2388	\def\aftersmartic{}
		2389	\def\var#1{%
		2390	\let\saveaftersmartic = \aftersmartic
		2391	\def\aftersmartic{\null\let\aftersmartic=\saveaftersmartic}%
		2392	\smartslanted{#1}%
		2393	}
		2394
		2395	\let\i=\smartitalic
		2396	\let\slanted=\smartslanted
		2397	\let\dfn=\smartslanted
		2398	\let\emph=\smartitalic
		2399
		2400	% Explicit font changes: @r, @sc, undocumented @ii.
		2401	\def\r#1{{\rm #1}} % roman font
		2402	\def\sc#1{{\smallcaps#1}} % smallcaps font
		2403	\def\ii#1{{\it #1}} % italic font
		2404
		2405	% @b, explicit bold. Also @strong.
		2406	\def\b#1{{\bf #1}}
		2407	\let\strong=\b
		2408
		2409	% @sansserif, explicit sans.
		2410	\def\sansserif#1{{\sf #1}}
		2411
		2412	% We can't just use \exhyphenpenalty, because that only has effect at
		2413	% the end of a paragraph. Restore normal hyphenation at the end of the
		2414	% group within which \nohyphenation is presumably called.
		2415	%
		2416	\def\nohyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = -1 \aftergroup\restorehyphenation}
		2417	\def\restorehyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = `- }
		2418
		2419	% Set sfcode to normal for the chars that usually have another value.
		2420	% Can't use plain's \frenchspacing because it uses the `\x notation, and
		2421	% sometimes \x has an active definition that messes things up.
		2422	%
		2423	\catcode`@=11
		2424	\def\plainfrenchspacing{%
		2425	\sfcode\dotChar =\@m \sfcode\questChar=\@m \sfcode\exclamChar=\@m
		2426	\sfcode\colonChar=\@m \sfcode\semiChar =\@m \sfcode\commaChar =\@m
		2427	\def\endofsentencespacefactor{1000}% for @. and friends
		2428	}
		2429	\def\plainnonfrenchspacing{%
		2430	\sfcode`\.3000\sfcode`\?3000\sfcode`\!3000
		2431	\sfcode`\:2000\sfcode`\;1500\sfcode`\,1250
		2432	\def\endofsentencespacefactor{3000}% for @. and friends
		2433	}
		2434	\catcode`@=\other
		2435	\def\endofsentencespacefactor{3000}% default
		2436
		2437	% @t, explicit typewriter.
		2438	\def\t#1{%
		2439	{\tt \rawbackslash \plainfrenchspacing #1}%
		2440	\null
		2441	}
		2442
		2443	% @samp.
		2444	\def\samp#1{{\setupmarkupstyle{samp}\lq\tclose{#1}\rq\null}}
		2445
		2446	% @indicateurl is \samp, that is, with quotes.
		2447	\let\indicateurl=\samp
		2448
		2449	% @code (and similar) prints in typewriter, but with spaces the same
		2450	% size as normal in the surrounding text, without hyphenation, etc.
		2451	% This is a subroutine for that.
		2452	\def\tclose#1{%
		2453	{%
		2454	% Change normal interword space to be same as for the current font.
		2455	\spaceskip = \fontdimen2\font
		2456	%
		2457	% Switch to typewriter.
		2458	\tt
		2459	%
		2460	% But `\ ' produces the large typewriter interword space.
		2461	\def\ {{\spaceskip = 0pt{} }}%
		2462	%
		2463	% Turn off hyphenation.
		2464	\nohyphenation
		2465	%
		2466	\rawbackslash
		2467	\plainfrenchspacing
		2468	#1%
		2469	}%
		2470	\null % reset spacefactor to 1000
		2471	}
		2472
		2473	% We *must* turn on hyphenation at `-' and `_' in @code.
		2474	% (But see \codedashfinish below.)
		2475	% Otherwise, it is too hard to avoid overfull hboxes
		2476	% in the Emacs manual, the Library manual, etc.
		2477	%
		2478	% Unfortunately, TeX uses one parameter (\hyphenchar) to control
		2479	% both hyphenation at - and hyphenation within words.
		2480	% We must therefore turn them both off (\tclose does that)
		2481	% and arrange explicitly to hyphenate at a dash. -- rms.
		2482	{
		2483	\catcode`\-=\active \catcode`\_=\active
		2484	\catcode`\'=\active \catcode`\`=\active
		2485	\global\let'=\rq \global\let`=\lq % default definitions
		2486	%
		2487	\global\def\code{\begingroup
		2488	\setupmarkupstyle{code}%
		2489	% The following should really be moved into \setupmarkupstyle handlers.
		2490	\catcode\dashChar=\active \catcode\underChar=\active
		2491	\ifallowcodebreaks
		2492	\let-\codedash
		2493	\let_\codeunder
		2494	\else
		2495	\let-\normaldash
		2496	\let_\realunder
		2497	\fi
		2498	% Given -foo (with a single dash), we do not want to allow a break
		2499	% after the hyphen.
		2500	\global\let\codedashprev=\codedash
		2501	%
		2502	\codex
		2503	}
		2504	%
		2505	\gdef\codedash{\futurelet\next\codedashfinish}
		2506	\gdef\codedashfinish{%
		2507	\normaldash % always output the dash character itself.
		2508	%
		2509	% Now, output a discretionary to allow a line break, unless
		2510	% (a) the next character is a -, or
		2511	% (b) the preceding character is a -.
		2512	% E.g., given --posix, we do not want to allow a break after either -.
		2513	% Given --foo-bar, we do want to allow a break between the - and the b.
		2514	\ifx\next\codedash \else
		2515	\ifx\codedashprev\codedash
		2516	\else \discretionary{}{}{}\fi
		2517	\fi
		2518	% we need the space after the = for the case when \next itself is a
		2519	% space token; it would get swallowed otherwise. As in @code{- a}.
		2520	\global\let\codedashprev= \next
		2521	}
		2522	}
		2523	\def\normaldash{-}
		2524	%
		2525	\def\codex #1{\tclose{#1}\endgroup}
		2526
		2527	\def\codeunder{%
		2528	% this is all so @math{@code{var_name}+1} can work. In math mode, _
		2529	% is "active" (mathcode"8000) and \normalunderscore (or \char95, etc.)
		2530	% will therefore expand the active definition of _, which is us
		2531	% (inside @code that is), therefore an endless loop.
		2532	\ifusingtt{\ifmmode
		2533	\mathchar"075F % class 0=ordinary, family 7=ttfam, pos 0x5F=_.
		2534	\else\normalunderscore \fi
		2535	\discretionary{}{}{}}%
		2536	{\_}%
		2537	}
		2538
		2539	% An additional complication: the above will allow breaks after, e.g.,
		2540	% each of the four underscores in __typeof__. This is bad.
		2541	% @allowcodebreaks provides a document-level way to turn breaking at -
		2542	% and _ on and off.
		2543	%
		2544	\newif\ifallowcodebreaks \allowcodebreakstrue
		2545
		2546	\def\keywordtrue{true}
		2547	\def\keywordfalse{false}
		2548
		2549	\parseargdef\allowcodebreaks{%
		2550	\def\txiarg{#1}%
		2551	\ifx\txiarg\keywordtrue
		2552	\allowcodebreakstrue
		2553	\else\ifx\txiarg\keywordfalse
		2554	\allowcodebreaksfalse
		2555	\else
		2556	\errhelp = \EMsimple
		2557	\errmessage{Unknown @allowcodebreaks option `\txiarg', must be true|false}%
		2558	\fi\fi
		2559	}
		2560
		2561	% For @command, @env, @file, @option quotes seem unnecessary,
		2562	% so use \code rather than \samp.
		2563	\let\command=\code
		2564	\let\env=\code
		2565	\let\file=\code
		2566	\let\option=\code
		2567
		2568	% @uref (abbreviation for `urlref') aka @url takes an optional
		2569	% (comma-separated) second argument specifying the text to display and
		2570	% an optional third arg as text to display instead of (rather than in
		2571	% addition to) the url itself. First (mandatory) arg is the url.
		2572
		2573	% TeX-only option to allow changing PDF output to show only the second
		2574	% arg (if given), and not the url (which is then just the link target).
		2575	\newif\ifurefurlonlylink
		2576
		2577	% The main macro is \urefbreak, which allows breaking at expected
		2578	% places within the url. (There used to be another version, which
		2579	% didn't support automatic breaking.)
		2580	\def\urefbreak{\begingroup \urefcatcodes \dourefbreak}
		2581	\let\uref=\urefbreak
		2582	%
		2583	\def\dourefbreak#1{\urefbreakfinish #1,,,\finish}
		2584	\def\urefbreakfinish#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{% doesn't work in @example
		2585	\unsepspaces
		2586	\pdfurl{#1}%
		2587	\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}%
		2588	\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
		2589	\unhbox0 % third arg given, show only that
		2590	\else
		2591	\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% look for second arg
		2592	\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
		2593	\ifpdf
		2594	\ifurefurlonlylink
		2595	% PDF plus option to not display url, show just arg
		2596	\unhbox0
		2597	\else
		2598	% PDF, normally display both arg and url for consistency,
		2599	% visibility, if the pdf is eventually used to print, etc.
		2600	\unhbox0\ (\urefcode{#1})%
		2601	\fi
		2602	\else
		2603	\unhbox0\ (\urefcode{#1})% DVI, always show arg and url
		2604	\fi
		2605	\else
		2606	\urefcode{#1}% only url given, so show it
		2607	\fi
		2608	\fi
		2609	\endlink
		2610	\endgroup}
		2611
		2612	% Allow line breaks around only a few characters (only).
		2613	\def\urefcatcodes{%
		2614	\catcode\ampChar=\active \catcode\dotChar=\active
		2615	\catcode\hashChar=\active \catcode\questChar=\active
		2616	\catcode\slashChar=\active
		2617	}
		2618	{
		2619	\urefcatcodes
		2620	%
		2621	\global\def\urefcode{\begingroup
		2622	\setupmarkupstyle{code}%
		2623	\urefcatcodes
		2624	\let&\urefcodeamp
		2625	\let.\urefcodedot
		2626	\let#\urefcodehash
		2627	\let?\urefcodequest
		2628	\let/\urefcodeslash
		2629	\codex
		2630	}
		2631	%
		2632	% By default, they are just regular characters.
		2633	\global\def&{\normalamp}
		2634	\global\def.{\normaldot}
		2635	\global\def#{\normalhash}
		2636	\global\def?{\normalquest}
		2637	\global\def/{\normalslash}
		2638	}
		2639
		2640	% we put a little stretch before and after the breakable chars, to help
		2641	% line breaking of long url's. The unequal skips make look better in
		2642	% cmtt at least, especially for dots.
		2643	\def\urefprestretchamount{.13em}
		2644	\def\urefpoststretchamount{.1em}
		2645	\def\urefprestretch{\urefprebreak \hskip0pt plus\urefprestretchamount\relax}
		2646	\def\urefpoststretch{\urefpostbreak \hskip0pt plus\urefprestretchamount\relax}
		2647	%
		2648	\def\urefcodeamp{\urefprestretch \&\urefpoststretch}
		2649	\def\urefcodedot{\urefprestretch .\urefpoststretch}
		2650	\def\urefcodehash{\urefprestretch \#\urefpoststretch}
		2651	\def\urefcodequest{\urefprestretch ?\urefpoststretch}
		2652	\def\urefcodeslash{\futurelet\next\urefcodeslashfinish}
		2653	{
		2654	\catcode`\/=\active
		2655	\global\def\urefcodeslashfinish{%
		2656	\urefprestretch \slashChar
		2657	% Allow line break only after the final / in a sequence of
		2658	% slashes, to avoid line break between the slashes in http://.
		2659	\ifx\next/\else \urefpoststretch \fi
		2660	}
		2661	}
		2662
		2663	% One more complication: by default we'll break after the special
		2664	% characters, but some people like to break before the special chars, so
		2665	% allow that. Also allow no breaking at all, for manual control.
		2666	%
		2667	\parseargdef\urefbreakstyle{%
		2668	\def\txiarg{#1}%
		2669	\ifx\txiarg\wordnone
		2670	\def\urefprebreak{\nobreak}\def\urefpostbreak{\nobreak}
		2671	\else\ifx\txiarg\wordbefore
		2672	\def\urefprebreak{\allowbreak}\def\urefpostbreak{\nobreak}
		2673	\else\ifx\txiarg\wordafter
		2674	\def\urefprebreak{\nobreak}\def\urefpostbreak{\allowbreak}
		2675	\else
		2676	\errhelp = \EMsimple
		2677	\errmessage{Unknown @urefbreakstyle setting `\txiarg'}%
		2678	\fi\fi\fi
		2679	}
		2680	\def\wordafter{after}
		2681	\def\wordbefore{before}
		2682	\def\wordnone{none}
		2683
		2684	\urefbreakstyle after
		2685
		2686	% @url synonym for @uref, since that's how everyone uses it.
		2687	%
		2688	\let\url=\uref
		2689
		2690	% rms does not like angle brackets --karl, 17may97.
		2691	% So now @email is just like @uref, unless we are pdf.
		2692	%
		2693	%\def\email#1{\angleleft{\tt #1}\angleright}
		2694	\ifpdf
		2695	\def\email#1{\doemail#1,,\finish}
		2696	\def\doemail#1,#2,#3\finish{\begingroup
		2697	\unsepspaces
		2698	\pdfurl{mailto:#1}%
		2699	\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
		2700	\ifdim\wd0>0pt\unhbox0\else\code{#1}\fi
		2701	\endlink
		2702	\endgroup}
		2703	\else
		2704	\let\email=\uref
		2705	\fi
		2706
		2707	% @kbdinputstyle -- arg is `distinct' (@kbd uses slanted tty font always),
		2708	% `example' (@kbd uses ttsl only inside of @example and friends),
		2709	% or `code' (@kbd uses normal tty font always).
		2710	\parseargdef\kbdinputstyle{%
		2711	\def\txiarg{#1}%
		2712	\ifx\txiarg\worddistinct
		2713	\gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\ttsl}%
		2714	\else\ifx\txiarg\wordexample
		2715	\gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}%
		2716	\else\ifx\txiarg\wordcode
		2717	\gdef\kbdexamplefont{\tt}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}%
		2718	\else
		2719	\errhelp = \EMsimple
		2720	\errmessage{Unknown @kbdinputstyle setting `\txiarg'}%
		2721	\fi\fi\fi
		2722	}
		2723	\def\worddistinct{distinct}
		2724	\def\wordexample{example}
		2725	\def\wordcode{code}
		2726
		2727	% Default is `distinct'.
		2728	\kbdinputstyle distinct
		2729
		2730	% @kbd is like @code, except that if the argument is just one @key command,
		2731	% then @kbd has no effect.
		2732	\def\kbd#1{{\def\look{#1}\expandafter\kbdsub\look??\par}}
		2733
		2734	\def\xkey{\key}
		2735	\def\kbdsub#1#2#3\par{%
		2736	\def\one{#1}\def\three{#3}\def\threex{??}%
		2737	\ifx\one\xkey\ifx\threex\three \key{#2}%
		2738	\else{\tclose{\kbdfont\setupmarkupstyle{kbd}\look}}\fi
		2739	\else{\tclose{\kbdfont\setupmarkupstyle{kbd}\look}}\fi
		2740	}
		2741
		2742	% definition of @key that produces a lozenge. Doesn't adjust to text size.
		2743	%\setfont\keyrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
		2744	%\font\keysy=cmsy9
		2745	%\def\key#1{{\keyrm\textfont2=\keysy \leavevmode\hbox{%
		2746	% \raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleleft}\kern-.08em\vtop{%
		2747	% \vbox{\hrule\kern-0.4pt
		2748	% \hbox{\raise0.4pt\hbox{\vphantom{\angleleft}}#1}}%
		2749	% \kern-0.4pt\hrule}%
		2750	% \kern-.06em\raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleright}}}}
		2751
		2752	% definition of @key with no lozenge. If the current font is already
		2753	% monospace, don't change it; that way, we respect @kbdinputstyle. But
		2754	% if it isn't monospace, then use \tt.
		2755	%
		2756	\def\key#1{{\setupmarkupstyle{key}%
		2757	\nohyphenation
		2758	\ifmonospace\else\tt\fi
		2759	#1}\null}
		2760
		2761	% @clicksequence{File @click{} Open ...}
		2762	\def\clicksequence#1{\begingroup #1\endgroup}
		2763
		2764	% @clickstyle @arrow (by default)
		2765	\parseargdef\clickstyle{\def\click{#1}}
		2766	\def\click{\arrow}
		2767
		2768	% Typeset a dimension, e.g., `in' or `pt'. The only reason for the
		2769	% argument is to make the input look right: @dmn{pt} instead of @dmn{}pt.
		2770	%
		2771	\def\dmn#1{\thinspace #1}
		2772
		2773	% @l was never documented to mean ``switch to the Lisp font'',
		2774	% and it is not used as such in any manual I can find. We need it for
		2775	% Polish suppressed-l. --karl, 22sep96.
		2776	%\def\l#1{{\li #1}\null}
		2777
		2778	% @acronym for "FBI", "NATO", and the like.
		2779	% We print this one point size smaller, since it's intended for
		2780	% all-uppercase.
		2781	%
		2782	\def\acronym#1{\doacronym #1,,\finish}
		2783	\def\doacronym#1,#2,#3\finish{%
		2784	{\selectfonts\lsize #1}%
		2785	\def\temp{#2}%
		2786	\ifx\temp\empty \else
		2787	\space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})%
		2788	\fi
		2789	\null % reset \spacefactor=1000
		2790	}
		2791
		2792	% @abbr for "Comput. J." and the like.
		2793	% No font change, but don't do end-of-sentence spacing.
		2794	%
		2795	\def\abbr#1{\doabbr #1,,\finish}
		2796	\def\doabbr#1,#2,#3\finish{%
		2797	{\plainfrenchspacing #1}%
		2798	\def\temp{#2}%
		2799	\ifx\temp\empty \else
		2800	\space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})%
		2801	\fi
		2802	\null % reset \spacefactor=1000
		2803	}
		2804
		2805	% @asis just yields its argument. Used with @table, for example.
		2806	%
		2807	\def\asis#1{#1}
		2808
		2809	% @math outputs its argument in math mode.
		2810	%
		2811	% One complication: _ usually means subscripts, but it could also mean
		2812	% an actual _ character, as in @math{@var{some_variable} + 1}. So make
		2813	% _ active, and distinguish by seeing if the current family is \slfam,
		2814	% which is what @var uses.
		2815	{
		2816	\catcode`\_ = \active
		2817	\gdef\mathunderscore{%
		2818	\catcode`\_=\active
		2819	\def_{\ifnum\fam=\slfam \_\else\sb\fi}%
		2820	}
		2821	}
		2822	% Another complication: we want \\ (and @\) to output a math (or tt) \.
		2823	% FYI, plain.tex uses \\ as a temporary control sequence (for no
		2824	% particular reason), but this is not advertised and we don't care.
		2825	%
		2826	% The \mathchar is class=0=ordinary, family=7=ttfam, position=5C=\.
		2827	\def\mathbackslash{\ifnum\fam=\ttfam \mathchar"075C \else\backslash \fi}
		2828	%
		2829	\def\math{%
		2830	\tex
		2831	\mathunderscore
		2832	\let\\ = \mathbackslash
		2833	\mathactive
		2834	% make the texinfo accent commands work in math mode
		2835	\let\"=\ddot
		2836	\let\'=\acute
		2837	\let\==\bar
		2838	\let\^=\hat
		2839	\let\`=\grave
		2840	\let\u=\breve
		2841	\let\v=\check
		2842	\let\~=\tilde
		2843	\let\dotaccent=\dot
		2844	% have to provide another name for sup operator
		2845	\let\mathopsup=\sup
		2846	$\finishmath
		2847	}
		2848	\def\finishmath#1{#1$\endgroup} % Close the group opened by \tex.
		2849
		2850	% Some active characters (such as <) are spaced differently in math.
		2851	% We have to reset their definitions in case the @math was an argument
		2852	% to a command which sets the catcodes (such as @item or @section).
		2853	%
		2854	{
		2855	\catcode`^ = \active
		2856	\catcode`< = \active
		2857	\catcode`> = \active
		2858	\catcode`+ = \active
		2859	\catcode`' = \active
		2860	\gdef\mathactive{%
		2861	\let^ = \ptexhat
		2862	\let< = \ptexless
		2863	\let> = \ptexgtr
		2864	\let+ = \ptexplus
		2865	\let' = \ptexquoteright
		2866	}
		2867	}
		2868
		2869	% for @sub and @sup, if in math mode, just do a normal sub/superscript.
		2870	% If in text, use math to place as sub/superscript, but switch
		2871	% into text mode, with smaller fonts. This is a different font than the
		2872	% one used for real math sub/superscripts (8pt vs. 7pt), but let's not
		2873	% fix it (significant additions to font machinery) until someone notices.
		2874	%
		2875	\def\sub{\ifmmode \expandafter\sb \else \expandafter\finishsub\fi}
		2876	\def\finishsub#1{$\sb{\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize #1}}$}%
		2877	%
		2878	\def\sup{\ifmmode \expandafter\ptexsp \else \expandafter\finishsup\fi}
		2879	\def\finishsup#1{$\ptexsp{\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize #1}}$}%
		2880
		2881	% ctrl is no longer a Texinfo command, but leave this definition for fun.
		2882	\def\ctrl #1{{\tt \rawbackslash \hat}#1}
		2883
		2884	% @inlinefmt{FMTNAME,PROCESSED-TEXT} and @inlineraw{FMTNAME,RAW-TEXT}.
		2885	% Ignore unless FMTNAME == tex; then it is like @iftex and @tex,
		2886	% except specified as a normal braced arg, so no newlines to worry about.
		2887	%
		2888	\def\outfmtnametex{tex}
		2889	%
		2890	\long\def\inlinefmt#1{\doinlinefmt #1,\finish}
		2891	\long\def\doinlinefmt#1,#2,\finish{%
		2892	\def\inlinefmtname{#1}%
		2893	\ifx\inlinefmtname\outfmtnametex \ignorespaces #2\fi
		2894	}
		2895	%
		2896	% @inlinefmtifelse{FMTNAME,THEN-TEXT,ELSE-TEXT} expands THEN-TEXT if
		2897	% FMTNAME is tex, else ELSE-TEXT.
		2898	\long\def\inlinefmtifelse#1{\doinlinefmtifelse #1,,,\finish}
		2899	\long\def\doinlinefmtifelse#1,#2,#3,#4,\finish{%
		2900	\def\inlinefmtname{#1}%
		2901	\ifx\inlinefmtname\outfmtnametex \ignorespaces #2\else \ignorespaces #3\fi
		2902	}
		2903	%
		2904	% For raw, must switch into @tex before parsing the argument, to avoid
		2905	% setting catcodes prematurely. Doing it this way means that, for
		2906	% example, @inlineraw{html, foo{bar} gets a parse error instead of being
		2907	% ignored. But this isn't important because if people want a literal
		2908	% *right* brace they would have to use a command anyway, so they may as
		2909	% well use a command to get a left brace too. We could re-use the
		2910	% delimiter character idea from \verb, but it seems like overkill.
		2911	%
		2912	\long\def\inlineraw{\tex \doinlineraw}
		2913	\long\def\doinlineraw#1{\doinlinerawtwo #1,\finish}
		2914	\def\doinlinerawtwo#1,#2,\finish{%
		2915	\def\inlinerawname{#1}%
		2916	\ifx\inlinerawname\outfmtnametex \ignorespaces #2\fi
		2917	\endgroup % close group opened by \tex.
		2918	}
		2919
		2920	% @inlineifset{VAR, TEXT} expands TEXT if VAR is @set.
		2921	%
		2922	\long\def\inlineifset#1{\doinlineifset #1,\finish}
		2923	\long\def\doinlineifset#1,#2,\finish{%
		2924	\def\inlinevarname{#1}%
		2925	\expandafter\ifx\csname SET\inlinevarname\endcsname\relax
		2926	\else\ignorespaces#2\fi
		2927	}
		2928
		2929	% @inlineifclear{VAR, TEXT} expands TEXT if VAR is not @set.
		2930	%
		2931	\long\def\inlineifclear#1{\doinlineifclear #1,\finish}
		2932	\long\def\doinlineifclear#1,#2,\finish{%
		2933	\def\inlinevarname{#1}%
		2934	\expandafter\ifx\csname SET\inlinevarname\endcsname\relax \ignorespaces#2\fi
		2935	}
		2936
		2937
		2938	\message{glyphs,}
		2939	% and logos.
		2940
		2941	% @@ prints an @, as does @atchar{}.
		2942	\def\@{\char64 }
		2943	\let\atchar=\@
		2944
		2945	% @{ @} @lbracechar{} @rbracechar{} all generate brace characters.
		2946	% Unless we're in typewriter, use \ecfont because the CM text fonts do
		2947	% not have braces, and we don't want to switch into math.
		2948	\def\mylbrace{{\ifmonospace\else\ecfont\fi \char123}}
		2949	\def\myrbrace{{\ifmonospace\else\ecfont\fi \char125}}
		2950	\let\{=\mylbrace \let\lbracechar=\{
		2951	\let\}=\myrbrace \let\rbracechar=\}
		2952	\begingroup
		2953	% Definitions to produce \{ and \} commands for indices,
		2954	% and @{ and @} for the aux/toc files.
		2955	\catcode`\{ = \other \catcode`\} = \other
		2956	\catcode`\[ = 1 \catcode`\] = 2
		2957	\catcode`\! = 0 \catcode`\\ = \other
		2958	!gdef!lbracecmd[\{]%
		2959	!gdef!rbracecmd[\}]%
		2960	!gdef!lbraceatcmd[@{]%
		2961	!gdef!rbraceatcmd[@}]%
		2962	!endgroup
		2963
		2964	% @comma{} to avoid , parsing problems.
		2965	\let\comma = ,
		2966
		2967	% Accents: @, @dotaccent @ringaccent @ubaraccent @udotaccent
		2968	% Others are defined by plain TeX: @` @' @" @^ @~ @= @u @v @H.
		2969	\let\, = \ptexc
		2970	\let\dotaccent = \ptexdot
		2971	\def\ringaccent#1{{\accent23 #1}}
		2972	\let\tieaccent = \ptext
		2973	\let\ubaraccent = \ptexb
		2974	\let\udotaccent = \d
		2975
		2976	% Other special characters: @questiondown @exclamdown @ordf @ordm
		2977	% Plain TeX defines: @AA @AE @O @OE @L (plus lowercase versions) @ss.
		2978	\def\questiondown{?`}
		2979	\def\exclamdown{!`}
		2980	\def\ordf{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize \underbar{a}}}
		2981	\def\ordm{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize \underbar{o}}}
		2982
		2983	% Dotless i and dotless j, used for accents.
		2984	\def\imacro{i}
		2985	\def\jmacro{j}
		2986	\def\dotless#1{%
		2987	\def\temp{#1}%
		2988	\ifx\temp\imacro \ifmmode\imath \else\ptexi \fi
		2989	\else\ifx\temp\jmacro \ifmmode\jmath \else\j \fi
		2990	\else \errmessage{@dotless can be used only with i or j}%
		2991	\fi\fi
		2992	}
		2993
		2994	% The \TeX{} logo, as in plain, but resetting the spacing so that a
		2995	% period following counts as ending a sentence. (Idea found in latex.)
		2996	%
		2997	\edef\TeX{\TeX \spacefactor=1000 }
		2998
		2999	% @LaTeX{} logo. Not quite the same results as the definition in
		3000	% latex.ltx, since we use a different font for the raised A; it's most
		3001	% convenient for us to use an explicitly smaller font, rather than using
		3002	% the \scriptstyle font (since we don't reset \scriptstyle and
		3003	% \scriptscriptstyle).
		3004	%
		3005	\def\LaTeX{%
		3006	L\kern-.36em
		3007	{\setbox0=\hbox{T}%
		3008	\vbox to \ht0{\hbox{%
		3009	\ifx\textnominalsize\xwordpt
		3010	% for 10pt running text, \lllsize (8pt) is too small for the A in LaTeX.
		3011	% Revert to plain's \scriptsize, which is 7pt.
		3012	\count255=\the\fam $\fam\count255 \scriptstyle A$%
		3013	\else
		3014	% For 11pt, we can use our lllsize.
		3015	\selectfonts\lllsize A%
		3016	\fi
		3017	}%
		3018	\vss
		3019	}}%
		3020	\kern-.15em
		3021	\TeX
		3022	}
		3023
		3024	% Some math mode symbols.
		3025	\def\bullet{$\ptexbullet$}
		3026	\def\geq{\ifmmode \ge\else $\ge$\fi}
		3027	\def\leq{\ifmmode \le\else $\le$\fi}
		3028	\def\minus{\ifmmode -\else $-$\fi}
		3029
		3030	% @dots{} outputs an ellipsis using the current font.
		3031	% We do .5em per period so that it has the same spacing in the cm
		3032	% typewriter fonts as three actual period characters; on the other hand,
		3033	% in other typewriter fonts three periods are wider than 1.5em. So do
		3034	% whichever is larger.
		3035	%
		3036	\def\dots{%
		3037	\leavevmode
		3038	\setbox0=\hbox{...}% get width of three periods
		3039	\ifdim\wd0 > 1.5em
		3040	\dimen0 = \wd0
		3041	\else
		3042	\dimen0 = 1.5em
		3043	\fi
		3044	\hbox to \dimen0{%
		3045	\hskip 0pt plus.25fil
		3046	.\hskip 0pt plus1fil
		3047	.\hskip 0pt plus1fil
		3048	.\hskip 0pt plus.5fil
		3049	}%
		3050	}
		3051
		3052	% @enddots{} is an end-of-sentence ellipsis.
		3053	%
		3054	\def\enddots{%
		3055	\dots
		3056	\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor
		3057	}
		3058
		3059	% @point{}, @result{}, @expansion{}, @print{}, @equiv{}.
		3060	%
		3061	% Since these characters are used in examples, they should be an even number of
		3062	% \tt widths. Each \tt character is 1en, so two makes it 1em.
		3063	%
		3064	\def\point{$\star$}
		3065	\def\arrow{\leavevmode\raise.05ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\rightarrow$\hfil}}
		3066	\def\result{\leavevmode\raise.05ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\Rightarrow$\hfil}}
		3067	\def\expansion{\leavevmode\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\mapsto$\hfil}}
		3068	\def\print{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\dashv$\hfil}}
		3069	\def\equiv{\leavevmode\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\ptexequiv$\hfil}}
		3070
		3071	% The @error{} command.
		3072	% Adapted from the TeXbook's \boxit.
		3073	%
		3074	\newbox\errorbox
		3075	%
		3076	{\tentt \global\dimen0 = 3em}% Width of the box.
		3077	\dimen2 = .55pt % Thickness of rules
		3078	% The text. (`r' is open on the right, `e' somewhat less so on the left.)
		3079	\setbox0 = \hbox{\kern-.75pt \reducedsf \putworderror\kern-1.5pt}
		3080	%
		3081	\setbox\errorbox=\hbox to \dimen0{\hfil
		3082	\hsize = \dimen0 \advance\hsize by -5.8pt % Space to left+right.
		3083	\advance\hsize by -2\dimen2 % Rules.
		3084	\vbox{%
		3085	\hrule height\dimen2
		3086	\hbox{\vrule width\dimen2 \kern3pt % Space to left of text.
		3087	\vtop{\kern2.4pt \box0 \kern2.4pt}% Space above/below.
		3088	\kern3pt\vrule width\dimen2}% Space to right.
		3089	\hrule height\dimen2}
		3090	\hfil}
		3091	%
		3092	\def\error{\leavevmode\lower.7ex\copy\errorbox}
		3093
		3094	% @pounds{} is a sterling sign, which Knuth put in the CM italic font.
		3095	%
		3096	\def\pounds{{\it\$}}
		3097
		3098	% @euro{} comes from a separate font, depending on the current style.
		3099	% We use the free feym* fonts from the eurosym package by Henrik
		3100	% Theiling, which support regular, slanted, bold and bold slanted (and
		3101	% "outlined" (blackboard board, sort of) versions, which we don't need).
		3102	% It is available from http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/fonts/eurosym.
		3103	%
		3104	% Although only regular is the truly official Euro symbol, we ignore
		3105	% that. The Euro is designed to be slightly taller than the regular
		3106	% font height.
		3107	%
		3108	% feymr - regular
		3109	% feymo - slanted
		3110	% feybr - bold
		3111	% feybo - bold slanted
		3112	%
		3113	% There is no good (free) typewriter version, to my knowledge.
		3114	% A feymr10 euro is ~7.3pt wide, while a normal cmtt10 char is ~5.25pt wide.
		3115	% Hmm.
		3116	%
		3117	% Also doesn't work in math. Do we need to do math with euro symbols?
		3118	% Hope not.
		3119	%
		3120	%
		3121	\def\euro{{\eurofont e}}
		3122	\def\eurofont{%
		3123	% We set the font at each command, rather than predefining it in
		3124	% \textfonts and the other font-switching commands, so that
		3125	% installations which never need the symbol don't have to have the
		3126	% font installed.
		3127	%
		3128	% There is only one designed size (nominal 10pt), so we always scale
		3129	% that to the current nominal size.
		3130	%
		3131	% By the way, simply using "at 1em" works for cmr10 and the like, but
		3132	% does not work for cmbx10 and other extended/shrunken fonts.
		3133	%
		3134	\def\eurosize{\csname\curfontsize nominalsize\endcsname}%
		3135	%
		3136	\ifx\curfontstyle\bfstylename
		3137	% bold:
		3138	\font\thiseurofont = \ifusingit{feybo10}{feybr10} at \eurosize
		3139	\else
		3140	% regular:
		3141	\font\thiseurofont = \ifusingit{feymo10}{feymr10} at \eurosize
		3142	\fi
		3143	\thiseurofont
		3144	}
		3145
		3146	% Glyphs from the EC fonts. We don't use \let for the aliases, because
		3147	% sometimes we redefine the original macro, and the alias should reflect
		3148	% the redefinition.
		3149	%
		3150	% Use LaTeX names for the Icelandic letters.
		3151	\def\DH{{\ecfont \char"D0}} % Eth
		3152	\def\dh{{\ecfont \char"F0}} % eth
		3153	\def\TH{{\ecfont \char"DE}} % Thorn
		3154	\def\th{{\ecfont \char"FE}} % thorn
		3155	%
		3156	\def\guillemetleft{{\ecfont \char"13}}
		3157	\def\guillemotleft{\guillemetleft}
		3158	\def\guillemetright{{\ecfont \char"14}}
		3159	\def\guillemotright{\guillemetright}
		3160	\def\guilsinglleft{{\ecfont \char"0E}}
		3161	\def\guilsinglright{{\ecfont \char"0F}}
		3162	\def\quotedblbase{{\ecfont \char"12}}
		3163	\def\quotesinglbase{{\ecfont \char"0D}}
		3164	%
		3165	% This positioning is not perfect (see the ogonek LaTeX package), but
		3166	% we have the precomposed glyphs for the most common cases. We put the
		3167	% tests to use those glyphs in the single \ogonek macro so we have fewer
		3168	% dummy definitions to worry about for index entries, etc.
		3169	%
		3170	% ogonek is also used with other letters in Lithuanian (IOU), but using
		3171	% the precomposed glyphs for those is not so easy since they aren't in
		3172	% the same EC font.
		3173	\def\ogonek#1{{%
		3174	\def\temp{#1}%
		3175	\ifx\temp\macrocharA\Aogonek
		3176	\else\ifx\temp\macrochara\aogonek
		3177	\else\ifx\temp\macrocharE\Eogonek
		3178	\else\ifx\temp\macrochare\eogonek
		3179	\else
		3180	\ecfont \setbox0=\hbox{#1}%
		3181	\ifdim\ht0=1ex\accent"0C #1%
		3182	\else\ooalign{\unhbox0\crcr\hidewidth\char"0C \hidewidth}%
		3183	\fi
		3184	\fi\fi\fi\fi
		3185	}%
		3186	}
		3187	\def\Aogonek{{\ecfont \char"81}}\def\macrocharA{A}
		3188	\def\aogonek{{\ecfont \char"A1}}\def\macrochara{a}
		3189	\def\Eogonek{{\ecfont \char"86}}\def\macrocharE{E}
		3190	\def\eogonek{{\ecfont \char"A6}}\def\macrochare{e}
		3191	%
		3192	% Use the ec* fonts (cm-super in outline format) for non-CM glyphs.
		3193	\def\ecfont{%
		3194	% We can't distinguish serif/sans and italic/slanted, but this
		3195	% is used for crude hacks anyway (like adding French and German
		3196	% quotes to documents typeset with CM, where we lose kerning), so
		3197	% hopefully nobody will notice/care.
		3198	\edef\ecsize{\csname\curfontsize ecsize\endcsname}%
		3199	\edef\nominalsize{\csname\curfontsize nominalsize\endcsname}%
		3200	\ifmonospace
		3201	% typewriter:
		3202	\font\thisecfont = ectt\ecsize \space at \nominalsize
		3203	\else
		3204	\ifx\curfontstyle\bfstylename
		3205	% bold:
		3206	\font\thisecfont = ecb\ifusingit{i}{x}\ecsize \space at \nominalsize
		3207	\else
		3208	% regular:
		3209	\font\thisecfont = ec\ifusingit{ti}{rm}\ecsize \space at \nominalsize
		3210	\fi
		3211	\fi
		3212	\thisecfont
		3213	}
		3214
		3215	% @registeredsymbol - R in a circle. The font for the R should really
		3216	% be smaller yet, but lllsize is the best we can do for now.
		3217	% Adapted from the plain.tex definition of \copyright.
		3218	%
		3219	\def\registeredsymbol{%
		3220	$^{{\ooalign{\hfil\raise.07ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize R}%
		3221	\hfil\crcr\Orb}}%
		3222	}$%
		3223	}
		3224
		3225	% @textdegree - the normal degrees sign.
		3226	%
		3227	\def\textdegree{$^\circ$}
		3228
		3229	% Laurent Siebenmann reports \Orb undefined with:
		3230	% Textures 1.7.7 (preloaded format=plain 93.10.14) (68K) 16 APR 2004 02:38
		3231	% so we'll define it if necessary.
		3232	%
		3233	\ifx\Orb\thisisundefined
		3234	\def\Orb{\mathhexbox20D}
		3235	\fi
		3236
		3237	% Quotes.
		3238	\chardef\quotedblleft="5C
		3239	\chardef\quotedblright=`\"
		3240	\chardef\quoteleft=`\`
		3241	\chardef\quoteright=`\'
		3242
		3243
		3244	\message{page headings,}
		3245
		3246	\newskip\titlepagetopglue \titlepagetopglue = 1.5in
		3247	\newskip\titlepagebottomglue \titlepagebottomglue = 2pc
		3248
		3249	% First the title page. Must do @settitle before @titlepage.
		3250	\newif\ifseenauthor
		3251	\newif\iffinishedtitlepage
		3252
		3253	% Do an implicit @contents or @shortcontents after @end titlepage if the
		3254	% user says @setcontentsaftertitlepage or @setshortcontentsaftertitlepage.
		3255	%
		3256	\newif\ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage
		3257	\let\setcontentsaftertitlepage = \setcontentsaftertitlepagetrue
		3258	\newif\ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage
		3259	\let\setshortcontentsaftertitlepage = \setshortcontentsaftertitlepagetrue
		3260
		3261	\parseargdef\shorttitlepage{%
		3262	\begingroup \hbox{}\vskip 1.5in \chaprm \centerline{#1}%
		3263	\endgroup\page\hbox{}\page}
		3264
		3265	\envdef\titlepage{%
		3266	% Open one extra group, as we want to close it in the middle of \Etitlepage.
		3267	\begingroup
		3268	\parindent=0pt \textfonts
		3269	% Leave some space at the very top of the page.
		3270	\vglue\titlepagetopglue
		3271	% No rule at page bottom unless we print one at the top with @title.
		3272	\finishedtitlepagetrue
		3273	%
		3274	% Most title ``pages'' are actually two pages long, with space
		3275	% at the top of the second. We don't want the ragged left on the second.
		3276	\let\oldpage = \page
		3277	\def\page{%
		3278	\iffinishedtitlepage\else
		3279	\finishtitlepage
		3280	\fi
		3281	\let\page = \oldpage
		3282	\page
		3283	\null
		3284	}%
		3285	}
		3286
		3287	\def\Etitlepage{%
		3288	\iffinishedtitlepage\else
		3289	\finishtitlepage
		3290	\fi
		3291	% It is important to do the page break before ending the group,
		3292	% because the headline and footline are only empty inside the group.
		3293	% If we use the new definition of \page, we always get a blank page
		3294	% after the title page, which we certainly don't want.
		3295	\oldpage
		3296	\endgroup
		3297	%
		3298	% Need this before the \...aftertitlepage checks so that if they are
		3299	% in effect the toc pages will come out with page numbers.
		3300	\HEADINGSon
		3301	%
		3302	% If they want short, they certainly want long too.
		3303	\ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage
		3304	\shortcontents
		3305	\contents
		3306	\global\let\shortcontents = \relax
		3307	\global\let\contents = \relax
		3308	\fi
		3309	%
		3310	\ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage
		3311	\contents
		3312	\global\let\contents = \relax
		3313	\global\let\shortcontents = \relax
		3314	\fi
		3315	}
		3316
		3317	\def\finishtitlepage{%
		3318	\vskip4pt \hrule height 2pt width \hsize
		3319	\vskip\titlepagebottomglue
		3320	\finishedtitlepagetrue
		3321	}
		3322
		3323	% Settings used for typesetting titles: no hyphenation, no indentation,
		3324	% don't worry much about spacing, ragged right. This should be used
		3325	% inside a \vbox, and fonts need to be set appropriately first. Because
		3326	% it is always used for titles, nothing else, we call \rmisbold. \par
		3327	% should be specified before the end of the \vbox, since a vbox is a group.
		3328	%
		3329	\def\raggedtitlesettings{%
		3330	\rmisbold
		3331	\hyphenpenalty=10000
		3332	\parindent=0pt
		3333	\tolerance=5000
		3334	\ptexraggedright
		3335	}
		3336
		3337	% Macros to be used within @titlepage:
		3338
		3339	\let\subtitlerm=\tenrm
		3340	\def\subtitlefont{\subtitlerm \normalbaselineskip = 13pt \normalbaselines}
		3341
		3342	\parseargdef\title{%
		3343	\checkenv\titlepage
		3344	\vbox{\titlefonts \raggedtitlesettings #1\par}%
		3345	% print a rule at the page bottom also.
		3346	\finishedtitlepagefalse
		3347	\vskip4pt \hrule height 4pt width \hsize \vskip4pt
		3348	}
		3349
		3350	\parseargdef\subtitle{%
		3351	\checkenv\titlepage
		3352	{\subtitlefont \rightline{#1}}%
		3353	}
		3354
		3355	% @author should come last, but may come many times.
		3356	% It can also be used inside @quotation.
		3357	%
		3358	\parseargdef\author{%
		3359	\def\temp{\quotation}%
		3360	\ifx\thisenv\temp
		3361	\def\quotationauthor{#1}% printed in \Equotation.
		3362	\else
		3363	\checkenv\titlepage
		3364	\ifseenauthor\else \vskip 0pt plus 1filll \seenauthortrue \fi
		3365	{\secfonts\rmisbold \leftline{#1}}%
		3366	\fi
		3367	}
		3368
		3369
		3370	% Set up page headings and footings.
		3371
		3372	\let\thispage=\folio
		3373
		3374	\newtoks\evenheadline % headline on even pages
		3375	\newtoks\oddheadline % headline on odd pages
		3376	\newtoks\evenfootline % footline on even pages
		3377	\newtoks\oddfootline % footline on odd pages
		3378
		3379	% Now make TeX use those variables
		3380	\headline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddheadline
		3381	\else \the\evenheadline \fi}}
		3382	\footline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddfootline
		3383	\else \the\evenfootline \fi}\HEADINGShook}
		3384	\let\HEADINGShook=\relax
		3385
		3386	% Commands to set those variables.
		3387	% For example, this is what @headings on does
		3388	% @evenheading @thistitle|@thispage|@thischapter
		3389	% @oddheading @thischapter|@thispage|@thistitle
		3390	% @evenfooting @thisfile||
		3391	% @oddfooting ||@thisfile
		3392
		3393
		3394	\def\evenheading{\parsearg\evenheadingxxx}
		3395	\def\evenheadingxxx #1{\evenheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
		3396	\def\evenheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
		3397	\global\evenheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
		3398
		3399	\def\oddheading{\parsearg\oddheadingxxx}
		3400	\def\oddheadingxxx #1{\oddheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
		3401	\def\oddheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
		3402	\global\oddheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
		3403
		3404	\parseargdef\everyheading{\oddheadingxxx{#1}\evenheadingxxx{#1}}%
		3405
		3406	\def\evenfooting{\parsearg\evenfootingxxx}
		3407	\def\evenfootingxxx #1{\evenfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
		3408	\def\evenfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
		3409	\global\evenfootline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
		3410
		3411	\def\oddfooting{\parsearg\oddfootingxxx}
		3412	\def\oddfootingxxx #1{\oddfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
		3413	\def\oddfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
		3414	\global\oddfootline = {\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}%
		3415	%
		3416	% Leave some space for the footline. Hopefully ok to assume
		3417	% @evenfooting will not be used by itself.
		3418	\global\advance\pageheight by -12pt
		3419	\global\advance\vsize by -12pt
		3420	}
		3421
		3422	\parseargdef\everyfooting{\oddfootingxxx{#1}\evenfootingxxx{#1}}
		3423
		3424	% @evenheadingmarks top \thischapter <- chapter at the top of a page
		3425	% @evenheadingmarks bottom \thischapter <- chapter at the bottom of a page
		3426	%
		3427	% The same set of arguments for:
		3428	%
		3429	% @oddheadingmarks
		3430	% @evenfootingmarks
		3431	% @oddfootingmarks
		3432	% @everyheadingmarks
		3433	% @everyfootingmarks
		3434
		3435	\def\evenheadingmarks{\headingmarks{even}{heading}}
		3436	\def\oddheadingmarks{\headingmarks{odd}{heading}}
		3437	\def\evenfootingmarks{\headingmarks{even}{footing}}
		3438	\def\oddfootingmarks{\headingmarks{odd}{footing}}
		3439	\def\everyheadingmarks#1 {\headingmarks{even}{heading}{#1}
		3440	\headingmarks{odd}{heading}{#1} }
		3441	\def\everyfootingmarks#1 {\headingmarks{even}{footing}{#1}
		3442	\headingmarks{odd}{footing}{#1} }
		3443	% #1 = even/odd, #2 = heading/footing, #3 = top/bottom.
		3444	\def\headingmarks#1#2#3 {%
		3445	\expandafter\let\expandafter\temp \csname get#3headingmarks\endcsname
		3446	\global\expandafter\let\csname get#1#2marks\endcsname \temp
		3447	}
		3448
		3449	\everyheadingmarks bottom
		3450	\everyfootingmarks bottom
		3451
		3452	% @headings double turns headings on for double-sided printing.
		3453	% @headings single turns headings on for single-sided printing.
		3454	% @headings off turns them off.
		3455	% @headings on same as @headings double, retained for compatibility.
		3456	% @headings after turns on double-sided headings after this page.
		3457	% @headings doubleafter turns on double-sided headings after this page.
		3458	% @headings singleafter turns on single-sided headings after this page.
		3459	% By default, they are off at the start of a document,
		3460	% and turned `on' after @end titlepage.
		3461
		3462	\def\headings #1 {\csname HEADINGS#1\endcsname}
		3463
		3464	\def\headingsoff{% non-global headings elimination
		3465	\evenheadline={\hfil}\evenfootline={\hfil}%
		3466	\oddheadline={\hfil}\oddfootline={\hfil}%
		3467	}
		3468
		3469	\def\HEADINGSoff{{\globaldefs=1 \headingsoff}} % global setting
		3470	\HEADINGSoff % it's the default
		3471
		3472	% When we turn headings on, set the page number to 1.
		3473	% For double-sided printing, put current file name in lower left corner,
		3474	% chapter name on inside top of right hand pages, document
		3475	% title on inside top of left hand pages, and page numbers on outside top
		3476	% edge of all pages.
		3477	\def\HEADINGSdouble{%
		3478	\global\pageno=1
		3479	\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
		3480	\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
		3481	\global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}}
		3482	\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
		3483	\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
		3484	}
		3485	\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
		3486
		3487	% For single-sided printing, chapter title goes across top left of page,
		3488	% page number on top right.
		3489	\def\HEADINGSsingle{%
		3490	\global\pageno=1
		3491	\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
		3492	\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
		3493	\global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
		3494	\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
		3495	\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
		3496	}
		3497	\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}
		3498
		3499	\def\HEADINGSafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSdoublex}
		3500	\let\HEADINGSdoubleafter=\HEADINGSafter
		3501	\def\HEADINGSdoublex{%
		3502	\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
		3503	\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
		3504	\global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}}
		3505	\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
		3506	\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
		3507	}
		3508
		3509	\def\HEADINGSsingleafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSsinglex}
		3510	\def\HEADINGSsinglex{%
		3511	\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
		3512	\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
		3513	\global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
		3514	\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
		3515	\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
		3516	}
		3517
		3518	% Subroutines used in generating headings
		3519	% This produces Day Month Year style of output.
		3520	% Only define if not already defined, in case a txi-??.tex file has set
		3521	% up a different format (e.g., txi-cs.tex does this).
		3522	\ifx\today\thisisundefined
		3523	\def\today{%
		3524	\number\day\space
		3525	\ifcase\month
		3526	\or\putwordMJan\or\putwordMFeb\or\putwordMMar\or\putwordMApr
		3527	\or\putwordMMay\or\putwordMJun\or\putwordMJul\or\putwordMAug
		3528	\or\putwordMSep\or\putwordMOct\or\putwordMNov\or\putwordMDec
		3529	\fi
		3530	\space\number\year}
		3531	\fi
		3532
		3533	% @settitle line... specifies the title of the document, for headings.
		3534	% It generates no output of its own.
		3535	\def\thistitle{\putwordNoTitle}
		3536	\def\settitle{\parsearg{\gdef\thistitle}}
		3537
		3538
		3539	\message{tables,}
		3540	% Tables -- @table, @ftable, @vtable, @item(x).
		3541
		3542	% default indentation of table text
		3543	\newdimen\tableindent \tableindent=.8in
		3544	% default indentation of @itemize and @enumerate text
		3545	\newdimen\itemindent \itemindent=.3in
		3546	% margin between end of table item and start of table text.
		3547	\newdimen\itemmargin \itemmargin=.1in
		3548
		3549	% used internally for \itemindent minus \itemmargin
		3550	\newdimen\itemmax
		3551
		3552	% Note @table, @ftable, and @vtable define @item, @itemx, etc., with
		3553	% these defs.
		3554	% They also define \itemindex
		3555	% to index the item name in whatever manner is desired (perhaps none).
		3556
		3557	\newif\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip
		3558
		3559	\def\itemxpar{\par\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip\nobreak\vskip-\parskip\nobreak\fi}
		3560
		3561	\def\internalBitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\itemzzz}
		3562	\def\internalBitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\itemzzz}
		3563
		3564	\def\itemzzz #1{\begingroup %
		3565	\advance\hsize by -\rightskip
		3566	\advance\hsize by -\tableindent
		3567	\setbox0=\hbox{\itemindicate{#1}}%
		3568	\itemindex{#1}%
		3569	\nobreak % This prevents a break before @itemx.
		3570	%
		3571	% If the item text does not fit in the space we have, put it on a line
		3572	% by itself, and do not allow a page break either before or after that
		3573	% line. We do not start a paragraph here because then if the next
		3574	% command is, e.g., @kindex, the whatsit would get put into the
		3575	% horizontal list on a line by itself, resulting in extra blank space.
		3576	\ifdim \wd0>\itemmax
		3577	%
		3578	% Make this a paragraph so we get the \parskip glue and wrapping,
		3579	% but leave it ragged-right.
		3580	\begingroup
		3581	\advance\leftskip by-\tableindent
		3582	\advance\hsize by\tableindent
		3583	\advance\rightskip by0pt plus1fil\relax
		3584	\leavevmode\unhbox0\par
		3585	\endgroup
		3586	%
		3587	% We're going to be starting a paragraph, but we don't want the
		3588	% \parskip glue -- logically it's part of the @item we just started.
		3589	\nobreak \vskip-\parskip
		3590	%
		3591	% Stop a page break at the \parskip glue coming up. However, if
		3592	% what follows is an environment such as @example, there will be no
		3593	% \parskip glue; then the negative vskip we just inserted would
		3594	% cause the example and the item to crash together. So we use this
		3595	% bizarre value of 10001 as a signal to \aboveenvbreak to insert
		3596	% \parskip glue after all. Section titles are handled this way also.
		3597	%
		3598	\penalty 10001
		3599	\endgroup
		3600	\itemxneedsnegativevskipfalse
		3601	\else
		3602	% The item text fits into the space. Start a paragraph, so that the
		3603	% following text (if any) will end up on the same line.
		3604	\noindent
		3605	% Do this with kerns and \unhbox so that if there is a footnote in
		3606	% the item text, it can migrate to the main vertical list and
		3607	% eventually be printed.
		3608	\nobreak\kern-\tableindent
		3609	\dimen0 = \itemmax \advance\dimen0 by \itemmargin \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0
		3610	\unhbox0
		3611	\nobreak\kern\dimen0
		3612	\endgroup
		3613	\itemxneedsnegativevskiptrue
		3614	\fi
		3615	}
		3616
		3617	\def\item{\errmessage{@item while not in a list environment}}
		3618	\def\itemx{\errmessage{@itemx while not in a list environment}}
		3619
		3620	% @table, @ftable, @vtable.
		3621	\envdef\table{%
		3622	\let\itemindex\gobble
		3623	\tablecheck{table}%
		3624	}
		3625	\envdef\ftable{%
		3626	\def\itemindex ##1{\doind {fn}{\code{##1}}}%
		3627	\tablecheck{ftable}%
		3628	}
		3629	\envdef\vtable{%
		3630	\def\itemindex ##1{\doind {vr}{\code{##1}}}%
		3631	\tablecheck{vtable}%
		3632	}
		3633	\def\tablecheck#1{%
		3634	\ifnum \the\catcode`\^^M=\active
		3635	\endgroup
		3636	\errmessage{This command won't work in this context; perhaps the problem is
		3637	that we are \inenvironment\thisenv}%
		3638	\def\next{\doignore{#1}}%
		3639	\else
		3640	\let\next\tablex
		3641	\fi
		3642	\next
		3643	}
		3644	\def\tablex#1{%
		3645	\def\itemindicate{#1}%
		3646	\parsearg\tabley
		3647	}
		3648	\def\tabley#1{%
		3649	{%
		3650	\makevalueexpandable
		3651	\edef\temp{\noexpand\tablez #1\space\space\space}%
		3652	\expandafter
		3653	}\temp \endtablez
		3654	}
		3655	\def\tablez #1 #2 #3 #4\endtablez{%
		3656	\aboveenvbreak
		3657	\ifnum 0#1>0 \advance \leftskip by #1\mil \fi
		3658	\ifnum 0#2>0 \tableindent=#2\mil \fi
		3659	\ifnum 0#3>0 \advance \rightskip by #3\mil \fi
		3660	\itemmax=\tableindent
		3661	\advance \itemmax by -\itemmargin
		3662	\advance \leftskip by \tableindent
		3663	\exdentamount=\tableindent
		3664	\parindent = 0pt
		3665	\parskip = \smallskipamount
		3666	\ifdim \parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi
		3667	\let\item = \internalBitem
		3668	\let\itemx = \internalBitemx
		3669	}
		3670	\def\Etable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak}
		3671	\let\Eftable\Etable
		3672	\let\Evtable\Etable
		3673	\let\Eitemize\Etable
		3674	\let\Eenumerate\Etable
		3675
		3676	% This is the counter used by @enumerate, which is really @itemize
		3677
		3678	\newcount \itemno
		3679
		3680	\envdef\itemize{\parsearg\doitemize}
		3681
		3682	\def\doitemize#1{%
		3683	\aboveenvbreak
		3684	\itemmax=\itemindent
		3685	\advance\itemmax by -\itemmargin
		3686	\advance\leftskip by \itemindent
		3687	\exdentamount=\itemindent
		3688	\parindent=0pt
		3689	\parskip=\smallskipamount
		3690	\ifdim\parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi
		3691	%
		3692	% Try typesetting the item mark so that if the document erroneously says
		3693	% something like @itemize @samp (intending @table), there's an error
		3694	% right away at the @itemize. It's not the best error message in the
		3695	% world, but it's better than leaving it to the @item. This means if
		3696	% the user wants an empty mark, they have to say @w{} not just @w.
		3697	\def\itemcontents{#1}%
		3698	\setbox0 = \hbox{\itemcontents}%
		3699	%
		3700	% @itemize with no arg is equivalent to @itemize @bullet.
		3701	\ifx\itemcontents\empty\def\itemcontents{\bullet}\fi
		3702	%
		3703	\let\item=\itemizeitem
		3704	}
		3705
		3706	% Definition of @item while inside @itemize and @enumerate.
		3707	%
		3708	\def\itemizeitem{%
		3709	\advance\itemno by 1 % for enumerations
		3710	{\let\par=\endgraf \smallbreak}% reasonable place to break
		3711	{%
		3712	% If the document has an @itemize directly after a section title, a
		3713	% \nobreak will be last on the list, and \sectionheading will have
		3714	% done a \vskip-\parskip. In that case, we don't want to zero
		3715	% parskip, or the item text will crash with the heading. On the
		3716	% other hand, when there is normal text preceding the item (as there
		3717	% usually is), we do want to zero parskip, or there would be too much
		3718	% space. In that case, we won't have a \nobreak before. At least
		3719	% that's the theory.
		3720	\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \parskip=0in \fi
		3721	\noindent
		3722	\hbox to 0pt{\hss \itemcontents \kern\itemmargin}%
		3723	%
		3724	\vadjust{\penalty 1200}}% not good to break after first line of item.
		3725	\flushcr
		3726	}
		3727
		3728	% \splitoff TOKENS\endmark defines \first to be the first token in
		3729	% TOKENS, and \rest to be the remainder.
		3730	%
		3731	\def\splitoff#1#2\endmark{\def\first{#1}\def\rest{#2}}%
		3732
		3733	% Allow an optional argument of an uppercase letter, lowercase letter,
		3734	% or number, to specify the first label in the enumerated list. No
		3735	% argument is the same as `1'.
		3736	%
		3737	\envparseargdef\enumerate{\enumeratey #1 \endenumeratey}
		3738	\def\enumeratey #1 #2\endenumeratey{%
		3739	% If we were given no argument, pretend we were given `1'.
		3740	\def\thearg{#1}%
		3741	\ifx\thearg\empty \def\thearg{1}\fi
		3742	%
		3743	% Detect if the argument is a single token. If so, it might be a
		3744	% letter. Otherwise, the only valid thing it can be is a number.
		3745	% (We will always have one token, because of the test we just made.
		3746	% This is a good thing, since \splitoff doesn't work given nothing at
		3747	% all -- the first parameter is undelimited.)
		3748	\expandafter\splitoff\thearg\endmark
		3749	\ifx\rest\empty
		3750	% Only one token in the argument. It could still be anything.
		3751	% A ``lowercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is nonzero.
		3752	% An ``uppercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is both nonzero, and
		3753	% not equal to itself.
		3754	% Otherwise, we assume it's a number.
		3755	%
		3756	% We need the \relax at the end of the \ifnum lines to stop TeX from
		3757	% continuing to look for a <number>.
		3758	%
		3759	\ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=0\relax
		3760	\numericenumerate % a number (we hope)
		3761	\else
		3762	% It's a letter.
		3763	\ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=\expandafter`\thearg\relax
		3764	\lowercaseenumerate % lowercase letter
		3765	\else
		3766	\uppercaseenumerate % uppercase letter
		3767	\fi
		3768	\fi
		3769	\else
		3770	% Multiple tokens in the argument. We hope it's a number.
		3771	\numericenumerate
		3772	\fi
		3773	}
		3774
		3775	% An @enumerate whose labels are integers. The starting integer is
		3776	% given in \thearg.
		3777	%
		3778	\def\numericenumerate{%
		3779	\itemno = \thearg
		3780	\startenumeration{\the\itemno}%
		3781	}
		3782
		3783	% The starting (lowercase) letter is in \thearg.
		3784	\def\lowercaseenumerate{%
		3785	\itemno = \expandafter`\thearg
		3786	\startenumeration{%
		3787	% Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet.
		3788	\ifnum\itemno=0
		3789	\errmessage{No more lowercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger
		3790	alphabet}%
		3791	\fi
		3792	\char\lccode\itemno
		3793	}%
		3794	}
		3795
		3796	% The starting (uppercase) letter is in \thearg.
		3797	\def\uppercaseenumerate{%
		3798	\itemno = \expandafter`\thearg
		3799	\startenumeration{%
		3800	% Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet.
		3801	\ifnum\itemno=0
		3802	\errmessage{No more uppercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger
		3803	alphabet}
		3804	\fi
		3805	\char\uccode\itemno
		3806	}%
		3807	}
		3808
		3809	% Call \doitemize, adding a period to the first argument and supplying the
		3810	% common last two arguments. Also subtract one from the initial value in
		3811	% \itemno, since @item increments \itemno.
		3812	%
		3813	\def\startenumeration#1{%
		3814	\advance\itemno by -1
		3815	\doitemize{#1.}\flushcr
		3816	}
		3817
		3818	% @alphaenumerate and @capsenumerate are abbreviations for giving an arg
		3819	% to @enumerate.
		3820	%
		3821	\def\alphaenumerate{\enumerate{a}}
		3822	\def\capsenumerate{\enumerate{A}}
		3823	\def\Ealphaenumerate{\Eenumerate}
		3824	\def\Ecapsenumerate{\Eenumerate}
		3825
		3826
		3827	% @multitable macros
		3828	% Amy Hendrickson, 8/18/94, 3/6/96
		3829	%
		3830	% @multitable ... @end multitable will make as many columns as desired.
		3831	% Contents of each column will wrap at width given in preamble. Width
		3832	% can be specified either with sample text given in a template line,
		3833	% or in percent of \hsize, the current width of text on page.
		3834
		3835	% Table can continue over pages but will only break between lines.
		3836
		3837	% To make preamble:
		3838	%
		3839	% Either define widths of columns in terms of percent of \hsize:
		3840	% @multitable @columnfractions .25 .3 .45
		3841	% @item ...
		3842	%
		3843	% Numbers following @columnfractions are the percent of the total
		3844	% current hsize to be used for each column. You may use as many
		3845	% columns as desired.
		3846
		3847
		3848	% Or use a template:
		3849	% @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template}
		3850	% @item ...
		3851	% using the widest term desired in each column.
		3852
		3853	% Each new table line starts with @item, each subsequent new column
		3854	% starts with @tab. Empty columns may be produced by supplying @tab's
		3855	% with nothing between them for as many times as empty columns are needed,
		3856	% ie, @tab@tab@tab will produce two empty columns.
		3857
		3858	% @item, @tab do not need to be on their own lines, but it will not hurt
		3859	% if they are.
		3860
		3861	% Sample multitable:
		3862
		3863	% @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template}
		3864	% @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff @tab third col
		3865	% @item
		3866	% first col stuff
		3867	% @tab
		3868	% second col stuff
		3869	% @tab
		3870	% third col
		3871	% @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff
		3872	% @tab Many paragraphs of text may be used in any column.
		3873	%
		3874	% They will wrap at the width determined by the template.
		3875	% @item@tab@tab This will be in third column.
		3876	% @end multitable
		3877
		3878	% Default dimensions may be reset by user.
		3879	% @multitableparskip is vertical space between paragraphs in table.
		3880	% @multitableparindent is paragraph indent in table.
		3881	% @multitablecolmargin is horizontal space to be left between columns.
		3882	% @multitablelinespace is space to leave between table items, baseline
		3883	% to baseline.
		3884	% 0pt means it depends on current normal line spacing.
		3885	%
		3886	\newskip\multitableparskip
		3887	\newskip\multitableparindent
		3888	\newdimen\multitablecolspace
		3889	\newskip\multitablelinespace
		3890	\multitableparskip=0pt
		3891	\multitableparindent=6pt
		3892	\multitablecolspace=12pt
		3893	\multitablelinespace=0pt
		3894
		3895	% Macros used to set up halign preamble:
		3896	%
		3897	\let\endsetuptable\relax
		3898	\def\xendsetuptable{\endsetuptable}
		3899	\let\columnfractions\relax
		3900	\def\xcolumnfractions{\columnfractions}
		3901	\newif\ifsetpercent
		3902
		3903	% #1 is the @columnfraction, usually a decimal number like .5, but might
		3904	% be just 1. We just use it, whatever it is.
		3905	%
		3906	\def\pickupwholefraction#1 {%
		3907	\global\advance\colcount by 1
		3908	\expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{#1\hsize}%
		3909	\setuptable
		3910	}
		3911
		3912	\newcount\colcount
		3913	\def\setuptable#1{%
		3914	\def\firstarg{#1}%
		3915	\ifx\firstarg\xendsetuptable
		3916	\let\go = \relax
		3917	\else
		3918	\ifx\firstarg\xcolumnfractions
		3919	\global\setpercenttrue
		3920	\else
		3921	\ifsetpercent
		3922	\let\go\pickupwholefraction
		3923	\else
		3924	\global\advance\colcount by 1
		3925	\setbox0=\hbox{#1\unskip\space}% Add a normal word space as a
		3926	% separator; typically that is always in the input, anyway.
		3927	\expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{\the\wd0}%
		3928	\fi
		3929	\fi
		3930	\ifx\go\pickupwholefraction
		3931	% Put the argument back for the \pickupwholefraction call, so
		3932	% we'll always have a period there to be parsed.
		3933	\def\go{\pickupwholefraction#1}%
		3934	\else
		3935	\let\go = \setuptable
		3936	\fi%
		3937	\fi
		3938	\go
		3939	}
		3940
		3941	% multitable-only commands.
		3942	%
		3943	% @headitem starts a heading row, which we typeset in bold. Assignments
		3944	% have to be global since we are inside the implicit group of an
		3945	% alignment entry. \everycr below resets \everytab so we don't have to
		3946	% undo it ourselves.
		3947	\def\headitemfont{\b}% for people to use in the template row; not changeable
		3948	\def\headitem{%
		3949	\checkenv\multitable
		3950	\crcr
		3951	\gdef\headitemcrhook{\nobreak}% attempt to avoid page break after headings
		3952	\global\everytab={\bf}% can't use \headitemfont since the parsing differs
		3953	\the\everytab % for the first item
		3954	}%
		3955	%
		3956	% default for tables with no headings.
		3957	\let\headitemcrhook=\relax
		3958	%
		3959	% A \tab used to include \hskip1sp. But then the space in a template
		3960	% line is not enough. That is bad. So let's go back to just `&' until
		3961	% we again encounter the problem the 1sp was intended to solve.
		3962	% --karl, nathan@acm.org, 20apr99.
		3963	\def\tab{\checkenv\multitable &\the\everytab}%
		3964
		3965	% @multitable ... @end multitable definitions:
		3966	%
		3967	\newtoks\everytab % insert after every tab.
		3968	%
		3969	\envdef\multitable{%
		3970	\vskip\parskip
		3971	\startsavinginserts
		3972	%
		3973	% @item within a multitable starts a normal row.
		3974	% We use \def instead of \let so that if one of the multitable entries
		3975	% contains an @itemize, we don't choke on the \item (seen as \crcr aka
		3976	% \endtemplate) expanding \doitemize.
		3977	\def\item{\crcr}%
		3978	%
		3979	\tolerance=9500
		3980	\hbadness=9500
		3981	\setmultitablespacing
		3982	\parskip=\multitableparskip
		3983	\parindent=\multitableparindent
		3984	\overfullrule=0pt
		3985	\global\colcount=0
		3986	%
		3987	\everycr = {%
		3988	\noalign{%
		3989	\global\everytab={}% Reset from possible headitem.
		3990	\global\colcount=0 % Reset the column counter.
		3991	%
		3992	% Check for saved footnotes, etc.:
		3993	\checkinserts
		3994	%
		3995	% Perhaps a \nobreak, then reset:
		3996	\headitemcrhook
		3997	\global\let\headitemcrhook=\relax
		3998	}%
		3999	}%
		4000	%
		4001	\parsearg\domultitable
		4002	}
		4003	\def\domultitable#1{%
		4004	% To parse everything between @multitable and @item:
		4005	\setuptable#1 \endsetuptable
		4006	%
		4007	% This preamble sets up a generic column definition, which will
		4008	% be used as many times as user calls for columns.
		4009	% \vtop will set a single line and will also let text wrap and
		4010	% continue for many paragraphs if desired.
		4011	\halign\bgroup &%
		4012	\global\advance\colcount by 1
		4013	\multistrut
		4014	\vtop{%
		4015	% Use the current \colcount to find the correct column width:
		4016	\hsize=\expandafter\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname
		4017	%
		4018	% In order to keep entries from bumping into each other
		4019	% we will add a \leftskip of \multitablecolspace to all columns after
		4020	% the first one.
		4021	%
		4022	% If a template has been used, we will add \multitablecolspace
		4023	% to the width of each template entry.
		4024	%
		4025	% If the user has set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize we will
		4026	% use that dimension as the width of the column, and the \leftskip
		4027	% will keep entries from bumping into each other. Table will start at
		4028	% left margin and final column will justify at right margin.
		4029	%
		4030	% Make sure we don't inherit \rightskip from the outer environment.
		4031	\rightskip=0pt
		4032	\ifnum\colcount=1
		4033	% The first column will be indented with the surrounding text.
		4034	\advance\hsize by\leftskip
		4035	\else
		4036	\ifsetpercent \else
		4037	% If user has not set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize
		4038	% we will advance \hsize by \multitablecolspace.
		4039	\advance\hsize by \multitablecolspace
		4040	\fi
		4041	% In either case we will make \leftskip=\multitablecolspace:
		4042	\leftskip=\multitablecolspace
		4043	\fi
		4044	% Ignoring space at the beginning and end avoids an occasional spurious
		4045	% blank line, when TeX decides to break the line at the space before the
		4046	% box from the multistrut, so the strut ends up on a line by itself.
		4047	% For example:
		4048	% @multitable @columnfractions .11 .89
		4049	% @item @code{#}
		4050	% @tab Legal holiday which is valid in major parts of the whole country.
		4051	% Is automatically provided with highlighting sequences respectively
		4052	% marking characters.
		4053	\noindent\ignorespaces##\unskip\multistrut
		4054	}\cr
		4055	}
		4056	\def\Emultitable{%
		4057	\crcr
		4058	\egroup % end the \halign
		4059	\global\setpercentfalse
		4060	}
		4061
		4062	\def\setmultitablespacing{%
		4063	\def\multistrut{\strut}% just use the standard line spacing
		4064	%
		4065	% Compute \multitablelinespace (if not defined by user) for use in
		4066	% \multitableparskip calculation. We used define \multistrut based on
		4067	% this, but (ironically) that caused the spacing to be off.
		4068	% See bug-texinfo report from Werner Lemberg, 31 Oct 2004 12:52:20 +0100.
		4069	\ifdim\multitablelinespace=0pt
		4070	\setbox0=\vbox{X}\global\multitablelinespace=\the\baselineskip
		4071	\global\advance\multitablelinespace by-\ht0
		4072	\fi
		4073	% Test to see if parskip is larger than space between lines of
		4074	% table. If not, do nothing.
		4075	% If so, set to same dimension as multitablelinespace.
		4076	\ifdim\multitableparskip>\multitablelinespace
		4077	\global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace
		4078	\global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt % to keep parskip somewhat smaller
		4079	% than skip between lines in the table.
		4080	\fi%
		4081	\ifdim\multitableparskip=0pt
		4082	\global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace
		4083	\global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt % to keep parskip somewhat smaller
		4084	% than skip between lines in the table.
		4085	\fi}
		4086
		4087
		4088	\message{conditionals,}
		4089
		4090	% @iftex, @ifnotdocbook, @ifnothtml, @ifnotinfo, @ifnotplaintext,
		4091	% @ifnotxml always succeed. They currently do nothing; we don't
		4092	% attempt to check whether the conditionals are properly nested. But we
		4093	% have to remember that they are conditionals, so that @end doesn't
		4094	% attempt to close an environment group.
		4095	%
		4096	\def\makecond#1{%
		4097	\expandafter\let\csname #1\endcsname = \relax
		4098	\expandafter\let\csname iscond.#1\endcsname = 1
		4099	}
		4100	\makecond{iftex}
		4101	\makecond{ifnotdocbook}
		4102	\makecond{ifnothtml}
		4103	\makecond{ifnotinfo}
		4104	\makecond{ifnotplaintext}
		4105	\makecond{ifnotxml}
		4106
		4107	% Ignore @ignore, @ifhtml, @ifinfo, and the like.
		4108	%
		4109	\def\direntry{\doignore{direntry}}
		4110	\def\documentdescription{\doignore{documentdescription}}
		4111	\def\docbook{\doignore{docbook}}
		4112	\def\html{\doignore{html}}
		4113	\def\ifdocbook{\doignore{ifdocbook}}
		4114	\def\ifhtml{\doignore{ifhtml}}
		4115	\def\ifinfo{\doignore{ifinfo}}
		4116	\def\ifnottex{\doignore{ifnottex}}
		4117	\def\ifplaintext{\doignore{ifplaintext}}
		4118	\def\ifxml{\doignore{ifxml}}
		4119	\def\ignore{\doignore{ignore}}
		4120	\def\menu{\doignore{menu}}
		4121	\def\xml{\doignore{xml}}
		4122
		4123	% Ignore text until a line `@end #1', keeping track of nested conditionals.
		4124	%
		4125	% A count to remember the depth of nesting.
		4126	\newcount\doignorecount
		4127
		4128	\def\doignore#1{\begingroup
		4129	% Scan in ``verbatim'' mode:
		4130	\obeylines
		4131	\catcode`\@ = \other
		4132	\catcode`\{ = \other
		4133	\catcode`\} = \other
		4134	%
		4135	% Make sure that spaces turn into tokens that match what \doignoretext wants.
		4136	\spaceisspace
		4137	%
		4138	% Count number of #1's that we've seen.
		4139	\doignorecount = 0
		4140	%
		4141	% Swallow text until we reach the matching `@end #1'.
		4142	\dodoignore{#1}%
		4143	}
		4144
		4145	{ \catcode`_=11 % We want to use \_STOP_ which cannot appear in texinfo source.
		4146	\obeylines %
		4147	%
		4148	\gdef\dodoignore#1{%
		4149	% #1 contains the command name as a string, e.g., `ifinfo'.
		4150	%
		4151	% Define a command to find the next `@end #1'.
		4152	\long\def\doignoretext##1^^M@end #1{%
		4153	\doignoretextyyy##1^^M@#1\_STOP_}%
		4154	%
		4155	% And this command to find another #1 command, at the beginning of a
		4156	% line. (Otherwise, we would consider a line `@c @ifset', for
		4157	% example, to count as an @ifset for nesting.)
		4158	\long\def\doignoretextyyy##1^^M@#1##2\_STOP_{\doignoreyyy{##2}\_STOP_}%
		4159	%
		4160	% And now expand that command.
		4161	\doignoretext ^^M%
		4162	}%
		4163	}
		4164
		4165	\def\doignoreyyy#1{%
		4166	\def\temp{#1}%
		4167	\ifx\temp\empty % Nothing found.
		4168	\let\next\doignoretextzzz
		4169	\else % Found a nested condition, ...
		4170	\advance\doignorecount by 1
		4171	\let\next\doignoretextyyy % ..., look for another.
		4172	% If we're here, #1 ends with ^^M\ifinfo (for example).
		4173	\fi
		4174	\next #1% the token \_STOP_ is present just after this macro.
		4175	}
		4176
		4177	% We have to swallow the remaining "\_STOP_".
		4178	%
		4179	\def\doignoretextzzz#1{%
		4180	\ifnum\doignorecount = 0 % We have just found the outermost @end.
		4181	\let\next\enddoignore
		4182	\else % Still inside a nested condition.
		4183	\advance\doignorecount by -1
		4184	\let\next\doignoretext % Look for the next @end.
		4185	\fi
		4186	\next
		4187	}
		4188
		4189	% Finish off ignored text.
		4190	{ \obeylines%
		4191	% Ignore anything after the last `@end #1'; this matters in verbatim
		4192	% environments, where otherwise the newline after an ignored conditional
		4193	% would result in a blank line in the output.
		4194	\gdef\enddoignore#1^^M{\endgroup\ignorespaces}%
		4195	}
		4196
		4197
		4198	% @set VAR sets the variable VAR to an empty value.
		4199	% @set VAR REST-OF-LINE sets VAR to the value REST-OF-LINE.
		4200	%
		4201	% Since we want to separate VAR from REST-OF-LINE (which might be
		4202	% empty), we can't just use \parsearg; we have to insert a space of our
		4203	% own to delimit the rest of the line, and then take it out again if we
		4204	% didn't need it.
		4205	% We rely on the fact that \parsearg sets \catcode`\ =10.
		4206	%
		4207	\parseargdef\set{\setyyy#1 \endsetyyy}
		4208	\def\setyyy#1 #2\endsetyyy{%
		4209	{%
		4210	\makevalueexpandable
		4211	\def\temp{#2}%
		4212	\edef\next{\gdef\makecsname{SET#1}}%
		4213	\ifx\temp\empty
		4214	\next{}%
		4215	\else
		4216	\setzzz#2\endsetzzz
		4217	\fi
		4218	}%
		4219	}
		4220	% Remove the trailing space \setxxx inserted.
		4221	\def\setzzz#1 \endsetzzz{\next{#1}}
		4222
		4223	% @clear VAR clears (i.e., unsets) the variable VAR.
		4224	%
		4225	\parseargdef\clear{%
		4226	{%
		4227	\makevalueexpandable
		4228	\global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname=\relax
		4229	}%
		4230	}
		4231
		4232	% @value{foo} gets the text saved in variable foo.
		4233	\def\value{\begingroup\makevalueexpandable\valuexxx}
		4234	\def\valuexxx#1{\expandablevalue{#1}\endgroup}
		4235	{
		4236	\catcode`\-=\active \catcode`\_=\active
		4237	%
		4238	\gdef\makevalueexpandable{%
		4239	\let\value = \expandablevalue
		4240	% We don't want these characters active, ...
		4241	\catcode`\-=\other \catcode`\_=\other
		4242	% ..., but we might end up with active ones in the argument if
		4243	% we're called from @code, as @code{@value{foo-bar_}}, though.
		4244	% So \let them to their normal equivalents.
		4245	\let-\normaldash \let_\normalunderscore
		4246	}
		4247	}
		4248
		4249	% We have this subroutine so that we can handle at least some @value's
		4250	% properly in indexes (we call \makevalueexpandable in \indexdummies).
		4251	% The command has to be fully expandable (if the variable is set), since
		4252	% the result winds up in the index file. This means that if the
		4253	% variable's value contains other Texinfo commands, it's almost certain
		4254	% it will fail (although perhaps we could fix that with sufficient work
		4255	% to do a one-level expansion on the result, instead of complete).
		4256	%
		4257	% Unfortunately, this has the consequence that when _ is in the *value*
		4258	% of an @set, it does not print properly in the roman fonts (get the cmr
		4259	% dot accent at position 126 instead). No fix comes to mind, and it's
		4260	% been this way since 2003 or earlier, so just ignore it.
		4261	%
		4262	\def\expandablevalue#1{%
		4263	\expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax
		4264	{[No value for ``#1'']}%
		4265	\message{Variable `#1', used in @value, is not set.}%
		4266	\else
		4267	\csname SET#1\endcsname
		4268	\fi
		4269	}
		4270
		4271	% @ifset VAR ... @end ifset reads the `...' iff VAR has been defined
		4272	% with @set.
		4273	%
		4274	% To get the special treatment we need for `@end ifset,' we call
		4275	% \makecond and then redefine.
		4276	%
		4277	\makecond{ifset}
		4278	\def\ifset{\parsearg{\doifset{\let\next=\ifsetfail}}}
		4279	\def\doifset#1#2{%
		4280	{%
		4281	\makevalueexpandable
		4282	\let\next=\empty
		4283	\expandafter\ifx\csname SET#2\endcsname\relax
		4284	#1% If not set, redefine \next.
		4285	\fi
		4286	\expandafter
		4287	}\next
		4288	}
		4289	\def\ifsetfail{\doignore{ifset}}
		4290
		4291	% @ifclear VAR ... @end executes the `...' iff VAR has never been
		4292	% defined with @set, or has been undefined with @clear.
		4293	%
		4294	% The `\else' inside the `\doifset' parameter is a trick to reuse the
		4295	% above code: if the variable is not set, do nothing, if it is set,
		4296	% then redefine \next to \ifclearfail.
		4297	%
		4298	\makecond{ifclear}
		4299	\def\ifclear{\parsearg{\doifset{\else \let\next=\ifclearfail}}}
		4300	\def\ifclearfail{\doignore{ifclear}}
		4301
		4302	% @ifcommandisdefined CMD ... @end executes the `...' if CMD (written
		4303	% without the @) is in fact defined. We can only feasibly check at the
		4304	% TeX level, so something like `mathcode' is going to considered
		4305	% defined even though it is not a Texinfo command.
		4306	%
		4307	\makecond{ifcommanddefined}
		4308	\def\ifcommanddefined{\parsearg{\doifcmddefined{\let\next=\ifcmddefinedfail}}}
		4309	%
		4310	\def\doifcmddefined#1#2{{%
		4311	\makevalueexpandable
		4312	\let\next=\empty
		4313	\expandafter\ifx\csname #2\endcsname\relax
		4314	#1% If not defined, \let\next as above.
		4315	\fi
		4316	\expandafter
		4317	}\next
		4318	}
		4319	\def\ifcmddefinedfail{\doignore{ifcommanddefined}}
		4320
		4321	% @ifcommandnotdefined CMD ... handled similar to @ifclear above.
		4322	\makecond{ifcommandnotdefined}
		4323	\def\ifcommandnotdefined{%
		4324	\parsearg{\doifcmddefined{\else \let\next=\ifcmdnotdefinedfail}}}
		4325	\def\ifcmdnotdefinedfail{\doignore{ifcommandnotdefined}}
		4326
		4327	% Set the `txicommandconditionals' variable, so documents have a way to
		4328	% test if the @ifcommand...defined conditionals are available.
		4329	\set txicommandconditionals
		4330
		4331	% @dircategory CATEGORY -- specify a category of the dir file
		4332	% which this file should belong to. Ignore this in TeX.
		4333	\let\dircategory=\comment
		4334
		4335	% @defininfoenclose.
		4336	\let\definfoenclose=\comment
		4337
		4338
		4339	\message{indexing,}
		4340	% Index generation facilities
		4341
		4342	% Define \newwrite to be identical to plain tex's \newwrite
		4343	% except not \outer, so it can be used within macros and \if's.
		4344	\edef\newwrite{\makecsname{ptexnewwrite}}
		4345
		4346	% \newindex {foo} defines an index named foo.
		4347	% It automatically defines \fooindex such that
		4348	% \fooindex ...rest of line... puts an entry in the index foo.
		4349	% It also defines \fooindfile to be the number of the output channel for
		4350	% the file that accumulates this index. The file's extension is foo.
		4351	% The name of an index should be no more than 2 characters long
		4352	% for the sake of vms.
		4353	%
		4354	\def\newindex#1{%
		4355	\iflinks
		4356	\expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname
		4357	\openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1 % Open the file
		4358	\fi
		4359	\expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% % Define @#1index
		4360	\noexpand\doindex{#1}}
		4361	}
		4362
		4363	% @defindex foo == \newindex{foo}
		4364	%
		4365	\def\defindex{\parsearg\newindex}
		4366
		4367	% Define @defcodeindex, like @defindex except put all entries in @code.
		4368	%
		4369	\def\defcodeindex{\parsearg\newcodeindex}
		4370	%
		4371	\def\newcodeindex#1{%
		4372	\iflinks
		4373	\expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname
		4374	\openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1
		4375	\fi
		4376	\expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{%
		4377	\noexpand\docodeindex{#1}}%
		4378	}
		4379
		4380
		4381	% @synindex foo bar makes index foo feed into index bar.
		4382	% Do this instead of @defindex foo if you don't want it as a separate index.
		4383	%
		4384	% @syncodeindex foo bar similar, but put all entries made for index foo
		4385	% inside @code.
		4386	%
		4387	\def\synindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\doindex{#1}{#2}}
		4388	\def\syncodeindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\docodeindex{#1}{#2}}
		4389
		4390	% #1 is \doindex or \docodeindex, #2 the index getting redefined (foo),
		4391	% #3 the target index (bar).
		4392	\def\dosynindex#1#2#3{%
		4393	% Only do \closeout if we haven't already done it, else we'll end up
		4394	% closing the target index.
		4395	\expandafter \ifx\csname donesynindex#2\endcsname \relax
		4396	% The \closeout helps reduce unnecessary open files; the limit on the
		4397	% Acorn RISC OS is a mere 16 files.
		4398	\expandafter\closeout\csname#2indfile\endcsname
		4399	\expandafter\let\csname donesynindex#2\endcsname = 1
		4400	\fi
		4401	% redefine \fooindfile:
		4402	\expandafter\let\expandafter\temp\expandafter=\csname#3indfile\endcsname
		4403	\expandafter\let\csname#2indfile\endcsname=\temp
		4404	% redefine \fooindex:
		4405	\expandafter\xdef\csname#2index\endcsname{\noexpand#1{#3}}%
		4406	}
		4407
		4408	% Define \doindex, the driver for all \fooindex macros.
		4409	% Argument #1 is generated by the calling \fooindex macro,
		4410	% and it is "foo", the name of the index.
		4411
		4412	% \doindex just uses \parsearg; it calls \doind for the actual work.
		4413	% This is because \doind is more useful to call from other macros.
		4414
		4415	% There is also \dosubind {index}{topic}{subtopic}
		4416	% which makes an entry in a two-level index such as the operation index.
		4417
		4418	\def\doindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singleindexer}
		4419	\def\singleindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{#1}}
		4420
		4421	% like the previous two, but they put @code around the argument.
		4422	\def\docodeindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singlecodeindexer}
		4423	\def\singlecodeindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{\code{#1}}}
		4424
		4425	% Take care of Texinfo commands that can appear in an index entry.
		4426	% Since there are some commands we want to expand, and others we don't,
		4427	% we have to laboriously prevent expansion for those that we don't.
		4428	%
		4429	\def\indexdummies{%
		4430	\escapechar = `\\ % use backslash in output files.
		4431	\def\@{@}% change to @@ when we switch to @ as escape char in index files.
		4432	\def\ {\realbackslash\space }%
		4433	%
		4434	% Need these unexpandable (because we define \tt as a dummy)
		4435	% definitions when @{ or @} appear in index entry text. Also, more
		4436	% complicated, when \tex is in effect and \{ is a \delimiter again.
		4437	% We can't use \lbracecmd and \rbracecmd because texindex assumes
		4438	% braces and backslashes are used only as delimiters. Perhaps we
		4439	% should use @lbracechar and @rbracechar?
		4440	\def\{{{\tt\char123}}%
		4441	\def\}{{\tt\char125}}%
		4442	%
		4443	% I don't entirely understand this, but when an index entry is
		4444	% generated from a macro call, the \endinput which \scanmacro inserts
		4445	% causes processing to be prematurely terminated. This is,
		4446	% apparently, because \indexsorttmp is fully expanded, and \endinput
		4447	% is an expandable command. The redefinition below makes \endinput
		4448	% disappear altogether for that purpose -- although logging shows that
		4449	% processing continues to some further point. On the other hand, it
		4450	% seems \endinput does not hurt in the printed index arg, since that
		4451	% is still getting written without apparent harm.
		4452	%
		4453	% Sample source (mac-idx3.tex, reported by Graham Percival to
		4454	% help-texinfo, 22may06):
		4455	% @macro funindex {WORD}
		4456	% @findex xyz
		4457	% @end macro
		4458	% ...
		4459	% @funindex commtest
		4460	% This is not enough to reproduce the bug, but it gives the flavor.
		4461	%
		4462	% Sample whatsit resulting:
		4463	% .@write3{\entry{xyz}{@folio }{@code {xyz@endinput }}}
		4464	%
		4465	% So:
		4466	\let\endinput = \empty
		4467	%
		4468	% Do the redefinitions.
		4469	\commondummies
		4470	}
		4471
		4472	% For the aux and toc files, @ is the escape character. So we want to
		4473	% redefine everything using @ as the escape character (instead of
		4474	% \realbackslash, still used for index files). When everything uses @,
		4475	% this will be simpler.
		4476	%
		4477	\def\atdummies{%
		4478	\def\@{@@}%
		4479	\def\ {@ }%
		4480	\let\{ = \lbraceatcmd
		4481	\let\} = \rbraceatcmd
		4482	%
		4483	% Do the redefinitions.
		4484	\commondummies
		4485	\otherbackslash
		4486	}
		4487
		4488	% Called from \indexdummies and \atdummies.
		4489	%
		4490	\def\commondummies{%
		4491	%
		4492	% \definedummyword defines \#1 as \string\#1\space, thus effectively
		4493	% preventing its expansion. This is used only for control words,
		4494	% not control letters, because the \space would be incorrect for
		4495	% control characters, but is needed to separate the control word
		4496	% from whatever follows.
		4497	%
		4498	% For control letters, we have \definedummyletter, which omits the
		4499	% space.
		4500	%
		4501	% These can be used both for control words that take an argument and
		4502	% those that do not. If it is followed by {arg} in the input, then
		4503	% that will dutifully get written to the index (or wherever).
		4504	%
		4505	\def\definedummyword ##1{\def##1{\string##1\space}}%
		4506	\def\definedummyletter##1{\def##1{\string##1}}%
		4507	\let\definedummyaccent\definedummyletter
		4508	%
		4509	\commondummiesnofonts
		4510	%
		4511	\definedummyletter\_%
		4512	\definedummyletter\-%
		4513	%
		4514	% Non-English letters.
		4515	\definedummyword\AA
		4516	\definedummyword\AE
		4517	\definedummyword\DH
		4518	\definedummyword\L
		4519	\definedummyword\O
		4520	\definedummyword\OE
		4521	\definedummyword\TH
		4522	\definedummyword\aa
		4523	\definedummyword\ae
		4524	\definedummyword\dh
		4525	\definedummyword\exclamdown
		4526	\definedummyword\l
		4527	\definedummyword\o
		4528	\definedummyword\oe
		4529	\definedummyword\ordf
		4530	\definedummyword\ordm
		4531	\definedummyword\questiondown
		4532	\definedummyword\ss
		4533	\definedummyword\th
		4534	%
		4535	% Although these internal commands shouldn't show up, sometimes they do.
		4536	\definedummyword\bf
		4537	\definedummyword\gtr
		4538	\definedummyword\hat
		4539	\definedummyword\less
		4540	\definedummyword\sf
		4541	\definedummyword\sl
		4542	\definedummyword\tclose
		4543	\definedummyword\tt
		4544	%
		4545	\definedummyword\LaTeX
		4546	\definedummyword\TeX
		4547	%
		4548	% Assorted special characters.
		4549	\definedummyword\arrow
		4550	\definedummyword\bullet
		4551	\definedummyword\comma
		4552	\definedummyword\copyright
		4553	\definedummyword\registeredsymbol
		4554	\definedummyword\dots
		4555	\definedummyword\enddots
		4556	\definedummyword\entrybreak
		4557	\definedummyword\equiv
		4558	\definedummyword\error
		4559	\definedummyword\euro
		4560	\definedummyword\expansion
		4561	\definedummyword\geq
		4562	\definedummyword\guillemetleft
		4563	\definedummyword\guillemetright
		4564	\definedummyword\guilsinglleft
		4565	\definedummyword\guilsinglright
		4566	\definedummyword\lbracechar
		4567	\definedummyword\leq
		4568	\definedummyword\minus
		4569	\definedummyword\ogonek
		4570	\definedummyword\pounds
		4571	\definedummyword\point
		4572	\definedummyword\print
		4573	\definedummyword\quotedblbase
		4574	\definedummyword\quotedblleft
		4575	\definedummyword\quotedblright
		4576	\definedummyword\quoteleft
		4577	\definedummyword\quoteright
		4578	\definedummyword\quotesinglbase
		4579	\definedummyword\rbracechar
		4580	\definedummyword\result
		4581	\definedummyword\textdegree
		4582	%
		4583	% We want to disable all macros so that they are not expanded by \write.
		4584	\macrolist
		4585	%
		4586	\normalturnoffactive
		4587	%
		4588	% Handle some cases of @value -- where it does not contain any
		4589	% (non-fully-expandable) commands.
		4590	\makevalueexpandable
		4591	}
		4592
		4593	% \commondummiesnofonts: common to \commondummies and \indexnofonts.
		4594	%
		4595	\def\commondummiesnofonts{%
		4596	% Control letters and accents.
		4597	\definedummyletter\!%
		4598	\definedummyaccent\"%
		4599	\definedummyaccent\'%
		4600	\definedummyletter\*%
		4601	\definedummyaccent\,%
		4602	\definedummyletter\.%
		4603	\definedummyletter\/%
		4604	\definedummyletter\:%
		4605	\definedummyaccent\=%
		4606	\definedummyletter\?%
		4607	\definedummyaccent\^%
		4608	\definedummyaccent\`%
		4609	\definedummyaccent\~%
		4610	\definedummyword\u
		4611	\definedummyword\v
		4612	\definedummyword\H
		4613	\definedummyword\dotaccent
		4614	\definedummyword\ogonek
		4615	\definedummyword\ringaccent
		4616	\definedummyword\tieaccent
		4617	\definedummyword\ubaraccent
		4618	\definedummyword\udotaccent
		4619	\definedummyword\dotless
		4620	%
		4621	% Texinfo font commands.
		4622	\definedummyword\b
		4623	\definedummyword\i
		4624	\definedummyword\r
		4625	\definedummyword\sansserif
		4626	\definedummyword\sc
		4627	\definedummyword\slanted
		4628	\definedummyword\t
		4629	%
		4630	% Commands that take arguments.
		4631	\definedummyword\abbr
		4632	\definedummyword\acronym
		4633	\definedummyword\anchor
		4634	\definedummyword\cite
		4635	\definedummyword\code
		4636	\definedummyword\command
		4637	\definedummyword\dfn
		4638	\definedummyword\dmn
		4639	\definedummyword\email
		4640	\definedummyword\emph
		4641	\definedummyword\env
		4642	\definedummyword\file
		4643	\definedummyword\image
		4644	\definedummyword\indicateurl
		4645	\definedummyword\inforef
		4646	\definedummyword\kbd
		4647	\definedummyword\key
		4648	\definedummyword\math
		4649	\definedummyword\option
		4650	\definedummyword\pxref
		4651	\definedummyword\ref
		4652	\definedummyword\samp
		4653	\definedummyword\strong
		4654	\definedummyword\tie
		4655	\definedummyword\uref
		4656	\definedummyword\url
		4657	\definedummyword\var
		4658	\definedummyword\verb
		4659	\definedummyword\w
		4660	\definedummyword\xref
		4661	%
		4662	% Consider:
		4663	% @macro mkind{arg1,arg2}
		4664	% @cindex \arg2\
		4665	% @end macro
		4666	% @mkind{foo, bar}
		4667	% The space after the comma will end up in the temporary definition
		4668	% that we make for arg2 (see \parsemargdef ff.). We want all this to be
		4669	% expanded for the sake of the index, so we end up just seeing "bar".
		4670	\let\xeatspaces = \eatspaces
		4671	}
		4672
		4673	% For testing: output @{ and @} in index sort strings as \{ and \}.
		4674	\newif\ifusebracesinindexes
		4675
		4676	% \indexnofonts is used when outputting the strings to sort the index
		4677	% by, and when constructing control sequence names. It eliminates all
		4678	% control sequences and just writes whatever the best ASCII sort string
		4679	% would be for a given command (usually its argument).
		4680	%
		4681	\def\indexnofonts{%
		4682	% Accent commands should become @asis.
		4683	\def\definedummyaccent##1{\let##1\asis}%
		4684	% We can just ignore other control letters.
		4685	\def\definedummyletter##1{\let##1\empty}%
		4686	% All control words become @asis by default; overrides below.
		4687	\let\definedummyword\definedummyaccent
		4688	%
		4689	\commondummiesnofonts
		4690	%
		4691	% Don't no-op \tt, since it isn't a user-level command
		4692	% and is used in the definitions of the active chars like <, >, |, etc.
		4693	% Likewise with the other plain tex font commands.
		4694	%\let\tt=\asis
		4695	%
		4696	\def\ { }%
		4697	\def\@{@}%
		4698	\def\_{\normalunderscore}%
		4699	\def\-{}% @- shouldn't affect sorting
		4700	%
		4701	% Unfortunately, texindex is not prepared to handle braces in the
		4702	% content at all. So for index sorting, we map @{ and @} to strings
		4703	% starting with |, since that ASCII character is between ASCII { and }.
		4704	\ifusebracesinindexes
		4705	\def\lbracechar{\lbracecmd}%
		4706	\def\rbracechar{\rbracecmd}%
		4707	\else
		4708	\def\lbracechar{|a}%
		4709	\def\rbracechar{|b}%
		4710	\fi
		4711	\let\{=\lbracechar
		4712	\let\}=\rbracechar
		4713	%
		4714	%
		4715	% Non-English letters.
		4716	\def\AA{AA}%
		4717	\def\AE{AE}%
		4718	\def\DH{DZZ}%
		4719	\def\L{L}%
		4720	\def\OE{OE}%
		4721	\def\O{O}%
		4722	\def\TH{ZZZ}%
		4723	\def\aa{aa}%
		4724	\def\ae{ae}%
		4725	\def\dh{dzz}%
		4726	\def\exclamdown{!}%
		4727	\def\l{l}%
		4728	\def\oe{oe}%
		4729	\def\ordf{a}%
		4730	\def\ordm{o}%
		4731	\def\o{o}%
		4732	\def\questiondown{?}%
		4733	\def\ss{ss}%
		4734	\def\th{zzz}%
		4735	%
		4736	\def\LaTeX{LaTeX}%
		4737	\def\TeX{TeX}%
		4738	%
		4739	% Assorted special characters.
		4740	% (The following {} will end up in the sort string, but that's ok.)
		4741	\def\arrow{->}%
		4742	\def\bullet{bullet}%
		4743	\def\comma{,}%
		4744	\def\copyright{copyright}%
		4745	\def\dots{...}%
		4746	\def\enddots{...}%
		4747	\def\equiv{==}%
		4748	\def\error{error}%
		4749	\def\euro{euro}%
		4750	\def\expansion{==>}%
		4751	\def\geq{>=}%
		4752	\def\guillemetleft{<<}%
		4753	\def\guillemetright{>>}%
		4754	\def\guilsinglleft{<}%
		4755	\def\guilsinglright{>}%
		4756	\def\leq{<=}%
		4757	\def\minus{-}%
		4758	\def\point{.}%
		4759	\def\pounds{pounds}%
		4760	\def\print{-|}%
		4761	\def\quotedblbase{"}%
		4762	\def\quotedblleft{"}%
		4763	\def\quotedblright{"}%
		4764	\def\quoteleft{`}%
		4765	\def\quoteright{'}%
		4766	\def\quotesinglbase{,}%
		4767	\def\registeredsymbol{R}%
		4768	\def\result{=>}%
		4769	\def\textdegree{o}%
		4770	%
		4771	\expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxiindexlquoteignore\endcsname\relax
		4772	\else \indexlquoteignore \fi
		4773	%
		4774	% We need to get rid of all macros, leaving only the arguments (if present).
		4775	% Of course this is not nearly correct, but it is the best we can do for now.
		4776	% makeinfo does not expand macros in the argument to @deffn, which ends up
		4777	% writing an index entry, and texindex isn't prepared for an index sort entry
		4778	% that starts with \.
		4779	%
		4780	% Since macro invocations are followed by braces, we can just redefine them
		4781	% to take a single TeX argument. The case of a macro invocation that
		4782	% goes to end-of-line is not handled.
		4783	%
		4784	\macrolist
		4785	}
		4786
		4787	% Undocumented (for FSFS 2nd ed.): @set txiindexlquoteignore makes us
		4788	% ignore left quotes in the sort term.
		4789	{\catcode`\`=\active
		4790	\gdef\indexlquoteignore{\let`=\empty}}
		4791
		4792	\let\indexbackslash=0 %overridden during \printindex.
		4793	\let\SETmarginindex=\relax % put index entries in margin (undocumented)?
		4794
		4795	% Most index entries go through here, but \dosubind is the general case.
		4796	% #1 is the index name, #2 is the entry text.
		4797	\def\doind#1#2{\dosubind{#1}{#2}{}}
		4798
		4799	% Workhorse for all \fooindexes.
		4800	% #1 is name of index, #2 is stuff to put there, #3 is subentry --
		4801	% empty if called from \doind, as we usually are (the main exception
		4802	% is with most defuns, which call us directly).
		4803	%
		4804	\def\dosubind#1#2#3{%
		4805	\iflinks
		4806	{%
		4807	% Store the main index entry text (including the third arg).
		4808	\toks0 = {#2}%
		4809	% If third arg is present, precede it with a space.
		4810	\def\thirdarg{#3}%
		4811	\ifx\thirdarg\empty \else
		4812	\toks0 = \expandafter{\the\toks0 \space #3}%
		4813	\fi
		4814	%
		4815	\edef\writeto{\csname#1indfile\endcsname}%
		4816	%
		4817	\safewhatsit\dosubindwrite
		4818	}%
		4819	\fi
		4820	}
		4821
		4822	% Write the entry in \toks0 to the index file:
		4823	%
		4824	\def\dosubindwrite{%
		4825	% Put the index entry in the margin if desired.
		4826	\ifx\SETmarginindex\relax\else
		4827	\insert\margin{\hbox{\vrule height8pt depth3pt width0pt \the\toks0}}%
		4828	\fi
		4829	%
		4830	% Remember, we are within a group.
		4831	\indexdummies % Must do this here, since \bf, etc expand at this stage
		4832	\def\backslashcurfont{\indexbackslash}% \indexbackslash isn't defined now
		4833	% so it will be output as is; and it will print as backslash.
		4834	%
		4835	% Process the index entry with all font commands turned off, to
		4836	% get the string to sort by.
		4837	{\indexnofonts
		4838	\edef\temp{\the\toks0}% need full expansion
		4839	\xdef\indexsorttmp{\temp}%
		4840	}%
		4841	%
		4842	% Set up the complete index entry, with both the sort key and
		4843	% the original text, including any font commands. We write
		4844	% three arguments to \entry to the .?? file (four in the
		4845	% subentry case), texindex reduces to two when writing the .??s
		4846	% sorted result.
		4847	\edef\temp{%
		4848	\write\writeto{%
		4849	\string\entry{\indexsorttmp}{\noexpand\folio}{\the\toks0}}%
		4850	}%
		4851	\temp
		4852	}
		4853
		4854	% Take care of unwanted page breaks/skips around a whatsit:
		4855	%
		4856	% If a skip is the last thing on the list now, preserve it
		4857	% by backing up by \lastskip, doing the \write, then inserting
		4858	% the skip again. Otherwise, the whatsit generated by the
		4859	% \write or \pdfdest will make \lastskip zero. The result is that
		4860	% sequences like this:
		4861	% @end defun
		4862	% @tindex whatever
		4863	% @defun ...
		4864	% will have extra space inserted, because the \medbreak in the
		4865	% start of the @defun won't see the skip inserted by the @end of
		4866	% the previous defun.
		4867	%
		4868	% But don't do any of this if we're not in vertical mode. We
		4869	% don't want to do a \vskip and prematurely end a paragraph.
		4870	%
		4871	% Avoid page breaks due to these extra skips, too.
		4872	%
		4873	% But wait, there is a catch there:
		4874	% We'll have to check whether \lastskip is zero skip. \ifdim is not
		4875	% sufficient for this purpose, as it ignores stretch and shrink parts
		4876	% of the skip. The only way seems to be to check the textual
		4877	% representation of the skip.
		4878	%
		4879	% The following is almost like \def\zeroskipmacro{0.0pt} except that
		4880	% the ``p'' and ``t'' characters have catcode \other, not 11 (letter).
		4881	%
		4882	\edef\zeroskipmacro{\expandafter\the\csname z@skip\endcsname}
		4883	%
		4884	\newskip\whatsitskip
		4885	\newcount\whatsitpenalty
		4886	%
		4887	% ..., ready, GO:
		4888	%
		4889	\def\safewhatsit#1{\ifhmode
		4890	#1%
		4891	\else
		4892	% \lastskip and \lastpenalty cannot both be nonzero simultaneously.
		4893	\whatsitskip = \lastskip
		4894	\edef\lastskipmacro{\the\lastskip}%
		4895	\whatsitpenalty = \lastpenalty
		4896	%
		4897	% If \lastskip is nonzero, that means the last item was a
		4898	% skip. And since a skip is discardable, that means this
		4899	% -\whatsitskip glue we're inserting is preceded by a
		4900	% non-discardable item, therefore it is not a potential
		4901	% breakpoint, therefore no \nobreak needed.
		4902	\ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro
		4903	\else
		4904	\vskip-\whatsitskip
		4905	\fi
		4906	%
		4907	#1%
		4908	%
		4909	\ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro
		4910	% If \lastskip was zero, perhaps the last item was a penalty, and
		4911	% perhaps it was >=10000, e.g., a \nobreak. In that case, we want
		4912	% to re-insert the same penalty (values >10000 are used for various
		4913	% signals); since we just inserted a non-discardable item, any
		4914	% following glue (such as a \parskip) would be a breakpoint. For example:
		4915	% @deffn deffn-whatever
		4916	% @vindex index-whatever
		4917	% Description.
		4918	% would allow a break between the index-whatever whatsit
		4919	% and the "Description." paragraph.
		4920	\ifnum\whatsitpenalty>9999 \penalty\whatsitpenalty \fi
		4921	\else
		4922	% On the other hand, if we had a nonzero \lastskip,
		4923	% this make-up glue would be preceded by a non-discardable item
		4924	% (the whatsit from the \write), so we must insert a \nobreak.
		4925	\nobreak\vskip\whatsitskip
		4926	\fi
		4927	\fi}
		4928
		4929	% The index entry written in the file actually looks like
		4930	% \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}
		4931	% or
		4932	% \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}{subtopic}
		4933	% The texindex program reads in these files and writes files
		4934	% containing these kinds of lines:
		4935	% \initial {c}
		4936	% before the first topic whose initial is c
		4937	% \entry {topic}{pagelist}
		4938	% for a topic that is used without subtopics
		4939	% \primary {topic}
		4940	% for the beginning of a topic that is used with subtopics
		4941	% \secondary {subtopic}{pagelist}
		4942	% for each subtopic.
		4943
		4944	% Define the user-accessible indexing commands
		4945	% @findex, @vindex, @kindex, @cindex.
		4946
		4947	\def\findex {\fnindex}
		4948	\def\kindex {\kyindex}
		4949	\def\cindex {\cpindex}
		4950	\def\vindex {\vrindex}
		4951	\def\tindex {\tpindex}
		4952	\def\pindex {\pgindex}
		4953
		4954	\def\cindexsub {\begingroup\obeylines\cindexsub}
		4955	{\obeylines %
		4956	\gdef\cindexsub "#1" #2^^M{\endgroup %
		4957	\dosubind{cp}{#2}{#1}}}
		4958
		4959	% Define the macros used in formatting output of the sorted index material.
		4960
		4961	% @printindex causes a particular index (the ??s file) to get printed.
		4962	% It does not print any chapter heading (usually an @unnumbered).
		4963	%
		4964	\parseargdef\printindex{\begingroup
		4965	\dobreak \chapheadingskip{10000}%
		4966	%
		4967	\smallfonts \rm
		4968	\tolerance = 9500
		4969	\plainfrenchspacing
		4970	\everypar = {}% don't want the \kern\-parindent from indentation suppression.
		4971	%
		4972	% See if the index file exists and is nonempty.
		4973	% Change catcode of @ here so that if the index file contains
		4974	% \initial {@}
		4975	% as its first line, TeX doesn't complain about mismatched braces
		4976	% (because it thinks @} is a control sequence).
		4977	\catcode`\@ = 11
		4978	\openin 1 \jobname.#1s
		4979	\ifeof 1
		4980	% \enddoublecolumns gets confused if there is no text in the index,
		4981	% and it loses the chapter title and the aux file entries for the
		4982	% index. The easiest way to prevent this problem is to make sure
		4983	% there is some text.
		4984	\putwordIndexNonexistent
		4985	\else
		4986	%
		4987	% If the index file exists but is empty, then \openin leaves \ifeof
		4988	% false. We have to make TeX try to read something from the file, so
		4989	% it can discover if there is anything in it.
		4990	\read 1 to \temp
		4991	\ifeof 1
		4992	\putwordIndexIsEmpty
		4993	\else
		4994	% Index files are almost Texinfo source, but we use \ as the escape
		4995	% character. It would be better to use @, but that's too big a change
		4996	% to make right now.
		4997	\def\indexbackslash{\backslashcurfont}%
		4998	\catcode`\\ = 0
		4999	\escapechar = `\\
		5000	\begindoublecolumns
		5001	\input \jobname.#1s
		5002	\enddoublecolumns
		5003	\fi
		5004	\fi
		5005	\closein 1
		5006	\endgroup}
		5007
		5008	% These macros are used by the sorted index file itself.
		5009	% Change them to control the appearance of the index.
		5010
		5011	\def\initial#1{{%
		5012	% Some minor font changes for the special characters.
		5013	\let\tentt=\sectt \let\tt=\sectt \let\sf=\sectt
		5014	%
		5015	% Remove any glue we may have, we'll be inserting our own.
		5016	\removelastskip
		5017	%
		5018	% We like breaks before the index initials, so insert a bonus.
		5019	\nobreak
		5020	\vskip 0pt plus 3\baselineskip
		5021	\penalty 0
		5022	\vskip 0pt plus -3\baselineskip
		5023	%
		5024	% Typeset the initial. Making this add up to a whole number of
		5025	% baselineskips increases the chance of the dots lining up from column
		5026	% to column. It still won't often be perfect, because of the stretch
		5027	% we need before each entry, but it's better.
		5028	%
		5029	% No shrink because it confuses \balancecolumns.
		5030	\vskip 1.67\baselineskip plus .5\baselineskip
		5031	\leftline{\secbf #1}%
		5032	% Do our best not to break after the initial.
		5033	\nobreak
		5034	\vskip .33\baselineskip plus .1\baselineskip
		5035	}}
		5036
		5037	% \entry typesets a paragraph consisting of the text (#1), dot leaders, and
		5038	% then page number (#2) flushed to the right margin. It is used for index
		5039	% and table of contents entries. The paragraph is indented by \leftskip.
		5040	%
		5041	% A straightforward implementation would start like this:
		5042	% \def\entry#1#2{...
		5043	% But this freezes the catcodes in the argument, and can cause problems to
		5044	% @code, which sets - active. This problem was fixed by a kludge---
		5045	% ``-'' was active throughout whole index, but this isn't really right.
		5046	% The right solution is to prevent \entry from swallowing the whole text.
		5047	% --kasal, 21nov03
		5048	\def\entry{%
		5049	\begingroup
		5050	%
		5051	% Start a new paragraph if necessary, so our assignments below can't
		5052	% affect previous text.
		5053	\par
		5054	%
		5055	% Do not fill out the last line with white space.
		5056	\parfillskip = 0in
		5057	%
		5058	% No extra space above this paragraph.
		5059	\parskip = 0in
		5060	%
		5061	% Do not prefer a separate line ending with a hyphen to fewer lines.
		5062	\finalhyphendemerits = 0
		5063	%
		5064	% \hangindent is only relevant when the entry text and page number
		5065	% don't both fit on one line. In that case, bob suggests starting the
		5066	% dots pretty far over on the line. Unfortunately, a large
		5067	% indentation looks wrong when the entry text itself is broken across
		5068	% lines. So we use a small indentation and put up with long leaders.
		5069	%
		5070	% \hangafter is reset to 1 (which is the value we want) at the start
		5071	% of each paragraph, so we need not do anything with that.
		5072	\hangindent = 2em
		5073	%
		5074	% When the entry text needs to be broken, just fill out the first line
		5075	% with blank space.
		5076	\rightskip = 0pt plus1fil
		5077	%
		5078	% A bit of stretch before each entry for the benefit of balancing
		5079	% columns.
		5080	\vskip 0pt plus1pt
		5081	%
		5082	% When reading the text of entry, convert explicit line breaks
		5083	% from @* into spaces. The user might give these in long section
		5084	% titles, for instance.
		5085	\def\*{\unskip\space\ignorespaces}%
		5086	\def\entrybreak{\hfil\break}%
		5087	%
		5088	% Swallow the left brace of the text (first parameter):
		5089	\afterassignment\doentry
		5090	\let\temp =
		5091	}
		5092	\def\entrybreak{\unskip\space\ignorespaces}%
		5093	\def\doentry{%
		5094	\bgroup % Instead of the swallowed brace.
		5095	\noindent
		5096	\aftergroup\finishentry
		5097	% And now comes the text of the entry.
		5098	}
		5099	\def\finishentry#1{%
		5100	% #1 is the page number.
		5101	%
		5102	% The following is kludged to not output a line of dots in the index if
		5103	% there are no page numbers. The next person who breaks this will be
		5104	% cursed by a Unix daemon.
		5105	\setbox\boxA = \hbox{#1}%
		5106	\ifdim\wd\boxA = 0pt
		5107	\ %
		5108	\else
		5109	%
		5110	% If we must, put the page number on a line of its own, and fill out
		5111	% this line with blank space. (The \hfil is overwhelmed with the
		5112	% fill leaders glue in \indexdotfill if the page number does fit.)
		5113	\hfil\penalty50
		5114	\null\nobreak\indexdotfill % Have leaders before the page number.
		5115	%
		5116	% The `\ ' here is removed by the implicit \unskip that TeX does as
		5117	% part of (the primitive) \par. Without it, a spurious underfull
		5118	% \hbox ensues.
		5119	\ifpdf
		5120	\pdfgettoks#1.%
		5121	\ \the\toksA
		5122	\else
		5123	\ #1%
		5124	\fi
		5125	\fi
		5126	\par
		5127	\endgroup
		5128	}
		5129
		5130	% Like plain.tex's \dotfill, except uses up at least 1 em.
		5131	\def\indexdotfill{\cleaders
		5132	\hbox{$\mathsurround=0pt \mkern1.5mu.\mkern1.5mu$}\hskip 1em plus 1fill}
		5133
		5134	\def\primary #1{\line{#1\hfil}}
		5135
		5136	\newskip\secondaryindent \secondaryindent=0.5cm
		5137	\def\secondary#1#2{{%
		5138	\parfillskip=0in
		5139	\parskip=0in
		5140	\hangindent=1in
		5141	\hangafter=1
		5142	\noindent\hskip\secondaryindent\hbox{#1}\indexdotfill
		5143	\ifpdf
		5144	\pdfgettoks#2.\ \the\toksA % The page number ends the paragraph.
		5145	\else
		5146	#2
		5147	\fi
		5148	\par
		5149	}}
		5150
		5151	% Define two-column mode, which we use to typeset indexes.
		5152	% Adapted from the TeXbook, page 416, which is to say,
		5153	% the manmac.tex format used to print the TeXbook itself.
		5154	\catcode`\@=11
		5155
		5156	\newbox\partialpage
		5157	\newdimen\doublecolumnhsize
		5158
		5159	\def\begindoublecolumns{\begingroup % ended by \enddoublecolumns
		5160	% Grab any single-column material above us.
		5161	\output = {%
		5162	%
		5163	% Here is a possibility not foreseen in manmac: if we accumulate a
		5164	% whole lot of material, we might end up calling this \output
		5165	% routine twice in a row (see the doublecol-lose test, which is
		5166	% essentially a couple of indexes with @setchapternewpage off). In
		5167	% that case we just ship out what is in \partialpage with the normal
		5168	% output routine. Generally, \partialpage will be empty when this
		5169	% runs and this will be a no-op. See the indexspread.tex test case.
		5170	\ifvoid\partialpage \else
		5171	\onepageout{\pagecontents\partialpage}%
		5172	\fi
		5173	%
		5174	\global\setbox\partialpage = \vbox{%
		5175	% Unvbox the main output page.
		5176	\unvbox\PAGE
		5177	\kern-\topskip \kern\baselineskip
		5178	}%
		5179	}%
		5180	\eject % run that output routine to set \partialpage
		5181	%
		5182	% Use the double-column output routine for subsequent pages.
		5183	\output = {\doublecolumnout}%
		5184	%
		5185	% Change the page size parameters. We could do this once outside this
		5186	% routine, in each of @smallbook, @afourpaper, and the default 8.5x11
		5187	% format, but then we repeat the same computation. Repeating a couple
		5188	% of assignments once per index is clearly meaningless for the
		5189	% execution time, so we may as well do it in one place.
		5190	%
		5191	% First we halve the line length, less a little for the gutter between
		5192	% the columns. We compute the gutter based on the line length, so it
		5193	% changes automatically with the paper format. The magic constant
		5194	% below is chosen so that the gutter has the same value (well, +-<1pt)
		5195	% as it did when we hard-coded it.
		5196	%
		5197	% We put the result in a separate register, \doublecolumhsize, so we
		5198	% can restore it in \pagesofar, after \hsize itself has (potentially)
		5199	% been clobbered.
		5200	%
		5201	\doublecolumnhsize = \hsize
		5202	\advance\doublecolumnhsize by -.04154\hsize
		5203	\divide\doublecolumnhsize by 2
		5204	\hsize = \doublecolumnhsize
		5205	%
		5206	% Double the \vsize as well. (We don't need a separate register here,
		5207	% since nobody clobbers \vsize.)
		5208	\vsize = 2\vsize
		5209	}
		5210
		5211	% The double-column output routine for all double-column pages except
		5212	% the last.
		5213	%
		5214	\def\doublecolumnout{%
		5215	\splittopskip=\topskip \splitmaxdepth=\maxdepth
		5216	% Get the available space for the double columns -- the normal
		5217	% (undoubled) page height minus any material left over from the
		5218	% previous page.
		5219	\dimen@ = \vsize
		5220	\divide\dimen@ by 2
		5221	\advance\dimen@ by -\ht\partialpage
		5222	%
		5223	% box0 will be the left-hand column, box2 the right.
		5224	\setbox0=\vsplit255 to\dimen@ \setbox2=\vsplit255 to\dimen@
		5225	\onepageout\pagesofar
		5226	\unvbox255
		5227	\penalty\outputpenalty
		5228	}
		5229	%
		5230	% Re-output the contents of the output page -- any previous material,
		5231	% followed by the two boxes we just split, in box0 and box2.
		5232	\def\pagesofar{%
		5233	\unvbox\partialpage
		5234	%
		5235	\hsize = \doublecolumnhsize
		5236	\wd0=\hsize \wd2=\hsize
		5237	\hbox to\pagewidth{\box0\hfil\box2}%
		5238	}
		5239	%
		5240	% All done with double columns.
		5241	\def\enddoublecolumns{%
		5242	% The following penalty ensures that the page builder is exercised
		5243	% _before_ we change the output routine. This is necessary in the
		5244	% following situation:
		5245	%
		5246	% The last section of the index consists only of a single entry.
		5247	% Before this section, \pagetotal is less than \pagegoal, so no
		5248	% break occurs before the last section starts. However, the last
		5249	% section, consisting of \initial and the single \entry, does not
		5250	% fit on the page and has to be broken off. Without the following
		5251	% penalty the page builder will not be exercised until \eject
		5252	% below, and by that time we'll already have changed the output
		5253	% routine to the \balancecolumns version, so the next-to-last
		5254	% double-column page will be processed with \balancecolumns, which
		5255	% is wrong: The two columns will go to the main vertical list, with
		5256	% the broken-off section in the recent contributions. As soon as
		5257	% the output routine finishes, TeX starts reconsidering the page
		5258	% break. The two columns and the broken-off section both fit on the
		5259	% page, because the two columns now take up only half of the page
		5260	% goal. When TeX sees \eject from below which follows the final
		5261	% section, it invokes the new output routine that we've set after
		5262	% \balancecolumns below; \onepageout will try to fit the two columns
		5263	% and the final section into the vbox of \pageheight (see
		5264	% \pagebody), causing an overfull box.
		5265	%
		5266	% Note that glue won't work here, because glue does not exercise the
		5267	% page builder, unlike penalties (see The TeXbook, pp. 280-281).
		5268	\penalty0
		5269	%
		5270	\output = {%
		5271	% Split the last of the double-column material. Leave it on the
		5272	% current page, no automatic page break.
		5273	\balancecolumns
		5274	%
		5275	% If we end up splitting too much material for the current page,
		5276	% though, there will be another page break right after this \output
		5277	% invocation ends. Having called \balancecolumns once, we do not
		5278	% want to call it again. Therefore, reset \output to its normal
		5279	% definition right away. (We hope \balancecolumns will never be
		5280	% called on to balance too much material, but if it is, this makes
		5281	% the output somewhat more palatable.)
		5282	\global\output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}%
		5283	}%
		5284	\eject
		5285	\endgroup % started in \begindoublecolumns
		5286	%
		5287	% \pagegoal was set to the doubled \vsize above, since we restarted
		5288	% the current page. We're now back to normal single-column
		5289	% typesetting, so reset \pagegoal to the normal \vsize (after the
		5290	% \endgroup where \vsize got restored).
		5291	\pagegoal = \vsize
		5292	}
		5293	%
		5294	% Called at the end of the double column material.
		5295	\def\balancecolumns{%
		5296	\setbox0 = \vbox{\unvbox255}% like \box255 but more efficient, see p.120.
		5297	\dimen@ = \ht0
		5298	\advance\dimen@ by \topskip
		5299	\advance\dimen@ by-\baselineskip
		5300	\divide\dimen@ by 2 % target to split to
		5301	%debug\message{final 2-column material height=\the\ht0, target=\the\dimen@.}%
		5302	\splittopskip = \topskip
		5303	% Loop until we get a decent breakpoint.
		5304	{%
		5305	\vbadness = 10000
		5306	\loop
		5307	\global\setbox3 = \copy0
		5308	\global\setbox1 = \vsplit3 to \dimen@
		5309	\ifdim\ht3>\dimen@
		5310	\global\advance\dimen@ by 1pt
		5311	\repeat
		5312	}%
		5313	%debug\message{split to \the\dimen@, column heights: \the\ht1, \the\ht3.}%
		5314	\setbox0=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox1}%
		5315	\setbox2=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox3}%
		5316	%
		5317	\pagesofar
		5318	}
		5319	\catcode`\@ = \other
		5320
		5321
		5322	\message{sectioning,}
		5323	% Chapters, sections, etc.
		5324
		5325	% Let's start with @part.
		5326	\outer\parseargdef\part{\partzzz{#1}}
		5327	\def\partzzz#1{%
		5328	\chapoddpage
		5329	\null
		5330	\vskip.3\vsize % move it down on the page a bit
		5331	\begingroup
		5332	\noindent \titlefonts\rmisbold #1\par % the text
		5333	\let\lastnode=\empty % no node to associate with
		5334	\writetocentry{part}{#1}{}% but put it in the toc
		5335	\headingsoff % no headline or footline on the part page
		5336	\chapoddpage
		5337	\endgroup
		5338	}
		5339
		5340	% \unnumberedno is an oxymoron. But we count the unnumbered
		5341	% sections so that we can refer to them unambiguously in the pdf
		5342	% outlines by their "section number". We avoid collisions with chapter
		5343	% numbers by starting them at 10000. (If a document ever has 10000
		5344	% chapters, we're in trouble anyway, I'm sure.)
		5345	\newcount\unnumberedno \unnumberedno = 10000
		5346	\newcount\chapno
		5347	\newcount\secno \secno=0
		5348	\newcount\subsecno \subsecno=0
		5349	\newcount\subsubsecno \subsubsecno=0
		5350
		5351	% This counter is funny since it counts through charcodes of letters A, B, ...
		5352	\newcount\appendixno \appendixno = `\@
		5353	%
		5354	% \def\appendixletter{\char\the\appendixno}
		5355	% We do the following ugly conditional instead of the above simple
		5356	% construct for the sake of pdftex, which needs the actual
		5357	% letter in the expansion, not just typeset.
		5358	%
		5359	\def\appendixletter{%
		5360	\ifnum\appendixno=`A A%
		5361	\else\ifnum\appendixno=`B B%
		5362	\else\ifnum\appendixno=`C C%
		5363	\else\ifnum\appendixno=`D D%
		5364	\else\ifnum\appendixno=`E E%
		5365	\else\ifnum\appendixno=`F F%
		5366	\else\ifnum\appendixno=`G G%
		5367	\else\ifnum\appendixno=`H H%
		5368	\else\ifnum\appendixno=`I I%
		5369	\else\ifnum\appendixno=`J J%
		5370	\else\ifnum\appendixno=`K K%
		5371	\else\ifnum\appendixno=`L L%
		5372	\else\ifnum\appendixno=`M M%
		5373	\else\ifnum\appendixno=`N N%
		5374	\else\ifnum\appendixno=`O O%
		5375	\else\ifnum\appendixno=`P P%
		5376	\else\ifnum\appendixno=`Q Q%
		5377	\else\ifnum\appendixno=`R R%
		5378	\else\ifnum\appendixno=`S S%
		5379	\else\ifnum\appendixno=`T T%
		5380	\else\ifnum\appendixno=`U U%
		5381	\else\ifnum\appendixno=`V V%
		5382	\else\ifnum\appendixno=`W W%
		5383	\else\ifnum\appendixno=`X X%
		5384	\else\ifnum\appendixno=`Y Y%
		5385	\else\ifnum\appendixno=`Z Z%
		5386	% The \the is necessary, despite appearances, because \appendixletter is
		5387	% expanded while writing the .toc file. \char\appendixno is not
		5388	% expandable, thus it is written literally, thus all appendixes come out
		5389	% with the same letter (or @) in the toc without it.
		5390	\else\char\the\appendixno
		5391	\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
		5392	\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi}
		5393
		5394	% Each @chapter defines these (using marks) as the number+name, number
		5395	% and name of the chapter. Page headings and footings can use
		5396	% these. @section does likewise.
		5397	\def\thischapter{}
		5398	\def\thischapternum{}
		5399	\def\thischaptername{}
		5400	\def\thissection{}
		5401	\def\thissectionnum{}
		5402	\def\thissectionname{}
		5403
		5404	\newcount\absseclevel % used to calculate proper heading level
		5405	\newcount\secbase\secbase=0 % @raisesections/@lowersections modify this count
		5406
		5407	% @raisesections: treat @section as chapter, @subsection as section, etc.
		5408	\def\raisesections{\global\advance\secbase by -1}
		5409	\let\up=\raisesections % original BFox name
		5410
		5411	% @lowersections: treat @chapter as section, @section as subsection, etc.
		5412	\def\lowersections{\global\advance\secbase by 1}
		5413	\let\down=\lowersections % original BFox name
		5414
		5415	% we only have subsub.
		5416	\chardef\maxseclevel = 3
		5417	%
		5418	% A numbered section within an unnumbered changes to unnumbered too.
		5419	% To achieve this, remember the "biggest" unnum. sec. we are currently in:
		5420	\chardef\unnlevel = \maxseclevel
		5421	%
		5422	% Trace whether the current chapter is an appendix or not:
		5423	% \chapheadtype is "N" or "A", unnumbered chapters are ignored.
		5424	\def\chapheadtype{N}
		5425
		5426	% Choose a heading macro
		5427	% #1 is heading type
		5428	% #2 is heading level
		5429	% #3 is text for heading
		5430	\def\genhead#1#2#3{%
		5431	% Compute the abs. sec. level:
		5432	\absseclevel=#2
		5433	\advance\absseclevel by \secbase
		5434	% Make sure \absseclevel doesn't fall outside the range:
		5435	\ifnum \absseclevel < 0
		5436	\absseclevel = 0
		5437	\else
		5438	\ifnum \absseclevel > 3
		5439	\absseclevel = 3
		5440	\fi
		5441	\fi
		5442	% The heading type:
		5443	\def\headtype{#1}%
		5444	\if \headtype U%
		5445	\ifnum \absseclevel < \unnlevel
		5446	\chardef\unnlevel = \absseclevel
		5447	\fi
		5448	\else
		5449	% Check for appendix sections:
		5450	\ifnum \absseclevel = 0
		5451	\edef\chapheadtype{\headtype}%
		5452	\else
		5453	\if \headtype A\if \chapheadtype N%
		5454	\errmessage{@appendix... within a non-appendix chapter}%
		5455	\fi\fi
		5456	\fi
		5457	% Check for numbered within unnumbered:
		5458	\ifnum \absseclevel > \unnlevel
		5459	\def\headtype{U}%
		5460	\else
		5461	\chardef\unnlevel = 3
		5462	\fi
		5463	\fi
		5464	% Now print the heading:
		5465	\if \headtype U%
		5466	\ifcase\absseclevel
		5467	\unnumberedzzz{#3}%
		5468	\or \unnumberedseczzz{#3}%
		5469	\or \unnumberedsubseczzz{#3}%
		5470	\or \unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#3}%
		5471	\fi
		5472	\else
		5473	\if \headtype A%
		5474	\ifcase\absseclevel
		5475	\appendixzzz{#3}%
		5476	\or \appendixsectionzzz{#3}%
		5477	\or \appendixsubseczzz{#3}%
		5478	\or \appendixsubsubseczzz{#3}%
		5479	\fi
		5480	\else
		5481	\ifcase\absseclevel
		5482	\chapterzzz{#3}%
		5483	\or \seczzz{#3}%
		5484	\or \numberedsubseczzz{#3}%
		5485	\or \numberedsubsubseczzz{#3}%
		5486	\fi
		5487	\fi
		5488	\fi
		5489	\suppressfirstparagraphindent
		5490	}
		5491
		5492	% an interface:
		5493	\def\numhead{\genhead N}
		5494	\def\apphead{\genhead A}
		5495	\def\unnmhead{\genhead U}
		5496
		5497	% @chapter, @appendix, @unnumbered. Increment top-level counter, reset
		5498	% all lower-level sectioning counters to zero.
		5499	%
		5500	% Also set \chaplevelprefix, which we prepend to @float sequence numbers
		5501	% (e.g., figures), q.v. By default (before any chapter), that is empty.
		5502	\let\chaplevelprefix = \empty
		5503	%
		5504	\outer\parseargdef\chapter{\numhead0{#1}} % normally numhead0 calls chapterzzz
		5505	\def\chapterzzz#1{%
		5506	% section resetting is \global in case the chapter is in a group, such
		5507	% as an @include file.
		5508	\global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0
		5509	\global\advance\chapno by 1
		5510	%
		5511	% Used for \float.
		5512	\gdef\chaplevelprefix{\the\chapno.}%
		5513	\resetallfloatnos
		5514	%
		5515	% \putwordChapter can contain complex things in translations.
		5516	\toks0=\expandafter{\putwordChapter}%
		5517	\message{\the\toks0 \space \the\chapno}%
		5518	%
		5519	% Write the actual heading.
		5520	\chapmacro{#1}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno}%
		5521	%
		5522	% So @section and the like are numbered underneath this chapter.
		5523	\global\let\section = \numberedsec
		5524	\global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec
		5525	\global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec
		5526	}
		5527
		5528	\outer\parseargdef\appendix{\apphead0{#1}} % normally calls appendixzzz
		5529	%
		5530	\def\appendixzzz#1{%
		5531	\global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0
		5532	\global\advance\appendixno by 1
		5533	\gdef\chaplevelprefix{\appendixletter.}%
		5534	\resetallfloatnos
		5535	%
		5536	% \putwordAppendix can contain complex things in translations.
		5537	\toks0=\expandafter{\putwordAppendix}%
		5538	\message{\the\toks0 \space \appendixletter}%
		5539	%
		5540	\chapmacro{#1}{Yappendix}{\appendixletter}%
		5541	%
		5542	\global\let\section = \appendixsec
		5543	\global\let\subsection = \appendixsubsec
		5544	\global\let\subsubsection = \appendixsubsubsec
		5545	}
		5546
		5547	% normally unnmhead0 calls unnumberedzzz:
		5548	\outer\parseargdef\unnumbered{\unnmhead0{#1}}
		5549	\def\unnumberedzzz#1{%
		5550	\global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0
		5551	\global\advance\unnumberedno by 1
		5552	%
		5553	% Since an unnumbered has no number, no prefix for figures.
		5554	\global\let\chaplevelprefix = \empty
		5555	\resetallfloatnos
		5556	%
		5557	% This used to be simply \message{#1}, but TeX fully expands the
		5558	% argument to \message. Therefore, if #1 contained @-commands, TeX
		5559	% expanded them. For example, in `@unnumbered The @cite{Book}', TeX
		5560	% expanded @cite (which turns out to cause errors because \cite is meant
		5561	% to be executed, not expanded).
		5562	%
		5563	% Anyway, we don't want the fully-expanded definition of @cite to appear
		5564	% as a result of the \message, we just want `@cite' itself. We use
		5565	% \the<toks register> to achieve this: TeX expands \the<toks> only once,
		5566	% simply yielding the contents of <toks register>. (We also do this for
		5567	% the toc entries.)
		5568	\toks0 = {#1}%
		5569	\message{(\the\toks0)}%
		5570	%
		5571	\chapmacro{#1}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno}%
		5572	%
		5573	\global\let\section = \unnumberedsec
		5574	\global\let\subsection = \unnumberedsubsec
		5575	\global\let\subsubsection = \unnumberedsubsubsec
		5576	}
		5577
		5578	% @centerchap is like @unnumbered, but the heading is centered.
		5579	\outer\parseargdef\centerchap{%
		5580	% Well, we could do the following in a group, but that would break
		5581	% an assumption that \chapmacro is called at the outermost level.
		5582	% Thus we are safer this way: --kasal, 24feb04
		5583	\let\centerparametersmaybe = \centerparameters
		5584	\unnmhead0{#1}%
		5585	\let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax
		5586	}
		5587
		5588	% @top is like @unnumbered.
		5589	\let\top\unnumbered
		5590
		5591	% Sections.
		5592	%
		5593	\outer\parseargdef\numberedsec{\numhead1{#1}} % normally calls seczzz
		5594	\def\seczzz#1{%
		5595	\global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1
		5596	\sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno.\the\secno}%
		5597	}
		5598
		5599	% normally calls appendixsectionzzz:
		5600	\outer\parseargdef\appendixsection{\apphead1{#1}}
		5601	\def\appendixsectionzzz#1{%
		5602	\global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1
		5603	\sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Yappendix}{\appendixletter.\the\secno}%
		5604	}
		5605	\let\appendixsec\appendixsection
		5606
		5607	% normally calls unnumberedseczzz:
		5608	\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsec{\unnmhead1{#1}}
		5609	\def\unnumberedseczzz#1{%
		5610	\global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1
		5611	\sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno}%
		5612	}
		5613
		5614	% Subsections.
		5615	%
		5616	% normally calls numberedsubseczzz:
		5617	\outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsec{\numhead2{#1}}
		5618	\def\numberedsubseczzz#1{%
		5619	\global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1
		5620	\sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}%
		5621	}
		5622
		5623	% normally calls appendixsubseczzz:
		5624	\outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsec{\apphead2{#1}}
		5625	\def\appendixsubseczzz#1{%
		5626	\global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1
		5627	\sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Yappendix}%
		5628	{\appendixletter.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}%
		5629	}
		5630
		5631	% normally calls unnumberedsubseczzz:
		5632	\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsec{\unnmhead2{#1}}
		5633	\def\unnumberedsubseczzz#1{%
		5634	\global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1
		5635	\sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Ynothing}%
		5636	{\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}%
		5637	}
		5638
		5639	% Subsubsections.
		5640	%
		5641	% normally numberedsubsubseczzz:
		5642	\outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsubsec{\numhead3{#1}}
		5643	\def\numberedsubsubseczzz#1{%
		5644	\global\advance\subsubsecno by 1
		5645	\sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Ynumbered}%
		5646	{\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}%
		5647	}
		5648
		5649	% normally appendixsubsubseczzz:
		5650	\outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsubsec{\apphead3{#1}}
		5651	\def\appendixsubsubseczzz#1{%
		5652	\global\advance\subsubsecno by 1
		5653	\sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Yappendix}%
		5654	{\appendixletter.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}%
		5655	}
		5656
		5657	% normally unnumberedsubsubseczzz:
		5658	\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsubsec{\unnmhead3{#1}}
		5659	\def\unnumberedsubsubseczzz#1{%
		5660	\global\advance\subsubsecno by 1
		5661	\sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Ynothing}%
		5662	{\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}%
		5663	}
		5664
		5665	% These macros control what the section commands do, according
		5666	% to what kind of chapter we are in (ordinary, appendix, or unnumbered).
		5667	% Define them by default for a numbered chapter.
		5668	\let\section = \numberedsec
		5669	\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec
		5670	\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec
		5671
		5672	% Define @majorheading, @heading and @subheading
		5673
		5674	\def\majorheading{%
		5675	{\advance\chapheadingskip by 10pt \chapbreak }%
		5676	\parsearg\chapheadingzzz
		5677	}
		5678
		5679	\def\chapheading{\chapbreak \parsearg\chapheadingzzz}
		5680	\def\chapheadingzzz#1{%
		5681	\vbox{\chapfonts \raggedtitlesettings #1\par}%
		5682	\nobreak\bigskip \nobreak
		5683	\suppressfirstparagraphindent
		5684	}
		5685
		5686	% @heading, @subheading, @subsubheading.
		5687	\parseargdef\heading{\sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Yomitfromtoc}{}
		5688	\suppressfirstparagraphindent}
		5689	\parseargdef\subheading{\sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Yomitfromtoc}{}
		5690	\suppressfirstparagraphindent}
		5691	\parseargdef\subsubheading{\sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Yomitfromtoc}{}
		5692	\suppressfirstparagraphindent}
		5693
		5694	% These macros generate a chapter, section, etc. heading only
		5695	% (including whitespace, linebreaking, etc. around it),
		5696	% given all the information in convenient, parsed form.
		5697
		5698	% Args are the skip and penalty (usually negative)
		5699	\def\dobreak#1#2{\par\ifdim\lastskip<#1\removelastskip\penalty#2\vskip#1\fi}
		5700
		5701	% Parameter controlling skip before chapter headings (if needed)
		5702	\newskip\chapheadingskip
		5703
		5704	% Define plain chapter starts, and page on/off switching for it.
		5705	\def\chapbreak{\dobreak \chapheadingskip {-4000}}
		5706	\def\chappager{\par\vfill\supereject}
		5707	% Because \domark is called before \chapoddpage, the filler page will
		5708	% get the headings for the next chapter, which is wrong. But we don't
		5709	% care -- we just disable all headings on the filler page.
		5710	\def\chapoddpage{%
		5711	\chappager
		5712	\ifodd\pageno \else
		5713	\begingroup
		5714	\headingsoff
		5715	\null
		5716	\chappager
		5717	\endgroup
		5718	\fi
		5719	}
		5720
		5721	\def\setchapternewpage #1 {\csname CHAPPAG#1\endcsname}
		5722
		5723	\def\CHAPPAGoff{%
		5724	\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
		5725	\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapbreak
		5726	\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager}
		5727
		5728	\def\CHAPPAGon{%
		5729	\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
		5730	\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chappager
		5731	\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager
		5732	\global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSsingle}}
		5733
		5734	\def\CHAPPAGodd{%
		5735	\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
		5736	\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapoddpage
		5737	\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chapoddpage
		5738	\global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}}
		5739
		5740	\CHAPPAGon
		5741
		5742	% Chapter opening.
		5743	%
		5744	% #1 is the text, #2 is the section type (Ynumbered, Ynothing,
		5745	% Yappendix, Yomitfromtoc), #3 the chapter number.
		5746	% Not used for @heading series.
		5747	%
		5748	% To test against our argument.
		5749	\def\Ynothingkeyword{Ynothing}
		5750	\def\Yappendixkeyword{Yappendix}
		5751	\def\Yomitfromtockeyword{Yomitfromtoc}
		5752	%
		5753	\def\chapmacro#1#2#3{%
		5754	\checkenv{}% chapters, etc., should not start inside an environment.
		5755	%
		5756	% Insert the first mark before the heading break (see notes for \domark).
		5757	\let\prevchapterdefs=\lastchapterdefs
		5758	\let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs
		5759	\gdef\lastsectiondefs{\gdef\thissectionname{}\gdef\thissectionnum{}%
		5760	\gdef\thissection{}}%
		5761	%
		5762	\def\temptype{#2}%
		5763	\ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword
		5764	\gdef\lastchapterdefs{\gdef\thischaptername{#1}\gdef\thischapternum{}%
		5765	\gdef\thischapter{\thischaptername}}%
		5766	\else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword
		5767	\gdef\lastchapterdefs{\gdef\thischaptername{#1}\gdef\thischapternum{}%
		5768	\gdef\thischapter{}}%
		5769	\else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword
		5770	\toks0={#1}%
		5771	\xdef\lastchapterdefs{%
		5772	\gdef\noexpand\thischaptername{\the\toks0}%
		5773	\gdef\noexpand\thischapternum{\appendixletter}%
		5774	% \noexpand\putwordAppendix avoids expanding indigestible
		5775	% commands in some of the translations.
		5776	\gdef\noexpand\thischapter{\noexpand\putwordAppendix{}
		5777	\noexpand\thischapternum:
		5778	\noexpand\thischaptername}%
		5779	}%
		5780	\else
		5781	\toks0={#1}%
		5782	\xdef\lastchapterdefs{%
		5783	\gdef\noexpand\thischaptername{\the\toks0}%
		5784	\gdef\noexpand\thischapternum{\the\chapno}%
		5785	% \noexpand\putwordChapter avoids expanding indigestible
		5786	% commands in some of the translations.
		5787	\gdef\noexpand\thischapter{\noexpand\putwordChapter{}
		5788	\noexpand\thischapternum:
		5789	\noexpand\thischaptername}%
		5790	}%
		5791	\fi\fi\fi
		5792	%
		5793	% Output the mark. Pass it through \safewhatsit, to take care of
		5794	% the preceding space.
		5795	\safewhatsit\domark
		5796	%
		5797	% Insert the chapter heading break.
		5798	\pchapsepmacro
		5799	%
		5800	% Now the second mark, after the heading break. No break points
		5801	% between here and the heading.
		5802	\let\prevchapterdefs=\lastchapterdefs
		5803	\let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs
		5804	\domark
		5805	%
		5806	{%
		5807	\chapfonts \rmisbold
		5808	\let\footnote=\errfootnoteheading % give better error message
		5809	%
		5810	% Have to define \lastsection before calling \donoderef, because the
		5811	% xref code eventually uses it. On the other hand, it has to be called
		5812	% after \pchapsepmacro, or the headline will change too soon.
		5813	\gdef\lastsection{#1}%
		5814	%
		5815	% Only insert the separating space if we have a chapter/appendix
		5816	% number, and don't print the unnumbered ``number''.
		5817	\ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword
		5818	\setbox0 = \hbox{}%
		5819	\def\toctype{unnchap}%
		5820	\else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword
		5821	\setbox0 = \hbox{}% contents like unnumbered, but no toc entry
		5822	\def\toctype{omit}%
		5823	\else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword
		5824	\setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} #3\enspace}%
		5825	\def\toctype{app}%
		5826	\else
		5827	\setbox0 = \hbox{#3\enspace}%
		5828	\def\toctype{numchap}%
		5829	\fi\fi\fi
		5830	%
		5831	% Write the toc entry for this chapter. Must come before the
		5832	% \donoderef, because we include the current node name in the toc
		5833	% entry, and \donoderef resets it to empty.
		5834	\writetocentry{\toctype}{#1}{#3}%
		5835	%
		5836	% For pdftex, we have to write out the node definition (aka, make
		5837	% the pdfdest) after any page break, but before the actual text has
		5838	% been typeset. If the destination for the pdf outline is after the
		5839	% text, then jumping from the outline may wind up with the text not
		5840	% being visible, for instance under high magnification.
		5841	\donoderef{#2}%
		5842	%
		5843	% Typeset the actual heading.
		5844	\nobreak % Avoid page breaks at the interline glue.
		5845	\vbox{\raggedtitlesettings \hangindent=\wd0 \centerparametersmaybe
		5846	\unhbox0 #1\par}%
		5847	}%
		5848	\nobreak\bigskip % no page break after a chapter title
		5849	\nobreak
		5850	}
		5851
		5852	% @centerchap -- centered and unnumbered.
		5853	\let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax
		5854	\def\centerparameters{%
		5855	\advance\rightskip by 3\rightskip
		5856	\leftskip = \rightskip
		5857	\parfillskip = 0pt
		5858	}
		5859
		5860
		5861	% I don't think this chapter style is supported any more, so I'm not
		5862	% updating it with the new noderef stuff. We'll see. --karl, 11aug03.
		5863	%
		5864	\def\setchapterstyle #1 {\csname CHAPF#1\endcsname}
		5865	%
		5866	\def\unnchfopen #1{%
		5867	\chapoddpage
		5868	\vbox{\chapfonts \raggedtitlesettings #1\par}%
		5869	\nobreak\bigskip\nobreak
		5870	}
		5871	\def\chfopen #1#2{\chapoddpage {\chapfonts
		5872	\vbox to 3in{\vfil \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #2} \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #1} \vfil}}%
		5873	\par\penalty 5000 %
		5874	}
		5875	\def\centerchfopen #1{%
		5876	\chapoddpage
		5877	\vbox{\chapfonts \raggedtitlesettings \hfill #1\hfill}%
		5878	\nobreak\bigskip \nobreak
		5879	}
		5880	\def\CHAPFopen{%
		5881	\global\let\chapmacro=\chfopen
		5882	\global\let\centerchapmacro=\centerchfopen}
		5883
		5884
		5885	% Section titles. These macros combine the section number parts and
		5886	% call the generic \sectionheading to do the printing.
		5887	%
		5888	\newskip\secheadingskip
		5889	\def\secheadingbreak{\dobreak \secheadingskip{-1000}}
		5890
		5891	% Subsection titles.
		5892	\newskip\subsecheadingskip
		5893	\def\subsecheadingbreak{\dobreak \subsecheadingskip{-500}}
		5894
		5895	% Subsubsection titles.
		5896	\def\subsubsecheadingskip{\subsecheadingskip}
		5897	\def\subsubsecheadingbreak{\subsecheadingbreak}
		5898
		5899
		5900	% Print any size, any type, section title.
		5901	%
		5902	% #1 is the text of the title,
		5903	% #2 is the section level (sec/subsec/subsubsec),
		5904	% #3 is the section type (Ynumbered, Ynothing, Yappendix, Yomitfromtoc),
		5905	% #4 is the section number.
		5906	%
		5907	\def\seckeyword{sec}
		5908	%
		5909	\def\sectionheading#1#2#3#4{%
		5910	{%
		5911	\def\sectionlevel{#2}%
		5912	\def\temptype{#3}%
		5913	%
		5914	% It is ok for the @heading series commands to appear inside an
		5915	% environment (it's been historically allowed, though the logic is
		5916	% dubious), but not the others.
		5917	\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword\else
		5918	\checkenv{}% non-@*heading should not be in an environment.
		5919	\fi
		5920	\let\footnote=\errfootnoteheading
		5921	%
		5922	% Switch to the right set of fonts.
		5923	\csname #2fonts\endcsname \rmisbold
		5924	%
		5925	% Insert first mark before the heading break (see notes for \domark).
		5926	\let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs
		5927	\ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword
		5928	\ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword
		5929	\gdef\lastsectiondefs{\gdef\thissectionname{#1}\gdef\thissectionnum{}%
		5930	\gdef\thissection{\thissectionname}}%
		5931	\fi
		5932	\else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword
		5933	% Don't redefine \thissection.
		5934	\else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword
		5935	\ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword
		5936	\toks0={#1}%
		5937	\xdef\lastsectiondefs{%
		5938	\gdef\noexpand\thissectionname{\the\toks0}%
		5939	\gdef\noexpand\thissectionnum{#4}%
		5940	% \noexpand\putwordSection avoids expanding indigestible
		5941	% commands in some of the translations.
		5942	\gdef\noexpand\thissection{\noexpand\putwordSection{}
		5943	\noexpand\thissectionnum:
		5944	\noexpand\thissectionname}%
		5945	}%
		5946	\fi
		5947	\else
		5948	\ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword
		5949	\toks0={#1}%
		5950	\xdef\lastsectiondefs{%
		5951	\gdef\noexpand\thissectionname{\the\toks0}%
		5952	\gdef\noexpand\thissectionnum{#4}%
		5953	% \noexpand\putwordSection avoids expanding indigestible
		5954	% commands in some of the translations.
		5955	\gdef\noexpand\thissection{\noexpand\putwordSection{}
		5956	\noexpand\thissectionnum:
		5957	\noexpand\thissectionname}%
		5958	}%
		5959	\fi
		5960	\fi\fi\fi
		5961	%
		5962	% Go into vertical mode. Usually we'll already be there, but we
		5963	% don't want the following whatsit to end up in a preceding paragraph
		5964	% if the document didn't happen to have a blank line.
		5965	\par
		5966	%
		5967	% Output the mark. Pass it through \safewhatsit, to take care of
		5968	% the preceding space.
		5969	\safewhatsit\domark
		5970	%
		5971	% Insert space above the heading.
		5972	\csname #2headingbreak\endcsname
		5973	%
		5974	% Now the second mark, after the heading break. No break points
		5975	% between here and the heading.
		5976	\global\let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs
		5977	\domark
		5978	%
		5979	% Only insert the space after the number if we have a section number.
		5980	\ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword
		5981	\setbox0 = \hbox{}%
		5982	\def\toctype{unn}%
		5983	\gdef\lastsection{#1}%
		5984	\else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword
		5985	% for @headings -- no section number, don't include in toc,
		5986	% and don't redefine \lastsection.
		5987	\setbox0 = \hbox{}%
		5988	\def\toctype{omit}%
		5989	\let\sectionlevel=\empty
		5990	\else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword
		5991	\setbox0 = \hbox{#4\enspace}%
		5992	\def\toctype{app}%
		5993	\gdef\lastsection{#1}%
		5994	\else
		5995	\setbox0 = \hbox{#4\enspace}%
		5996	\def\toctype{num}%
		5997	\gdef\lastsection{#1}%
		5998	\fi\fi\fi
		5999	%
		6000	% Write the toc entry (before \donoderef). See comments in \chapmacro.
		6001	\writetocentry{\toctype\sectionlevel}{#1}{#4}%
		6002	%
		6003	% Write the node reference (= pdf destination for pdftex).
		6004	% Again, see comments in \chapmacro.
		6005	\donoderef{#3}%
		6006	%
		6007	% Interline glue will be inserted when the vbox is completed.
		6008	% That glue will be a valid breakpoint for the page, since it'll be
		6009	% preceded by a whatsit (usually from the \donoderef, or from the
		6010	% \writetocentry if there was no node). We don't want to allow that
		6011	% break, since then the whatsits could end up on page n while the
		6012	% section is on page n+1, thus toc/etc. are wrong. Debian bug 276000.
		6013	\nobreak
		6014	%
		6015	% Output the actual section heading.
		6016	\vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \ptexraggedright
		6017	\hangindent=\wd0 % zero if no section number
		6018	\unhbox0 #1}%
		6019	}%
		6020	% Add extra space after the heading -- half of whatever came above it.
		6021	% Don't allow stretch, though.
		6022	\kern .5 \csname #2headingskip\endcsname
		6023	%
		6024	% Do not let the kern be a potential breakpoint, as it would be if it
		6025	% was followed by glue.
		6026	\nobreak
		6027	%
		6028	% We'll almost certainly start a paragraph next, so don't let that
		6029	% glue accumulate. (Not a breakpoint because it's preceded by a
		6030	% discardable item.) However, when a paragraph is not started next
		6031	% (\startdefun, \cartouche, \center, etc.), this needs to be wiped out
		6032	% or the negative glue will cause weirdly wrong output, typically
		6033	% obscuring the section heading with something else.
		6034	\vskip-\parskip
		6035	%
		6036	% This is so the last item on the main vertical list is a known
		6037	% \penalty > 10000, so \startdefun, etc., can recognize the situation
		6038	% and do the needful.
		6039	\penalty 10001
		6040	}
		6041
		6042
		6043	\message{toc,}
		6044	% Table of contents.
		6045	\newwrite\tocfile
		6046
		6047	% Write an entry to the toc file, opening it if necessary.
		6048	% Called from @chapter, etc.
		6049	%
		6050	% Example usage: \writetocentry{sec}{Section Name}{\the\chapno.\the\secno}
		6051	% We append the current node name (if any) and page number as additional
		6052	% arguments for the \{chap,sec,...}entry macros which will eventually
		6053	% read this. The node name is used in the pdf outlines as the
		6054	% destination to jump to.
		6055	%
		6056	% We open the .toc file for writing here instead of at @setfilename (or
		6057	% any other fixed time) so that @contents can be anywhere in the document.
		6058	% But if #1 is `omit', then we don't do anything. This is used for the
		6059	% table of contents chapter openings themselves.
		6060	%
		6061	\newif\iftocfileopened
		6062	\def\omitkeyword{omit}%
		6063	%
		6064	\def\writetocentry#1#2#3{%
		6065	\edef\writetoctype{#1}%
		6066	\ifx\writetoctype\omitkeyword \else
		6067	\iftocfileopened\else
		6068	\immediate\openout\tocfile = \jobname.toc
		6069	\global\tocfileopenedtrue
		6070	\fi
		6071	%
		6072	\iflinks
		6073	{\atdummies
		6074	\edef\temp{%
		6075	\write\tocfile{@#1entry{#2}{#3}{\lastnode}{\noexpand\folio}}}%
		6076	\temp
		6077	}%
		6078	\fi
		6079	\fi
		6080	%
		6081	% Tell \shipout to create a pdf destination on each page, if we're
		6082	% writing pdf. These are used in the table of contents. We can't
		6083	% just write one on every page because the title pages are numbered
		6084	% 1 and 2 (the page numbers aren't printed), and so are the first
		6085	% two pages of the document. Thus, we'd have two destinations named
		6086	% `1', and two named `2'.
		6087	\ifpdf \global\pdfmakepagedesttrue \fi
		6088	}
		6089
		6090
		6091	% These characters do not print properly in the Computer Modern roman
		6092	% fonts, so we must take special care. This is more or less redundant
		6093	% with the Texinfo input format setup at the end of this file.
		6094	%
		6095	\def\activecatcodes{%
		6096	\catcode`\"=\active
		6097	\catcode`\$=\active
		6098	\catcode`\<=\active
		6099	\catcode`\>=\active
		6100	\catcode`\\=\active
		6101	\catcode`\^=\active
		6102	\catcode`\_=\active
		6103	\catcode`\|=\active
		6104	\catcode`\~=\active
		6105	}
		6106
		6107
		6108	% Read the toc file, which is essentially Texinfo input.
		6109	\def\readtocfile{%
		6110	\setupdatafile
		6111	\activecatcodes
		6112	\input \tocreadfilename
		6113	}
		6114
		6115	\newskip\contentsrightmargin \contentsrightmargin=1in
		6116	\newcount\savepageno
		6117	\newcount\lastnegativepageno \lastnegativepageno = -1
		6118
		6119	% Prepare to read what we've written to \tocfile.
		6120	%
		6121	\def\startcontents#1{%
		6122	% If @setchapternewpage on, and @headings double, the contents should
		6123	% start on an odd page, unlike chapters. Thus, we maintain
		6124	% \contentsalignmacro in parallel with \pagealignmacro.
		6125	% From: Torbjorn Granlund <tege@matematik.su.se>
		6126	\contentsalignmacro
		6127	\immediate\closeout\tocfile
		6128	%
		6129	% Don't need to put `Contents' or `Short Contents' in the headline.
		6130	% It is abundantly clear what they are.
		6131	\chapmacro{#1}{Yomitfromtoc}{}%
		6132	%
		6133	\savepageno = \pageno
		6134	\begingroup % Set up to handle contents files properly.
		6135	\raggedbottom % Worry more about breakpoints than the bottom.
		6136	\advance\hsize by -\contentsrightmargin % Don't use the full line length.
		6137	%
		6138	% Roman numerals for page numbers.
		6139	\ifnum \pageno>0 \global\pageno = \lastnegativepageno \fi
		6140	}
		6141
		6142	% redefined for the two-volume lispref. We always output on
		6143	% \jobname.toc even if this is redefined.
		6144	%
		6145	\def\tocreadfilename{\jobname.toc}
		6146
		6147	% Normal (long) toc.
		6148	%
		6149	\def\contents{%
		6150	\startcontents{\putwordTOC}%
		6151	\openin 1 \tocreadfilename\space
		6152	\ifeof 1 \else
		6153	\readtocfile
		6154	\fi
		6155	\vfill \eject
		6156	\contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect
		6157	\ifeof 1 \else
		6158	\pdfmakeoutlines
		6159	\fi
		6160	\closein 1
		6161	\endgroup
		6162	\lastnegativepageno = \pageno
		6163	\global\pageno = \savepageno
		6164	}
		6165
		6166	% And just the chapters.
		6167	\def\summarycontents{%
		6168	\startcontents{\putwordShortTOC}%
		6169	%
		6170	\let\partentry = \shortpartentry
		6171	\let\numchapentry = \shortchapentry
		6172	\let\appentry = \shortchapentry
		6173	\let\unnchapentry = \shortunnchapentry
		6174	% We want a true roman here for the page numbers.
		6175	\secfonts
		6176	\let\rm=\shortcontrm \let\bf=\shortcontbf
		6177	\let\sl=\shortcontsl \let\tt=\shortconttt
		6178	\rm
		6179	\hyphenpenalty = 10000
		6180	\advance\baselineskip by 1pt % Open it up a little.
		6181	\def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{}
		6182	\let\appsecentry = \numsecentry
		6183	\let\unnsecentry = \numsecentry
		6184	\let\numsubsecentry = \numsecentry
		6185	\let\appsubsecentry = \numsecentry
		6186	\let\unnsubsecentry = \numsecentry
		6187	\let\numsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry
		6188	\let\appsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry
		6189	\let\unnsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry
		6190	\openin 1 \tocreadfilename\space
		6191	\ifeof 1 \else
		6192	\readtocfile
		6193	\fi
		6194	\closein 1
		6195	\vfill \eject
		6196	\contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect
		6197	\endgroup
		6198	\lastnegativepageno = \pageno
		6199	\global\pageno = \savepageno
		6200	}
		6201	\let\shortcontents = \summarycontents
		6202
		6203	% Typeset the label for a chapter or appendix for the short contents.
		6204	% The arg is, e.g., `A' for an appendix, or `3' for a chapter.
		6205	%
		6206	\def\shortchaplabel#1{%
		6207	% This space should be enough, since a single number is .5em, and the
		6208	% widest letter (M) is 1em, at least in the Computer Modern fonts.
		6209	% But use \hss just in case.
		6210	% (This space doesn't include the extra space that gets added after
		6211	% the label; that gets put in by \shortchapentry above.)
		6212	%
		6213	% We'd like to right-justify chapter numbers, but that looks strange
		6214	% with appendix letters. And right-justifying numbers and
		6215	% left-justifying letters looks strange when there is less than 10
		6216	% chapters. Have to read the whole toc once to know how many chapters
		6217	% there are before deciding ...
		6218	\hbox to 1em{#1\hss}%
		6219	}
		6220
		6221	% These macros generate individual entries in the table of contents.
		6222	% The first argument is the chapter or section name.
		6223	% The last argument is the page number.
		6224	% The arguments in between are the chapter number, section number, ...
		6225
		6226	% Parts, in the main contents. Replace the part number, which doesn't
		6227	% exist, with an empty box. Let's hope all the numbers have the same width.
		6228	% Also ignore the page number, which is conventionally not printed.
		6229	\def\numeralbox{\setbox0=\hbox{8}\hbox to \wd0{\hfil}}
		6230	\def\partentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{\numeralbox\labelspace#1}{}}
		6231	%
		6232	% Parts, in the short toc.
		6233	\def\shortpartentry#1#2#3#4{%
		6234	\penalty-300
		6235	\vskip.5\baselineskip plus.15\baselineskip minus.1\baselineskip
		6236	\shortchapentry{{\bf #1}}{\numeralbox}{}{}%
		6237	}
		6238
		6239	% Chapters, in the main contents.
		6240	\def\numchapentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}}
		6241	%
		6242	% Chapters, in the short toc.
		6243	% See comments in \dochapentry re vbox and related settings.
		6244	\def\shortchapentry#1#2#3#4{%
		6245	\tocentry{\shortchaplabel{#2}\labelspace #1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#4\egroup}%
		6246	}
		6247
		6248	% Appendices, in the main contents.
		6249	% Need the word Appendix, and a fixed-size box.
		6250	%
		6251	\def\appendixbox#1{%
		6252	% We use M since it's probably the widest letter.
		6253	\setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} M}%
		6254	\hbox to \wd0{\putwordAppendix{} #1\hss}}
		6255	%
		6256	\def\appentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{\appendixbox{#2}\labelspace#1}{#4}}
		6257
		6258	% Unnumbered chapters.
		6259	\def\unnchapentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{#1}{#4}}
		6260	\def\shortunnchapentry#1#2#3#4{\tocentry{#1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#4\egroup}}
		6261
		6262	% Sections.
		6263	\def\numsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}}
		6264	\let\appsecentry=\numsecentry
		6265	\def\unnsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#1}{#4}}
		6266
		6267	% Subsections.
		6268	\def\numsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}}
		6269	\let\appsubsecentry=\numsubsecentry
		6270	\def\unnsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#1}{#4}}
		6271
		6272	% And subsubsections.
		6273	\def\numsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsubsecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}}
		6274	\let\appsubsubsecentry=\numsubsubsecentry
		6275	\def\unnsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsubsecentry{#1}{#4}}
		6276
		6277	% This parameter controls the indentation of the various levels.
		6278	% Same as \defaultparindent.
		6279	\newdimen\tocindent \tocindent = 15pt
		6280
		6281	% Now for the actual typesetting. In all these, #1 is the text and #2 is the
		6282	% page number.
		6283	%
		6284	% If the toc has to be broken over pages, we want it to be at chapters
		6285	% if at all possible; hence the \penalty.
		6286	\def\dochapentry#1#2{%
		6287	\penalty-300 \vskip1\baselineskip plus.33\baselineskip minus.25\baselineskip
		6288	\begingroup
		6289	\chapentryfonts
		6290	\tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
		6291	\endgroup
		6292	\nobreak\vskip .25\baselineskip plus.1\baselineskip
		6293	}
		6294
		6295	\def\dosecentry#1#2{\begingroup
		6296	\secentryfonts \leftskip=\tocindent
		6297	\tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
		6298	\endgroup}
		6299
		6300	\def\dosubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup
		6301	\subsecentryfonts \leftskip=2\tocindent
		6302	\tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
		6303	\endgroup}
		6304
		6305	\def\dosubsubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup
		6306	\subsubsecentryfonts \leftskip=3\tocindent
		6307	\tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
		6308	\endgroup}
		6309
		6310	% We use the same \entry macro as for the index entries.
		6311	\let\tocentry = \entry
		6312
		6313	% Space between chapter (or whatever) number and the title.
		6314	\def\labelspace{\hskip1em \relax}
		6315
		6316	\def\dopageno#1{{\rm #1}}
		6317	\def\doshortpageno#1{{\rm #1}}
		6318
		6319	\def\chapentryfonts{\secfonts \rm}
		6320	\def\secentryfonts{\textfonts}
		6321	\def\subsecentryfonts{\textfonts}
		6322	\def\subsubsecentryfonts{\textfonts}
		6323
		6324
		6325	\message{environments,}
		6326	% @foo ... @end foo.
		6327
		6328	% @tex ... @end tex escapes into raw TeX temporarily.
		6329	% One exception: @ is still an escape character, so that @end tex works.
		6330	% But \@ or @@ will get a plain @ character.
		6331
		6332	\envdef\tex{%
		6333	\setupmarkupstyle{tex}%
		6334	\catcode `\\=0 \catcode `\{=1 \catcode `\}=2
		6335	\catcode `\$=3 \catcode `\&=4 \catcode `\#=6
		6336	\catcode `\^=7 \catcode `\_=8 \catcode `\~=\active \let~=\tie
		6337	\catcode `\%=14
		6338	\catcode `\+=\other
		6339	\catcode `\"=\other
		6340	\catcode `\|=\other
		6341	\catcode `\<=\other
		6342	\catcode `\>=\other
		6343	\catcode `\`=\other
		6344	\catcode `\'=\other
		6345	\escapechar=`\\
		6346	%
		6347	% ' is active in math mode (mathcode"8000). So reset it, and all our
		6348	% other math active characters (just in case), to plain's definitions.
		6349	\mathactive
		6350	%
		6351	% Inverse of the list at the beginning of the file.
		6352	\let\b=\ptexb
		6353	\let\bullet=\ptexbullet
		6354	\let\c=\ptexc
		6355	\let\,=\ptexcomma
		6356	\let\.=\ptexdot
		6357	\let\dots=\ptexdots
		6358	\let\equiv=\ptexequiv
		6359	\let\!=\ptexexclam
		6360	\let\i=\ptexi
		6361	\let\indent=\ptexindent
		6362	\let\noindent=\ptexnoindent
		6363	\let\{=\ptexlbrace
		6364	\let\+=\tabalign
		6365	\let\}=\ptexrbrace
		6366	\let\/=\ptexslash
		6367	\let\sp=\ptexsp
		6368	\let\*=\ptexstar
		6369	%\let\sup=\ptexsup % do not redefine, we want @sup to work in math mode
		6370	\let\t=\ptext
		6371	\expandafter \let\csname top\endcsname=\ptextop % we've made it outer
		6372	\let\frenchspacing=\plainfrenchspacing
		6373	%
		6374	\def\endldots{\mathinner{\ldots\ldots\ldots\ldots}}%
		6375	\def\enddots{\relax\ifmmode\endldots\else$\mathsurround=0pt \endldots\,$\fi}%
		6376	\def\@{@}%
		6377	}
		6378	% There is no need to define \Etex.
		6379
		6380	% Define @lisp ... @end lisp.
		6381	% @lisp environment forms a group so it can rebind things,
		6382	% including the definition of @end lisp (which normally is erroneous).
		6383
		6384	% Amount to narrow the margins by for @lisp.
		6385	\newskip\lispnarrowing \lispnarrowing=0.4in
		6386
		6387	% This is the definition that ^^M gets inside @lisp, @example, and other
		6388	% such environments. \null is better than a space, since it doesn't
		6389	% have any width.
		6390	\def\lisppar{\null\endgraf}
		6391
		6392	% This space is always present above and below environments.
		6393	\newskip\envskipamount \envskipamount = 0pt
		6394
		6395	% Make spacing and below environment symmetrical. We use \parskip here
		6396	% to help in doing that, since in @example-like environments \parskip
		6397	% is reset to zero; thus the \afterenvbreak inserts no space -- but the
		6398	% start of the next paragraph will insert \parskip.
		6399	%
		6400	\def\aboveenvbreak{{%
		6401	% =10000 instead of <10000 because of a special case in \itemzzz and
		6402	% \sectionheading, q.v.
		6403	\ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else
		6404	\advance\envskipamount by \parskip
		6405	\endgraf
		6406	\ifdim\lastskip<\envskipamount
		6407	\removelastskip
		6408	% it's not a good place to break if the last penalty was \nobreak
		6409	% or better ...
		6410	\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \penalty-50 \fi
		6411	\vskip\envskipamount
		6412	\fi
		6413	\fi
		6414	}}
		6415
		6416	\let\afterenvbreak = \aboveenvbreak
		6417
		6418	% \nonarrowing is a flag. If "set", @lisp etc don't narrow margins; it will
		6419	% also clear it, so that its embedded environments do the narrowing again.
		6420	\let\nonarrowing=\relax
		6421
		6422	% @cartouche ... @end cartouche: draw rectangle w/rounded corners around
		6423	% environment contents.
		6424	\font\circle=lcircle10
		6425	\newdimen\circthick
		6426	\newdimen\cartouter\newdimen\cartinner
		6427	\newskip\normbskip\newskip\normpskip\newskip\normlskip
		6428	\circthick=\fontdimen8\circle
		6429	%
		6430	\def\ctl{{\circle\char'013\hskip -6pt}}% 6pt from pl file: 1/2charwidth
		6431	\def\ctr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'010}}
		6432	\def\cbl{{\circle\char'012\hskip -6pt}}
		6433	\def\cbr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'011}}
		6434	\def\carttop{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip
		6435	\ctl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\ctr
		6436	\hskip\rskip}}
		6437	\def\cartbot{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip
		6438	\cbl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\cbr
		6439	\hskip\rskip}}
		6440	%
		6441	\newskip\lskip\newskip\rskip
		6442
		6443	\envdef\cartouche{%
		6444	\ifhmode\par\fi % can't be in the midst of a paragraph.
		6445	\startsavinginserts
		6446	\lskip=\leftskip \rskip=\rightskip
		6447	\leftskip=0pt\rightskip=0pt % we want these *outside*.
		6448	\cartinner=\hsize \advance\cartinner by-\lskip
		6449	\advance\cartinner by-\rskip
		6450	\cartouter=\hsize
		6451	\advance\cartouter by 18.4pt % allow for 3pt kerns on either
		6452	% side, and for 6pt waste from
		6453	% each corner char, and rule thickness
		6454	\normbskip=\baselineskip \normpskip=\parskip \normlskip=\lineskip
		6455	%
		6456	% If this cartouche directly follows a sectioning command, we need the
		6457	% \parskip glue (backspaced over by default) or the cartouche can
		6458	% collide with the section heading.
		6459	\ifnum\lastpenalty>10000 \vskip\parskip \penalty\lastpenalty \fi
		6460	%
		6461	\vbox\bgroup
		6462	\baselineskip=0pt\parskip=0pt\lineskip=0pt
		6463	\carttop
		6464	\hbox\bgroup
		6465	\hskip\lskip
		6466	\vrule\kern3pt
		6467	\vbox\bgroup
		6468	\kern3pt
		6469	\hsize=\cartinner
		6470	\baselineskip=\normbskip
		6471	\lineskip=\normlskip
		6472	\parskip=\normpskip
		6473	\vskip -\parskip
		6474	\comment % For explanation, see the end of def\group.
		6475	}
		6476	\def\Ecartouche{%
		6477	\ifhmode\par\fi
		6478	\kern3pt
		6479	\egroup
		6480	\kern3pt\vrule
		6481	\hskip\rskip
		6482	\egroup
		6483	\cartbot
		6484	\egroup
		6485	\checkinserts
		6486	}
		6487
		6488
		6489	% This macro is called at the beginning of all the @example variants,
		6490	% inside a group.
		6491	\newdimen\nonfillparindent
		6492	\def\nonfillstart{%
		6493	\aboveenvbreak
		6494	\ifdim\hfuzz < 12pt \hfuzz = 12pt \fi % Don't be fussy
		6495	\sepspaces % Make spaces be word-separators rather than space tokens.
		6496	\let\par = \lisppar % don't ignore blank lines
		6497	\obeylines % each line of input is a line of output
		6498	\parskip = 0pt
		6499	% Turn off paragraph indentation but redefine \indent to emulate
		6500	% the normal \indent.
		6501	\nonfillparindent=\parindent
		6502	\parindent = 0pt
		6503	\let\indent\nonfillindent
		6504	%
		6505	\emergencystretch = 0pt % don't try to avoid overfull boxes
		6506	\ifx\nonarrowing\relax
		6507	\advance \leftskip by \lispnarrowing
		6508	\exdentamount=\lispnarrowing
		6509	\else
		6510	\let\nonarrowing = \relax
		6511	\fi
		6512	\let\exdent=\nofillexdent
		6513	}
		6514
		6515	\begingroup
		6516	\obeyspaces
		6517	% We want to swallow spaces (but not other tokens) after the fake
		6518	% @indent in our nonfill-environments, where spaces are normally
		6519	% active and set to @tie, resulting in them not being ignored after
		6520	% @indent.
		6521	\gdef\nonfillindent{\futurelet\temp\nonfillindentcheck}%
		6522	\gdef\nonfillindentcheck{%
		6523	\ifx\temp %
		6524	\expandafter\nonfillindentgobble%
		6525	\else%
		6526	\leavevmode\nonfillindentbox%
		6527	\fi%
		6528	}%
		6529	\endgroup
		6530	\def\nonfillindentgobble#1{\nonfillindent}
		6531	\def\nonfillindentbox{\hbox to \nonfillparindent{\hss}}
		6532
		6533	% If you want all examples etc. small: @set dispenvsize small.
		6534	% If you want even small examples the full size: @set dispenvsize nosmall.
		6535	% This affects the following displayed environments:
		6536	% @example, @display, @format, @lisp
		6537	%
		6538	\def\smallword{small}
		6539	\def\nosmallword{nosmall}
		6540	\let\SETdispenvsize\relax
		6541	\def\setnormaldispenv{%
		6542	\ifx\SETdispenvsize\smallword
		6543	% end paragraph for sake of leading, in case document has no blank
		6544	% line. This is redundant with what happens in \aboveenvbreak, but
		6545	% we need to do it before changing the fonts, and it's inconvenient
		6546	% to change the fonts afterward.
		6547	\ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else \endgraf \fi
		6548	\smallexamplefonts \rm
		6549	\fi
		6550	}
		6551	\def\setsmalldispenv{%
		6552	\ifx\SETdispenvsize\nosmallword
		6553	\else
		6554	\ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else \endgraf \fi
		6555	\smallexamplefonts \rm
		6556	\fi
		6557	}
		6558
		6559	% We often define two environments, @foo and @smallfoo.
		6560	% Let's do it in one command. #1 is the env name, #2 the definition.
		6561	\def\makedispenvdef#1#2{%
		6562	\expandafter\envdef\csname#1\endcsname {\setnormaldispenv #2}%
		6563	\expandafter\envdef\csname small#1\endcsname {\setsmalldispenv #2}%
		6564	\expandafter\let\csname E#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak
		6565	\expandafter\let\csname Esmall#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak
		6566	}
		6567
		6568	% Define two environment synonyms (#1 and #2) for an environment.
		6569	\def\maketwodispenvdef#1#2#3{%
		6570	\makedispenvdef{#1}{#3}%
		6571	\makedispenvdef{#2}{#3}%
		6572	}
		6573	%
		6574	% @lisp: indented, narrowed, typewriter font;
		6575	% @example: same as @lisp.
		6576	%
		6577	% @smallexample and @smalllisp: use smaller fonts.
		6578	% Originally contributed by Pavel@xerox.
		6579	%
		6580	\maketwodispenvdef{lisp}{example}{%
		6581	\nonfillstart
		6582	\tt\setupmarkupstyle{example}%
		6583	\let\kbdfont = \kbdexamplefont % Allow @kbd to do something special.
		6584	\gobble % eat return
		6585	}
		6586	% @display/@smalldisplay: same as @lisp except keep current font.
		6587	%
		6588	\makedispenvdef{display}{%
		6589	\nonfillstart
		6590	\gobble
		6591	}
		6592
		6593	% @format/@smallformat: same as @display except don't narrow margins.
		6594	%
		6595	\makedispenvdef{format}{%
		6596	\let\nonarrowing = t%
		6597	\nonfillstart
		6598	\gobble
		6599	}
		6600
		6601	% @flushleft: same as @format, but doesn't obey \SETdispenvsize.
		6602	\envdef\flushleft{%
		6603	\let\nonarrowing = t%
		6604	\nonfillstart
		6605	\gobble
		6606	}
		6607	\let\Eflushleft = \afterenvbreak
		6608
		6609	% @flushright.
		6610	%
		6611	\envdef\flushright{%
		6612	\let\nonarrowing = t%
		6613	\nonfillstart
		6614	\advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fill\relax
		6615	\gobble
		6616	}
		6617	\let\Eflushright = \afterenvbreak
		6618
		6619
		6620	% @raggedright does more-or-less normal line breaking but no right
		6621	% justification. From plain.tex. Don't stretch around special
		6622	% characters in urls in this environment, since the stretch at the right
		6623	% should be enough.
		6624	\envdef\raggedright{%
		6625	\rightskip0pt plus2.4em \spaceskip.3333em \xspaceskip.5em\relax
		6626	\def\urefprestretchamount{0pt}%
		6627	\def\urefpoststretchamount{0pt}%
		6628	}
		6629	\let\Eraggedright\par
		6630
		6631	\envdef\raggedleft{%
		6632	\parindent=0pt \leftskip0pt plus2em
		6633	\spaceskip.3333em \xspaceskip.5em \parfillskip=0pt
		6634	\hbadness=10000 % Last line will usually be underfull, so turn off
		6635	% badness reporting.
		6636	}
		6637	\let\Eraggedleft\par
		6638
		6639	\envdef\raggedcenter{%
		6640	\parindent=0pt \rightskip0pt plus1em \leftskip0pt plus1em
		6641	\spaceskip.3333em \xspaceskip.5em \parfillskip=0pt
		6642	\hbadness=10000 % Last line will usually be underfull, so turn off
		6643	% badness reporting.
		6644	}
		6645	\let\Eraggedcenter\par
		6646
		6647
		6648	% @quotation does normal linebreaking (hence we can't use \nonfillstart)
		6649	% and narrows the margins. We keep \parskip nonzero in general, since
		6650	% we're doing normal filling. So, when using \aboveenvbreak and
		6651	% \afterenvbreak, temporarily make \parskip 0.
		6652	%
		6653	\makedispenvdef{quotation}{\quotationstart}
		6654	%
		6655	\def\quotationstart{%
		6656	\indentedblockstart % same as \indentedblock, but increase right margin too.
		6657	\ifx\nonarrowing\relax
		6658	\advance\rightskip by \lispnarrowing
		6659	\fi
		6660	\parsearg\quotationlabel
		6661	}
		6662
		6663	% We have retained a nonzero parskip for the environment, since we're
		6664	% doing normal filling.
		6665	%
		6666	\def\Equotation{%
		6667	\par
		6668	\ifx\quotationauthor\thisisundefined\else
		6669	% indent a bit.
		6670	\leftline{\kern 2\leftskip \sl ---\quotationauthor}%
		6671	\fi
		6672	{\parskip=0pt \afterenvbreak}%
		6673	}
		6674	\def\Esmallquotation{\Equotation}
		6675
		6676	% If we're given an argument, typeset it in bold with a colon after.
		6677	\def\quotationlabel#1{%
		6678	\def\temp{#1}%
		6679	\ifx\temp\empty \else
		6680	{\bf #1: }%
		6681	\fi
		6682	}
		6683
		6684	% @indentedblock is like @quotation, but indents only on the left and
		6685	% has no optional argument.
		6686	%
		6687	\makedispenvdef{indentedblock}{\indentedblockstart}
		6688	%
		6689	\def\indentedblockstart{%
		6690	{\parskip=0pt \aboveenvbreak}% because \aboveenvbreak inserts \parskip
		6691	\parindent=0pt
		6692	%
		6693	% @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing at next level down.
		6694	\ifx\nonarrowing\relax
		6695	\advance\leftskip by \lispnarrowing
		6696	\exdentamount = \lispnarrowing
		6697	\else
		6698	\let\nonarrowing = \relax
		6699	\fi
		6700	}
		6701
		6702	% Keep a nonzero parskip for the environment, since we're doing normal filling.
		6703	%
		6704	\def\Eindentedblock{%
		6705	\par
		6706	{\parskip=0pt \afterenvbreak}%
		6707	}
		6708	\def\Esmallindentedblock{\Eindentedblock}
		6709
		6710
		6711	% LaTeX-like @verbatim...@end verbatim and @verb{<char>...<char>}
		6712	% If we want to allow any <char> as delimiter,
		6713	% we need the curly braces so that makeinfo sees the @verb command, eg:
		6714	% `@verbx...x' would look like the '@verbx' command. --janneke@gnu.org
		6715	%
		6716	% [Knuth]: Donald Ervin Knuth, 1996. The TeXbook.
		6717	%
		6718	% [Knuth] p.344; only we need to do the other characters Texinfo sets
		6719	% active too. Otherwise, they get lost as the first character on a
		6720	% verbatim line.
		6721	\def\dospecials{%
		6722	\do\ \do\\\do\{\do\}\do\$\do\&%
		6723	\do\#\do\^\do\^^K\do\_\do\^^A\do\%\do\~%
		6724	\do\<\do\>\do\|\do\@\do+\do\"%
		6725	% Don't do the quotes -- if we do, @set txicodequoteundirected and
		6726	% @set txicodequotebacktick will not have effect on @verb and
		6727	% @verbatim, and ?` and !` ligatures won't get disabled.
		6728	%\do\`\do\'%
		6729	}
		6730	%
		6731	% [Knuth] p. 380
		6732	\def\uncatcodespecials{%
		6733	\def\do##1{\catcode`##1=\other}\dospecials}
		6734	%
		6735	% Setup for the @verb command.
		6736	%
		6737	% Eight spaces for a tab
		6738	\begingroup
		6739	\catcode`\^^I=\active
		6740	\gdef\tabeightspaces{\catcode`\^^I=\active\def^^I{\ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ }}
		6741	\endgroup
		6742	%
		6743	\def\setupverb{%
		6744	\tt % easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim
		6745	\def\par{\leavevmode\endgraf}%
		6746	\setupmarkupstyle{verb}%
		6747	\tabeightspaces
		6748	% Respect line breaks,
		6749	% print special symbols as themselves, and
		6750	% make each space count
		6751	% must do in this order:
		6752	\obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces
		6753	}
		6754
		6755	% Setup for the @verbatim environment
		6756	%
		6757	% Real tab expansion.
		6758	\newdimen\tabw \setbox0=\hbox{\tt\space} \tabw=8\wd0 % tab amount
		6759	%
		6760	% We typeset each line of the verbatim in an \hbox, so we can handle
		6761	% tabs. The \global is in case the verbatim line starts with an accent,
		6762	% or some other command that starts with a begin-group. Otherwise, the
		6763	% entire \verbbox would disappear at the corresponding end-group, before
		6764	% it is typeset. Meanwhile, we can't have nested verbatim commands
		6765	% (can we?), so the \global won't be overwriting itself.
		6766	\newbox\verbbox
		6767	\def\starttabbox{\global\setbox\verbbox=\hbox\bgroup}
		6768	%
		6769	\begingroup
		6770	\catcode`\^^I=\active
		6771	\gdef\tabexpand{%
		6772	\catcode`\^^I=\active
		6773	\def^^I{\leavevmode\egroup
		6774	\dimen\verbbox=\wd\verbbox % the width so far, or since the previous tab
		6775	\divide\dimen\verbbox by\tabw
		6776	\multiply\dimen\verbbox by\tabw % compute previous multiple of \tabw
		6777	\advance\dimen\verbbox by\tabw % advance to next multiple of \tabw
		6778	\wd\verbbox=\dimen\verbbox \box\verbbox \starttabbox
		6779	}%
		6780	}
		6781	\endgroup
		6782
		6783	% start the verbatim environment.
		6784	\def\setupverbatim{%
		6785	\let\nonarrowing = t%
		6786	\nonfillstart
		6787	\tt % easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim
		6788	% The \leavevmode here is for blank lines. Otherwise, we would
		6789	% never \starttabox and the \egroup would end verbatim mode.
		6790	\def\par{\leavevmode\egroup\box\verbbox\endgraf}%
		6791	\tabexpand
		6792	\setupmarkupstyle{verbatim}%
		6793	% Respect line breaks,
		6794	% print special symbols as themselves, and
		6795	% make each space count.
		6796	% Must do in this order:
		6797	\obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces
		6798	\everypar{\starttabbox}%
		6799	}
		6800
		6801	% Do the @verb magic: verbatim text is quoted by unique
		6802	% delimiter characters. Before first delimiter expect a
		6803	% right brace, after last delimiter expect closing brace:
		6804	%
		6805	% \def\doverb'{'<char>#1<char>'}'{#1}
		6806	%
		6807	% [Knuth] p. 382; only eat outer {}
		6808	\begingroup
		6809	\catcode`[=1\catcode`]=2\catcode`\{=\other\catcode`\}=\other
		6810	\gdef\doverb{#1[\def\next##1#1}[##1\endgroup]\next]
		6811	\endgroup
		6812	%
		6813	\def\verb{\begingroup\setupverb\doverb}
		6814	%
		6815	%
		6816	% Do the @verbatim magic: define the macro \doverbatim so that
		6817	% the (first) argument ends when '@end verbatim' is reached, ie:
		6818	%
		6819	% \def\doverbatim#1@end verbatim{#1}
		6820	%
		6821	% For Texinfo it's a lot easier than for LaTeX,
		6822	% because texinfo's \verbatim doesn't stop at '\end{verbatim}':
		6823	% we need not redefine '\', '{' and '}'.
		6824	%
		6825	% Inspired by LaTeX's verbatim command set [latex.ltx]
		6826	%
		6827	\begingroup
		6828	\catcode`\ =\active
		6829	\obeylines %
		6830	% ignore everything up to the first ^^M, that's the newline at the end
		6831	% of the @verbatim input line itself. Otherwise we get an extra blank
		6832	% line in the output.
		6833	\xdef\doverbatim#1^^M#2@end verbatim{#2\noexpand\end\gobble verbatim}%
		6834	% We really want {...\end verbatim} in the body of the macro, but
		6835	% without the active space; thus we have to use \xdef and \gobble.
		6836	\endgroup
		6837	%
		6838	\envdef\verbatim{%
		6839	\setupverbatim\doverbatim
		6840	}
		6841	\let\Everbatim = \afterenvbreak
		6842
		6843
		6844	% @verbatiminclude FILE - insert text of file in verbatim environment.
		6845	%
		6846	\def\verbatiminclude{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\doverbatiminclude}
		6847	%
		6848	\def\doverbatiminclude#1{%
		6849	{%
		6850	\makevalueexpandable
		6851	\setupverbatim
		6852	\indexnofonts % Allow `@@' and other weird things in file names.
		6853	\wlog{texinfo.tex: doing @verbatiminclude of #1^^J}%
		6854	\input #1
		6855	\afterenvbreak
		6856	}%
		6857	}
		6858
		6859	% @copying ... @end copying.
		6860	% Save the text away for @insertcopying later.
		6861	%
		6862	% We save the uninterpreted tokens, rather than creating a box.
		6863	% Saving the text in a box would be much easier, but then all the
		6864	% typesetting commands (@smallbook, font changes, etc.) have to be done
		6865	% beforehand -- and a) we want @copying to be done first in the source
		6866	% file; b) letting users define the frontmatter in as flexible order as
		6867	% possible is very desirable.
		6868	%
		6869	\def\copying{\checkenv{}\begingroup\scanargctxt\docopying}
		6870	\def\docopying#1@end copying{\endgroup\def\copyingtext{#1}}
		6871	%
		6872	\def\insertcopying{%
		6873	\begingroup
		6874	\parindent = 0pt % paragraph indentation looks wrong on title page
		6875	\scanexp\copyingtext
		6876	\endgroup
		6877	}
		6878
		6879
		6880	\message{defuns,}
		6881	% @defun etc.
		6882
		6883	\newskip\defbodyindent \defbodyindent=.4in
		6884	\newskip\defargsindent \defargsindent=50pt
		6885	\newskip\deflastargmargin \deflastargmargin=18pt
		6886	\newcount\defunpenalty
		6887
		6888	% Start the processing of @deffn:
		6889	\def\startdefun{%
		6890	\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000
		6891	\medbreak
		6892	\defunpenalty=10003 % Will keep this @deffn together with the
		6893	% following @def command, see below.
		6894	\else
		6895	% If there are two @def commands in a row, we'll have a \nobreak,
		6896	% which is there to keep the function description together with its
		6897	% header. But if there's nothing but headers, we need to allow a
		6898	% break somewhere. Check specifically for penalty 10002, inserted
		6899	% by \printdefunline, instead of 10000, since the sectioning
		6900	% commands also insert a nobreak penalty, and we don't want to allow
		6901	% a break between a section heading and a defun.
		6902	%
		6903	% As a further refinement, we avoid "club" headers by signalling
		6904	% with penalty of 10003 after the very first @deffn in the
		6905	% sequence (see above), and penalty of 10002 after any following
		6906	% @def command.
		6907	\ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty2000 \else \defunpenalty=10002 \fi
		6908	%
		6909	% Similarly, after a section heading, do not allow a break.
		6910	% But do insert the glue.
		6911	\medskip % preceded by discardable penalty, so not a breakpoint
		6912	\fi
		6913	%
		6914	\parindent=0in
		6915	\advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
		6916	\exdentamount=\defbodyindent
		6917	}
		6918
		6919	\def\dodefunx#1{%
		6920	% First, check whether we are in the right environment:
		6921	\checkenv#1%
		6922	%
		6923	% As above, allow line break if we have multiple x headers in a row.
		6924	% It's not a great place, though.
		6925	\ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty3000 \else \defunpenalty=10002 \fi
		6926	%
		6927	% And now, it's time to reuse the body of the original defun:
		6928	\expandafter\gobbledefun#1%
		6929	}
		6930	\def\gobbledefun#1\startdefun{}
		6931
		6932	% \printdefunline \deffnheader{text}
		6933	%
		6934	\def\printdefunline#1#2{%
		6935	\begingroup
		6936	% call \deffnheader:
		6937	#1#2 \endheader
		6938	% common ending:
		6939	\interlinepenalty = 10000
		6940	\advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil\relax
		6941	\endgraf
		6942	\nobreak\vskip -\parskip
		6943	\penalty\defunpenalty % signal to \startdefun and \dodefunx
		6944	% Some of the @defun-type tags do not enable magic parentheses,
		6945	% rendering the following check redundant. But we don't optimize.
		6946	\checkparencounts
		6947	\endgroup
		6948	}
		6949
		6950	\def\Edefun{\endgraf\medbreak}
		6951
		6952	% \makedefun{deffn} creates \deffn, \deffnx and \Edeffn;
		6953	% the only thing remaining is to define \deffnheader.
		6954	%
		6955	\def\makedefun#1{%
		6956	\expandafter\let\csname E#1\endcsname = \Edefun
		6957	\edef\temp{\noexpand\domakedefun
		6958	\makecsname{#1}\makecsname{#1x}\makecsname{#1header}}%
		6959	\temp
		6960	}
		6961
		6962	% \domakedefun \deffn \deffnx \deffnheader
		6963	%
		6964	% Define \deffn and \deffnx, without parameters.
		6965	% \deffnheader has to be defined explicitly.
		6966	%
		6967	\def\domakedefun#1#2#3{%
		6968	\envdef#1{%
		6969	\startdefun
		6970	\doingtypefnfalse % distinguish typed functions from all else
		6971	\parseargusing\activeparens{\printdefunline#3}%
		6972	}%
		6973	\def#2{\dodefunx#1}%
		6974	\def#3%
		6975	}
		6976
		6977	\newif\ifdoingtypefn % doing typed function?
		6978	\newif\ifrettypeownline % typeset return type on its own line?
		6979
		6980	% @deftypefnnewline on|off says whether the return type of typed functions
		6981	% are printed on their own line. This affects @deftypefn, @deftypefun,
		6982	% @deftypeop, and @deftypemethod.
		6983	%
		6984	\parseargdef\deftypefnnewline{%
		6985	\def\temp{#1}%
		6986	\ifx\temp\onword
		6987	\expandafter\let\csname SETtxideftypefnnl\endcsname
		6988	= \empty
		6989	\else\ifx\temp\offword
		6990	\expandafter\let\csname SETtxideftypefnnl\endcsname
		6991	= \relax
		6992	\else
		6993	\errhelp = \EMsimple
		6994	\errmessage{Unknown @txideftypefnnl value `\temp',
		6995	must be on|off}%
		6996	\fi\fi
		6997	}
		6998
		6999	% Untyped functions:
		7000
		7001	% @deffn category name args
		7002	\makedefun{deffn}{\deffngeneral{}}
		7003
		7004	% @deffn category class name args
		7005	\makedefun{defop}#1 {\defopon{#1\ \putwordon}}
		7006
		7007	% \defopon {category on}class name args
		7008	\def\defopon#1#2 {\deffngeneral{\putwordon\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} }
		7009
		7010	% \deffngeneral {subind}category name args
		7011	%
		7012	\def\deffngeneral#1#2 #3 #4\endheader{%
		7013	% Remember that \dosubind{fn}{foo}{} is equivalent to \doind{fn}{foo}.
		7014	\dosubind{fn}{\code{#3}}{#1}%
		7015	\defname{#2}{}{#3}\magicamp\defunargs{#4\unskip}%
		7016	}
		7017
		7018	% Typed functions:
		7019
		7020	% @deftypefn category type name args
		7021	\makedefun{deftypefn}{\deftypefngeneral{}}
		7022
		7023	% @deftypeop category class type name args
		7024	\makedefun{deftypeop}#1 {\deftypeopon{#1\ \putwordon}}
		7025
		7026	% \deftypeopon {category on}class type name args
		7027	\def\deftypeopon#1#2 {\deftypefngeneral{\putwordon\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} }
		7028
		7029	% \deftypefngeneral {subind}category type name args
		7030	%
		7031	\def\deftypefngeneral#1#2 #3 #4 #5\endheader{%
		7032	\dosubind{fn}{\code{#4}}{#1}%
		7033	\doingtypefntrue
		7034	\defname{#2}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}%
		7035	}
		7036
		7037	% Typed variables:
		7038
		7039	% @deftypevr category type var args
		7040	\makedefun{deftypevr}{\deftypecvgeneral{}}
		7041
		7042	% @deftypecv category class type var args
		7043	\makedefun{deftypecv}#1 {\deftypecvof{#1\ \putwordof}}
		7044
		7045	% \deftypecvof {category of}class type var args
		7046	\def\deftypecvof#1#2 {\deftypecvgeneral{\putwordof\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} }
		7047
		7048	% \deftypecvgeneral {subind}category type var args
		7049	%
		7050	\def\deftypecvgeneral#1#2 #3 #4 #5\endheader{%
		7051	\dosubind{vr}{\code{#4}}{#1}%
		7052	\defname{#2}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}%
		7053	}
		7054
		7055	% Untyped variables:
		7056
		7057	% @defvr category var args
		7058	\makedefun{defvr}#1 {\deftypevrheader{#1} {} }
		7059
		7060	% @defcv category class var args
		7061	\makedefun{defcv}#1 {\defcvof{#1\ \putwordof}}
		7062
		7063	% \defcvof {category of}class var args
		7064	\def\defcvof#1#2 {\deftypecvof{#1}#2 {} }
		7065
		7066	% Types:
		7067
		7068	% @deftp category name args
		7069	\makedefun{deftp}#1 #2 #3\endheader{%
		7070	\doind{tp}{\code{#2}}%
		7071	\defname{#1}{}{#2}\defunargs{#3\unskip}%
		7072	}
		7073
		7074	% Remaining @defun-like shortcuts:
		7075	\makedefun{defun}{\deffnheader{\putwordDeffunc} }
		7076	\makedefun{defmac}{\deffnheader{\putwordDefmac} }
		7077	\makedefun{defspec}{\deffnheader{\putwordDefspec} }
		7078	\makedefun{deftypefun}{\deftypefnheader{\putwordDeffunc} }
		7079	\makedefun{defvar}{\defvrheader{\putwordDefvar} }
		7080	\makedefun{defopt}{\defvrheader{\putwordDefopt} }
		7081	\makedefun{deftypevar}{\deftypevrheader{\putwordDefvar} }
		7082	\makedefun{defmethod}{\defopon\putwordMethodon}
		7083	\makedefun{deftypemethod}{\deftypeopon\putwordMethodon}
		7084	\makedefun{defivar}{\defcvof\putwordInstanceVariableof}
		7085	\makedefun{deftypeivar}{\deftypecvof\putwordInstanceVariableof}
		7086
		7087	% \defname, which formats the name of the @def (not the args).
		7088	% #1 is the category, such as "Function".
		7089	% #2 is the return type, if any.
		7090	% #3 is the function name.
		7091	%
		7092	% We are followed by (but not passed) the arguments, if any.
		7093	%
		7094	\def\defname#1#2#3{%
		7095	\par
		7096	% Get the values of \leftskip and \rightskip as they were outside the @def...
		7097	\advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent
		7098	%
		7099	% Determine if we are typesetting the return type of a typed function
		7100	% on a line by itself.
		7101	\rettypeownlinefalse
		7102	\ifdoingtypefn % doing a typed function specifically?
		7103	% then check user option for putting return type on its own line:
		7104	\expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxideftypefnnl\endcsname\relax \else
		7105	\rettypeownlinetrue
		7106	\fi
		7107	\fi
		7108	%
		7109	% How we'll format the category name. Putting it in brackets helps
		7110	% distinguish it from the body text that may end up on the next line
		7111	% just below it.
		7112	\def\temp{#1}%
		7113	\setbox0=\hbox{\kern\deflastargmargin \ifx\temp\empty\else [\rm\temp]\fi}
		7114	%
		7115	% Figure out line sizes for the paragraph shape. We'll always have at
		7116	% least two.
		7117	\tempnum = 2
		7118	%
		7119	% The first line needs space for \box0; but if \rightskip is nonzero,
		7120	% we need only space for the part of \box0 which exceeds it:
		7121	\dimen0=\hsize \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0 \advance\dimen0 by \rightskip
		7122	%
		7123	% If doing a return type on its own line, we'll have another line.
		7124	\ifrettypeownline
		7125	\advance\tempnum by 1
		7126	\def\maybeshapeline{0in \hsize}%
		7127	\else
		7128	\def\maybeshapeline{}%
		7129	\fi
		7130	%
		7131	% The continuations:
		7132	\dimen2=\hsize \advance\dimen2 by -\defargsindent
		7133	%
		7134	% The final paragraph shape:
		7135	\parshape \tempnum 0in \dimen0 \maybeshapeline \defargsindent \dimen2
		7136	%
		7137	% Put the category name at the right margin.
		7138	\noindent
		7139	\hbox to 0pt{%
		7140	\hfil\box0 \kern-\hsize
		7141	% \hsize has to be shortened this way:
		7142	\kern\leftskip
		7143	% Intentionally do not respect \rightskip, since we need the space.
		7144	}%
		7145	%
		7146	% Allow all lines to be underfull without complaint:
		7147	\tolerance=10000 \hbadness=10000
		7148	\exdentamount=\defbodyindent
		7149	{%
		7150	% defun fonts. We use typewriter by default (used to be bold) because:
		7151	% . we're printing identifiers, they should be in tt in principle.
		7152	% . in languages with many accents, such as Czech or French, it's
		7153	% common to leave accents off identifiers. The result looks ok in
		7154	% tt, but exceedingly strange in rm.
		7155	% . we don't want -- and --- to be treated as ligatures.
		7156	% . this still does not fix the ?` and !` ligatures, but so far no
		7157	% one has made identifiers using them :).
		7158	\df \tt
		7159	\def\temp{#2}% text of the return type
		7160	\ifx\temp\empty\else
		7161	\tclose{\temp}% typeset the return type
		7162	\ifrettypeownline
		7163	% put return type on its own line; prohibit line break following:
		7164	\hfil\vadjust{\nobreak}\break
		7165	\else
		7166	\space % type on same line, so just followed by a space
		7167	\fi
		7168	\fi % no return type
		7169	#3% output function name
		7170	}%
		7171	{\rm\enskip}% hskip 0.5 em of \tenrm
		7172	%
		7173	\boldbrax
		7174	% arguments will be output next, if any.
		7175	}
		7176
		7177	% Print arguments in slanted roman (not ttsl), inconsistently with using
		7178	% tt for the name. This is because literal text is sometimes needed in
		7179	% the argument list (groff manual), and ttsl and tt are not very
		7180	% distinguishable. Prevent hyphenation at `-' chars.
		7181	%
		7182	\def\defunargs#1{%
		7183	% use sl by default (not ttsl),
		7184	% tt for the names.
		7185	\df \sl \hyphenchar\font=0
		7186	%
		7187	% On the other hand, if an argument has two dashes (for instance), we
		7188	% want a way to get ttsl. We used to recommend @var for that, so
		7189	% leave the code in, but it's strange for @var to lead to typewriter.
		7190	% Nowadays we recommend @code, since the difference between a ttsl hyphen
		7191	% and a tt hyphen is pretty tiny. @code also disables ?` !`.
		7192	\def\var##1{{\setupmarkupstyle{var}\ttslanted{##1}}}%
		7193	#1%
		7194	\sl\hyphenchar\font=45
		7195	}
		7196
		7197	% We want ()&[] to print specially on the defun line.
		7198	%
		7199	\def\activeparens{%
		7200	\catcode`\(=\active \catcode`\)=\active
		7201	\catcode`\[=\active \catcode`\]=\active
		7202	\catcode`\&=\active
		7203	}
		7204
		7205	% Make control sequences which act like normal parenthesis chars.
		7206	\let\lparen = ( \let\rparen = )
		7207
		7208	% Be sure that we always have a definition for `(', etc. For example,
		7209	% if the fn name has parens in it, \boldbrax will not be in effect yet,
		7210	% so TeX would otherwise complain about undefined control sequence.
		7211	{
		7212	\activeparens
		7213	\global\let(=\lparen \global\let)=\rparen
		7214	\global\let[=\lbrack \global\let]=\rbrack
		7215	\global\let& = \&
		7216
		7217	\gdef\boldbrax{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb}
		7218	\gdef\magicamp{\let&=\amprm}
		7219	}
		7220
		7221	\newcount\parencount
		7222
		7223	% If we encounter &foo, then turn on ()-hacking afterwards
		7224	\newif\ifampseen
		7225	\def\amprm#1 {\ampseentrue{\bf\&#1 }}
		7226
		7227	\def\parenfont{%
		7228	\ifampseen
		7229	% At the first level, print parens in roman,
		7230	% otherwise use the default font.
		7231	\ifnum \parencount=1 \rm \fi
		7232	\else
		7233	% The \sf parens (in \boldbrax) actually are a little bolder than
		7234	% the contained text. This is especially needed for [ and ] .
		7235	\sf
		7236	\fi
		7237	}
		7238	\def\infirstlevel#1{%
		7239	\ifampseen
		7240	\ifnum\parencount=1
		7241	#1%
		7242	\fi
		7243	\fi
		7244	}
		7245	\def\bfafterword#1 {#1 \bf}
		7246
		7247	\def\opnr{%
		7248	\global\advance\parencount by 1
		7249	{\parenfont(}%
		7250	\infirstlevel \bfafterword
		7251	}
		7252	\def\clnr{%
		7253	{\parenfont)}%
		7254	\infirstlevel \sl
		7255	\global\advance\parencount by -1
		7256	}
		7257
		7258	\newcount\brackcount
		7259	\def\lbrb{%
		7260	\global\advance\brackcount by 1
		7261	{\bf[}%
		7262	}
		7263	\def\rbrb{%
		7264	{\bf]}%
		7265	\global\advance\brackcount by -1
		7266	}
		7267
		7268	\def\checkparencounts{%
		7269	\ifnum\parencount=0 \else \badparencount \fi
		7270	\ifnum\brackcount=0 \else \badbrackcount \fi
		7271	}
		7272	% these should not use \errmessage; the glibc manual, at least, actually
		7273	% has such constructs (when documenting function pointers).
		7274	\def\badparencount{%
		7275	\message{Warning: unbalanced parentheses in @def...}%
		7276	\global\parencount=0
		7277	}
		7278	\def\badbrackcount{%
		7279	\message{Warning: unbalanced square brackets in @def...}%
		7280	\global\brackcount=0
		7281	}
		7282
		7283
		7284	\message{macros,}
		7285	% @macro.
		7286
		7287	% To do this right we need a feature of e-TeX, \scantokens,
		7288	% which we arrange to emulate with a temporary file in ordinary TeX.
		7289	\ifx\eTeXversion\thisisundefined
		7290	\newwrite\macscribble
		7291	\def\scantokens#1{%
		7292	\toks0={#1}%
		7293	\immediate\openout\macscribble=\jobname.tmp
		7294	\immediate\write\macscribble{\the\toks0}%
		7295	\immediate\closeout\macscribble
		7296	\input \jobname.tmp
		7297	}
		7298	\fi
		7299
		7300	\def\scanmacro#1{\begingroup
		7301	\newlinechar`\^^M
		7302	\let\xeatspaces\eatspaces
		7303	%
		7304	% Undo catcode changes of \startcontents and \doprintindex
		7305	% When called from @insertcopying or (short)caption, we need active
		7306	% backslash to get it printed correctly. Previously, we had
		7307	% \catcode`\\=\other instead. We'll see whether a problem appears
		7308	% with macro expansion. --kasal, 19aug04
		7309	\catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\active \escapechar=`\@
		7310	%
		7311	% ... and for \example:
		7312	\spaceisspace
		7313	%
		7314	% The \empty here causes a following catcode 5 newline to be eaten as
		7315	% part of reading whitespace after a control sequence. It does not
		7316	% eat a catcode 13 newline. There's no good way to handle the two
		7317	% cases (untried: maybe e-TeX's \everyeof could help, though plain TeX
		7318	% would then have different behavior). See the Macro Details node in
		7319	% the manual for the workaround we recommend for macros and
		7320	% line-oriented commands.
		7321	%
		7322	\scantokens{#1\empty}%
		7323	\endgroup}
		7324
		7325	\def\scanexp#1{%
		7326	\edef\temp{\noexpand\scanmacro{#1}}%
		7327	\temp
		7328	}
		7329
		7330	\newcount\paramno % Count of parameters
		7331	\newtoks\macname % Macro name
		7332	\newif\ifrecursive % Is it recursive?
		7333
		7334	% List of all defined macros in the form
		7335	% \definedummyword\macro1\definedummyword\macro2...
		7336	% Currently is also contains all @aliases; the list can be split
		7337	% if there is a need.
		7338	\def\macrolist{}
		7339
		7340	% Add the macro to \macrolist
		7341	\def\addtomacrolist#1{\expandafter \addtomacrolistxxx \csname#1\endcsname}
		7342	\def\addtomacrolistxxx#1{%
		7343	\toks0 = \expandafter{\macrolist\definedummyword#1}%
		7344	\xdef\macrolist{\the\toks0}%
		7345	}
		7346
		7347	% Utility routines.
		7348	% This does \let #1 = #2, with \csnames; that is,
		7349	% \let \csname#1\endcsname = \csname#2\endcsname
		7350	% (except of course we have to play expansion games).
		7351	%
		7352	\def\cslet#1#2{%
		7353	\expandafter\let
		7354	\csname#1\expandafter\endcsname
		7355	\csname#2\endcsname
		7356	}
		7357
		7358	% Trim leading and trailing spaces off a string.
		7359	% Concepts from aro-bend problem 15 (see CTAN).
		7360	{\catcode`\@=11
		7361	\gdef\eatspaces #1{\expandafter\trim@\expandafter{#1 }}
		7362	\gdef\trim@ #1{\trim@@ @#1 @ #1 @ @@}
		7363	\gdef\trim@@ #1@ #2@ #3@@{\trim@@@\empty #2 @}
		7364	\def\unbrace#1{#1}
		7365	\unbrace{\gdef\trim@@@ #1 } #2@{#1}
		7366	}
		7367
		7368	% Trim a single trailing ^^M off a string.
		7369	{\catcode`\^^M=\other \catcode`\Q=3%
		7370	\gdef\eatcr #1{\eatcra #1Q^^MQ}%
		7371	\gdef\eatcra#1^^MQ{\eatcrb#1Q}%
		7372	\gdef\eatcrb#1Q#2Q{#1}%
		7373	}
		7374
		7375	% Macro bodies are absorbed as an argument in a context where
		7376	% all characters are catcode 10, 11 or 12, except \ which is active
		7377	% (as in normal texinfo). It is necessary to change the definition of \
		7378	% to recognize macro arguments; this is the job of \mbodybackslash.
		7379	%
		7380	% Non-ASCII encodings make 8-bit characters active, so un-activate
		7381	% them to avoid their expansion. Must do this non-globally, to
		7382	% confine the change to the current group.
		7383	%
		7384	% It's necessary to have hard CRs when the macro is executed. This is
		7385	% done by making ^^M (\endlinechar) catcode 12 when reading the macro
		7386	% body, and then making it the \newlinechar in \scanmacro.
		7387	%
		7388	\def\scanctxt{% used as subroutine
		7389	\catcode`\"=\other
		7390	\catcode`\+=\other
		7391	\catcode`\<=\other
		7392	\catcode`\>=\other
		7393	\catcode`\@=\other
		7394	\catcode`\^=\other
		7395	\catcode`\_=\other
		7396	\catcode`\|=\other
		7397	\catcode`\~=\other
		7398	\ifx\declaredencoding\ascii \else \setnonasciicharscatcodenonglobal\other \fi
		7399	}
		7400
		7401	\def\scanargctxt{% used for copying and captions, not macros.
		7402	\scanctxt
		7403	\catcode`\\=\other
		7404	\catcode`\^^M=\other
		7405	}
		7406
		7407	\def\macrobodyctxt{% used for @macro definitions
		7408	\scanctxt
		7409	\catcode`\{=\other
		7410	\catcode`\}=\other
		7411	\catcode`\^^M=\other
		7412	\usembodybackslash
		7413	}
		7414
		7415	\def\macroargctxt{% used when scanning invocations
		7416	\scanctxt
		7417	\catcode`\\=0
		7418	}
		7419	% why catcode 0 for \ in the above? To recognize \\ \{ \} as "escapes"
		7420	% for the single characters \ { }. Thus, we end up with the "commands"
		7421	% that would be written @\ @{ @} in a Texinfo document.
		7422	%
		7423	% We already have @{ and @}. For @\, we define it here, and only for
		7424	% this purpose, to produce a typewriter backslash (so, the @\ that we
		7425	% define for @math can't be used with @macro calls):
		7426	%
		7427	\def\\{\normalbackslash}%
		7428	%
		7429	% We would like to do this for \, too, since that is what makeinfo does.
		7430	% But it is not possible, because Texinfo already has a command @, for a
		7431	% cedilla accent. Documents must use @comma{} instead.
		7432	%
		7433	% \anythingelse will almost certainly be an error of some kind.
		7434
		7435	% \mbodybackslash is the definition of \ in @macro bodies.
		7436	% It maps \foo\ => \csname macarg.foo\endcsname => #N
		7437	% where N is the macro parameter number.
		7438	% We define \csname macarg.\endcsname to be \realbackslash, so
		7439	% \\ in macro replacement text gets you a backslash.
		7440	%
		7441	{\catcode`@=0 @catcode`@\=@active
		7442	@gdef@usembodybackslash{@let\=@mbodybackslash}
		7443	@gdef@mbodybackslash#1\{@csname macarg.#1@endcsname}
		7444	}
		7445	\expandafter\def\csname macarg.\endcsname{\realbackslash}
		7446
		7447	\def\margbackslash#1{\char`\#1 }
		7448
		7449	\def\macro{\recursivefalse\parsearg\macroxxx}
		7450	\def\rmacro{\recursivetrue\parsearg\macroxxx}
		7451
		7452	\def\macroxxx#1{%
		7453	\getargs{#1}% now \macname is the macname and \argl the arglist
		7454	\ifx\argl\empty % no arguments
		7455	\paramno=0\relax
		7456	\else
		7457	\expandafter\parsemargdef \argl;%
		7458	\if\paramno>256\relax
		7459	\ifx\eTeXversion\thisisundefined
		7460	\errhelp = \EMsimple
		7461	\errmessage{You need eTeX to compile a file with macros with more than 256 arguments}
		7462	\fi
		7463	\fi
		7464	\fi
		7465	\if1\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname
		7466	\message{Warning: redefining \the\macname}%
		7467	\else
		7468	\expandafter\ifx\csname \the\macname\endcsname \relax
		7469	\else \errmessage{Macro name \the\macname\space already defined}\fi
		7470	\global\cslet{macsave.\the\macname}{\the\macname}%
		7471	\global\expandafter\let\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname=1%
		7472	\addtomacrolist{\the\macname}%
		7473	\fi
		7474	\begingroup \macrobodyctxt
		7475	\ifrecursive \expandafter\parsermacbody
		7476	\else \expandafter\parsemacbody
		7477	\fi}
		7478
		7479	\parseargdef\unmacro{%
		7480	\if1\csname ismacro.#1\endcsname
		7481	\global\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}%
		7482	\global\expandafter\let \csname ismacro.#1\endcsname=0%
		7483	% Remove the macro name from \macrolist:
		7484	\begingroup
		7485	\expandafter\let\csname#1\endcsname \relax
		7486	\let\definedummyword\unmacrodo
		7487	\xdef\macrolist{\macrolist}%
		7488	\endgroup
		7489	\else
		7490	\errmessage{Macro #1 not defined}%
		7491	\fi
		7492	}
		7493
		7494	% Called by \do from \dounmacro on each macro. The idea is to omit any
		7495	% macro definitions that have been changed to \relax.
		7496	%
		7497	\def\unmacrodo#1{%
		7498	\ifx #1\relax
		7499	% remove this
		7500	\else
		7501	\noexpand\definedummyword \noexpand#1%
		7502	\fi
		7503	}
		7504
		7505	% This makes use of the obscure feature that if the last token of a
		7506	% <parameter list> is #, then the preceding argument is delimited by
		7507	% an opening brace, and that opening brace is not consumed.
		7508	\def\getargs#1{\getargsxxx#1{}}
		7509	\def\getargsxxx#1#{\getmacname #1 \relax\getmacargs}
		7510	\def\getmacname#1 #2\relax{\macname={#1}}
		7511	\def\getmacargs#1{\def\argl{#1}}
		7512
		7513	% For macro processing make @ a letter so that we can make Texinfo private macro names.
		7514	\edef\texiatcatcode{\the\catcode`\@}
		7515	\catcode `@=11\relax
		7516
		7517	% Parse the optional {params} list. Set up \paramno and \paramlist
		7518	% so \defmacro knows what to do. Define \macarg.BLAH for each BLAH
		7519	% in the params list to some hook where the argument is to be expanded. If
		7520	% there are less than 10 arguments that hook is to be replaced by ##N where N
		7521	% is the position in that list, that is to say the macro arguments are to be
		7522	% defined `a la TeX in the macro body.
		7523	%
		7524	% That gets used by \mbodybackslash (above).
		7525	%
		7526	% We need to get `macro parameter char #' into several definitions.
		7527	% The technique used is stolen from LaTeX: let \hash be something
		7528	% unexpandable, insert that wherever you need a #, and then redefine
		7529	% it to # just before using the token list produced.
		7530	%
		7531	% The same technique is used to protect \eatspaces till just before
		7532	% the macro is used.
		7533	%
		7534	% If there are 10 or more arguments, a different technique is used, where the
		7535	% hook remains in the body, and when macro is to be expanded the body is
		7536	% processed again to replace the arguments.
		7537	%
		7538	% In that case, the hook is \the\toks N-1, and we simply set \toks N-1 to the
		7539	% argument N value and then \edef the body (nothing else will expand because of
		7540	% the catcode regime underwhich the body was input).
		7541	%
		7542	% If you compile with TeX (not eTeX), and you have macros with 10 or more
		7543	% arguments, no macro can have more than 256 arguments (else error).
		7544	\def\parsemargdef#1;{%
		7545	\paramno=0\def\paramlist{}%
		7546	\let\hash\relax
		7547	\let\xeatspaces\relax
		7548	\parsemargdefxxx#1,;,%
		7549	% In case that there are 10 or more arguments we parse again the arguments
		7550	% list to set new definitions for the \macarg.BLAH macros corresponding to
		7551	% each BLAH argument. It was anyhow needed to parse already once this list
		7552	% in order to count the arguments, and as macros with at most 9 arguments
		7553	% are by far more frequent than macro with 10 or more arguments, defining
		7554	% twice the \macarg.BLAH macros does not cost too much processing power.
		7555	\ifnum\paramno<10\relax\else
		7556	\paramno0\relax
		7557	\parsemmanyargdef@@#1,;,% 10 or more arguments
		7558	\fi
		7559	}
		7560	\def\parsemargdefxxx#1,{%
		7561	\if#1;\let\next=\relax
		7562	\else \let\next=\parsemargdefxxx
		7563	\advance\paramno by 1
		7564	\expandafter\edef\csname macarg.\eatspaces{#1}\endcsname
		7565	{\xeatspaces{\hash\the\paramno}}%
		7566	\edef\paramlist{\paramlist\hash\the\paramno,}%
		7567	\fi\next}
		7568
		7569	\def\parsemmanyargdef@@#1,{%
		7570	\if#1;\let\next=\relax
		7571	\else
		7572	\let\next=\parsemmanyargdef@@
		7573	\edef\tempb{\eatspaces{#1}}%
		7574	\expandafter\def\expandafter\tempa
		7575	\expandafter{\csname macarg.\tempb\endcsname}%
		7576	% Note that we need some extra \noexpand\noexpand, this is because we
		7577	% don't want \the to be expanded in the \parsermacbody as it uses an
		7578	% \xdef .
		7579	\expandafter\edef\tempa
		7580	{\noexpand\noexpand\noexpand\the\toks\the\paramno}%
		7581	\advance\paramno by 1\relax
		7582	\fi\next}
		7583
		7584	% These two commands read recursive and nonrecursive macro bodies.
		7585	% (They're different since rec and nonrec macros end differently.)
		7586	%
		7587
		7588	\catcode `\@\texiatcatcode
		7589	\long\def\parsemacbody#1@end macro%
		7590	{\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}%
		7591	\long\def\parsermacbody#1@end rmacro%
		7592	{\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}%
		7593	\catcode `\@=11\relax
		7594
		7595	\let\endargs@\relax
		7596	\let\nil@\relax
		7597	\def\nilm@{\nil@}%
		7598	\long\def\nillm@{\nil@}%
		7599
		7600	% This macro is expanded during the Texinfo macro expansion, not during its
		7601	% definition. It gets all the arguments values and assigns them to macros
		7602	% macarg.ARGNAME
		7603	%
		7604	% #1 is the macro name
		7605	% #2 is the list of argument names
		7606	% #3 is the list of argument values
		7607	\def\getargvals@#1#2#3{%
		7608	\def\macargdeflist@{}%
		7609	\def\saveparamlist@{#2}% Need to keep a copy for parameter expansion.
		7610	\def\paramlist{#2,\nil@}%
		7611	\def\macroname{#1}%
		7612	\begingroup
		7613	\macroargctxt
		7614	\def\argvaluelist{#3,\nil@}%
		7615	\def\@tempa{#3}%
		7616	\ifx\@tempa\empty
		7617	\setemptyargvalues@
		7618	\else
		7619	\getargvals@@
		7620	\fi
		7621	}
		7622
		7623	%
		7624	\def\getargvals@@{%
		7625	\ifx\paramlist\nilm@
		7626	% Some sanity check needed here that \argvaluelist is also empty.
		7627	\ifx\argvaluelist\nillm@
		7628	\else
		7629	\errhelp = \EMsimple
		7630	\errmessage{Too many arguments in macro `\macroname'!}%
		7631	\fi
		7632	\let\next\macargexpandinbody@
		7633	\else
		7634	\ifx\argvaluelist\nillm@
		7635	% No more arguments values passed to macro. Set remaining named-arg
		7636	% macros to empty.
		7637	\let\next\setemptyargvalues@
		7638	\else
		7639	% pop current arg name into \@tempb
		7640	\def\@tempa##1{\pop@{\@tempb}{\paramlist}##1\endargs@}%
		7641	\expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{\paramlist}%
		7642	% pop current argument value into \@tempc
		7643	\def\@tempa##1{\longpop@{\@tempc}{\argvaluelist}##1\endargs@}%
		7644	\expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{\argvaluelist}%
		7645	% Here \@tempb is the current arg name and \@tempc is the current arg value.
		7646	% First place the new argument macro definition into \@tempd
		7647	\expandafter\macname\expandafter{\@tempc}%
		7648	\expandafter\let\csname macarg.\@tempb\endcsname\relax
		7649	\expandafter\def\expandafter\@tempe\expandafter{%
		7650	\csname macarg.\@tempb\endcsname}%
		7651	\edef\@tempd{\long\def\@tempe{\the\macname}}%
		7652	\push@\@tempd\macargdeflist@
		7653	\let\next\getargvals@@
		7654	\fi
		7655	\fi
		7656	\next
		7657	}
		7658
		7659	\def\push@#1#2{%
		7660	\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\def
		7661	\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter#2%
		7662	\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter{%
		7663	\expandafter#1#2}%
		7664	}
		7665
		7666	% Replace arguments by their values in the macro body, and place the result
		7667	% in macro \@tempa
		7668	\def\macvalstoargs@{%
		7669	% To do this we use the property that token registers that are \the'ed
		7670	% within an \edef expand only once. So we are going to place all argument
		7671	% values into respective token registers.
		7672	%
		7673	% First we save the token context, and initialize argument numbering.
		7674	\begingroup
		7675	\paramno0\relax
		7676	% Then, for each argument number #N, we place the corresponding argument
		7677	% value into a new token list register \toks#N
		7678	\expandafter\putargsintokens@\saveparamlist@,;,%
		7679	% Then, we expand the body so that argument are replaced by their
		7680	% values. The trick for values not to be expanded themselves is that they
		7681	% are within tokens and that tokens expand only once in an \edef .
		7682	\edef\@tempc{\csname mac.\macroname .body\endcsname}%
		7683	% Now we restore the token stack pointer to free the token list registers
		7684	% which we have used, but we make sure that expanded body is saved after
		7685	% group.
		7686	\expandafter
		7687	\endgroup
		7688	\expandafter\def\expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{\@tempc}%
		7689	}
		7690
		7691	\def\macargexpandinbody@{%
		7692	%% Define the named-macro outside of this group and then close this group.
		7693	\expandafter
		7694	\endgroup
		7695	\macargdeflist@
		7696	% First the replace in body the macro arguments by their values, the result
		7697	% is in \@tempa .
		7698	\macvalstoargs@
		7699	% Then we point at the \norecurse or \gobble (for recursive) macro value
		7700	% with \@tempb .
		7701	\expandafter\let\expandafter\@tempb\csname mac.\macroname .recurse\endcsname
		7702	% Depending on whether it is recursive or not, we need some tailing
		7703	% \egroup .
		7704	\ifx\@tempb\gobble
		7705	\let\@tempc\relax
		7706	\else
		7707	\let\@tempc\egroup
		7708	\fi
		7709	% And now we do the real job:
		7710	\edef\@tempd{\noexpand\@tempb{\macroname}\noexpand\scanmacro{\@tempa}\@tempc}%
		7711	\@tempd
		7712	}
		7713
		7714	\def\putargsintokens@#1,{%
		7715	\if#1;\let\next\relax
		7716	\else
		7717	\let\next\putargsintokens@
		7718	% First we allocate the new token list register, and give it a temporary
		7719	% alias \@tempb .
		7720	\toksdef\@tempb\the\paramno
		7721	% Then we place the argument value into that token list register.
		7722	\expandafter\let\expandafter\@tempa\csname macarg.#1\endcsname
		7723	\expandafter\@tempb\expandafter{\@tempa}%
		7724	\advance\paramno by 1\relax
		7725	\fi
		7726	\next
		7727	}
		7728
		7729	% Save the token stack pointer into macro #1
		7730	\def\texisavetoksstackpoint#1{\edef#1{\the\@cclvi}}
		7731	% Restore the token stack pointer from number in macro #1
		7732	\def\texirestoretoksstackpoint#1{\expandafter\mathchardef\expandafter\@cclvi#1\relax}
		7733	% newtoks that can be used non \outer .
		7734	\def\texinonouternewtoks{\alloc@ 5\toks \toksdef \@cclvi}
		7735
		7736	% Tailing missing arguments are set to empty
		7737	\def\setemptyargvalues@{%
		7738	\ifx\paramlist\nilm@
		7739	\let\next\macargexpandinbody@
		7740	\else
		7741	\expandafter\setemptyargvaluesparser@\paramlist\endargs@
		7742	\let\next\setemptyargvalues@
		7743	\fi
		7744	\next
		7745	}
		7746
		7747	\def\setemptyargvaluesparser@#1,#2\endargs@{%
		7748	\expandafter\def\expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{%
		7749	\expandafter\def\csname macarg.#1\endcsname{}}%
		7750	\push@\@tempa\macargdeflist@
		7751	\def\paramlist{#2}%
		7752	}
		7753
		7754	% #1 is the element target macro
		7755	% #2 is the list macro
		7756	% #3,#4\endargs@ is the list value
		7757	\def\pop@#1#2#3,#4\endargs@{%
		7758	\def#1{#3}%
		7759	\def#2{#4}%
		7760	}
		7761	\long\def\longpop@#1#2#3,#4\endargs@{%
		7762	\long\def#1{#3}%
		7763	\long\def#2{#4}%
		7764	}
		7765
		7766	% This defines a Texinfo @macro. There are eight cases: recursive and
		7767	% nonrecursive macros of zero, one, up to nine, and many arguments.
		7768	% Much magic with \expandafter here.
		7769	% \xdef is used so that macro definitions will survive the file
		7770	% they're defined in; @include reads the file inside a group.
		7771	%
		7772	\def\defmacro{%
		7773	\let\hash=##% convert placeholders to macro parameter chars
		7774	\ifrecursive
		7775	\ifcase\paramno
		7776	% 0
		7777	\expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
		7778	\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
		7779	\or % 1
		7780	\expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
		7781	\bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
		7782	\noexpand\braceorline
		7783	\expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}%
		7784	\expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{%
		7785	\egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
		7786	\else
		7787	\ifnum\paramno<10\relax % at most 9
		7788	\expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
		7789	\bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
		7790	\noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}%
		7791	\expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{%
		7792	\expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}%
		7793	\expandafter\expandafter
		7794	\expandafter\xdef
		7795	\expandafter\expandafter
		7796	\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname
		7797	\paramlist{\egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
		7798	\else % 10 or more
		7799	\expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
		7800	\noexpand\getargvals@{\the\macname}{\argl}%
		7801	}%
		7802	\global\expandafter\let\csname mac.\the\macname .body\endcsname\temp
		7803	\global\expandafter\let\csname mac.\the\macname .recurse\endcsname\gobble
		7804	\fi
		7805	\fi
		7806	\else
		7807	\ifcase\paramno
		7808	% 0
		7809	\expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
		7810	\noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
		7811	\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
		7812	\or % 1
		7813	\expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
		7814	\bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
		7815	\noexpand\braceorline
		7816	\expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}%
		7817	\expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{%
		7818	\egroup
		7819	\noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
		7820	\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
		7821	\else % at most 9
		7822	\ifnum\paramno<10\relax
		7823	\expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
		7824	\bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
		7825	\expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}%
		7826	\expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{%
		7827	\expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}%
		7828	\expandafter\expandafter
		7829	\expandafter\xdef
		7830	\expandafter\expandafter
		7831	\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname
		7832	\paramlist{%
		7833	\egroup
		7834	\noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
		7835	\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
		7836	\else % 10 or more:
		7837	\expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
		7838	\noexpand\getargvals@{\the\macname}{\argl}%
		7839	}%
		7840	\global\expandafter\let\csname mac.\the\macname .body\endcsname\temp
		7841	\global\expandafter\let\csname mac.\the\macname .recurse\endcsname\norecurse
		7842	\fi
		7843	\fi
		7844	\fi}
		7845
		7846	\catcode `\@\texiatcatcode\relax
		7847
		7848	\def\norecurse#1{\bgroup\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}}
		7849
		7850	% \braceorline decides whether the next nonwhitespace character is a
		7851	% {. If so it reads up to the closing }, if not, it reads the whole
		7852	% line. Whatever was read is then fed to the next control sequence
		7853	% as an argument (by \parsebrace or \parsearg).
		7854	%
		7855	\def\braceorline#1{\let\macnamexxx=#1\futurelet\nchar\braceorlinexxx}
		7856	\def\braceorlinexxx{%
		7857	\ifx\nchar\bgroup\else
		7858	\expandafter\parsearg
		7859	\fi \macnamexxx}
		7860
		7861
		7862	% @alias.
		7863	% We need some trickery to remove the optional spaces around the equal
		7864	% sign. Make them active and then expand them all to nothing.
		7865	%
		7866	\def\alias{\parseargusing\obeyspaces\aliasxxx}
		7867	\def\aliasxxx #1{\aliasyyy#1\relax}
		7868	\def\aliasyyy #1=#2\relax{%
		7869	{%
		7870	\expandafter\let\obeyedspace=\empty
		7871	\addtomacrolist{#1}%
		7872	\xdef\next{\global\let\makecsname{#1}=\makecsname{#2}}%
		7873	}%
		7874	\next
		7875	}
		7876
		7877
		7878	\message{cross references,}
		7879
		7880	\newwrite\auxfile
		7881	\newif\ifhavexrefs % True if xref values are known.
		7882	\newif\ifwarnedxrefs % True if we warned once that they aren't known.
		7883
		7884	% @inforef is relatively simple.
		7885	\def\inforef #1{\inforefzzz #1,,,,**}
		7886	\def\inforefzzz #1,#2,#3,#4**{%
		7887	\putwordSee{} \putwordInfo{} \putwordfile{} \file{\ignorespaces #3{}},
		7888	node \samp{\ignorespaces#1{}}}
		7889
		7890	% @node's only job in TeX is to define \lastnode, which is used in
		7891	% cross-references. The @node line might or might not have commas, and
		7892	% might or might not have spaces before the first comma, like:
		7893	% @node foo , bar , ...
		7894	% We don't want such trailing spaces in the node name.
		7895	%
		7896	\parseargdef\node{\checkenv{}\donode #1 ,\finishnodeparse}
		7897	%
		7898	% also remove a trailing comma, in case of something like this:
		7899	% @node Help-Cross, , , Cross-refs
		7900	\def\donode#1 ,#2\finishnodeparse{\dodonode #1,\finishnodeparse}
		7901	\def\dodonode#1,#2\finishnodeparse{\gdef\lastnode{#1}}
		7902
		7903	\let\nwnode=\node
		7904	\let\lastnode=\empty
		7905
		7906	% Write a cross-reference definition for the current node. #1 is the
		7907	% type (Ynumbered, Yappendix, Ynothing).
		7908	%
		7909	\def\donoderef#1{%
		7910	\ifx\lastnode\empty\else
		7911	\setref{\lastnode}{#1}%
		7912	\global\let\lastnode=\empty
		7913	\fi
		7914	}
		7915
		7916	% @anchor{NAME} -- define xref target at arbitrary point.
		7917	%
		7918	\newcount\savesfregister
		7919	%
		7920	\def\savesf{\relax \ifhmode \savesfregister=\spacefactor \fi}
		7921	\def\restoresf{\relax \ifhmode \spacefactor=\savesfregister \fi}
		7922	\def\anchor#1{\savesf \setref{#1}{Ynothing}\restoresf \ignorespaces}
		7923
		7924	% \setref{NAME}{SNT} defines a cross-reference point NAME (a node or an
		7925	% anchor), which consists of three parts:
		7926	% 1) NAME-title - the current sectioning name taken from \lastsection,
		7927	% or the anchor name.
		7928	% 2) NAME-snt - section number and type, passed as the SNT arg, or
		7929	% empty for anchors.
		7930	% 3) NAME-pg - the page number.
		7931	%
		7932	% This is called from \donoderef, \anchor, and \dofloat. In the case of
		7933	% floats, there is an additional part, which is not written here:
		7934	% 4) NAME-lof - the text as it should appear in a @listoffloats.
		7935	%
		7936	\def\setref#1#2{%
		7937	\pdfmkdest{#1}%
		7938	\iflinks
		7939	{%
		7940	\atdummies % preserve commands, but don't expand them
		7941	\edef\writexrdef##1##2{%
		7942	\write\auxfile{@xrdef{#1-% #1 of \setref, expanded by the \edef
		7943	##1}{##2}}% these are parameters of \writexrdef
		7944	}%
		7945	\toks0 = \expandafter{\lastsection}%
		7946	\immediate \writexrdef{title}{\the\toks0 }%
		7947	\immediate \writexrdef{snt}{\csname #2\endcsname}% \Ynumbered etc.
		7948	\safewhatsit{\writexrdef{pg}{\folio}}% will be written later, at \shipout
		7949	}%
		7950	\fi
		7951	}
		7952
		7953	% @xrefautosectiontitle on|off says whether @section(ing) names are used
		7954	% automatically in xrefs, if the third arg is not explicitly specified.
		7955	% This was provided as a "secret" @set xref-automatic-section-title
		7956	% variable, now it's official.
		7957	%
		7958	\parseargdef\xrefautomaticsectiontitle{%
		7959	\def\temp{#1}%
		7960	\ifx\temp\onword
		7961	\expandafter\let\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname
		7962	= \empty
		7963	\else\ifx\temp\offword
		7964	\expandafter\let\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname
		7965	= \relax
		7966	\else
		7967	\errhelp = \EMsimple
		7968	\errmessage{Unknown @xrefautomaticsectiontitle value `\temp',
		7969	must be on|off}%
		7970	\fi\fi
		7971	}
		7972
		7973	%
		7974	% @xref, @pxref, and @ref generate cross-references. For \xrefX, #1 is
		7975	% the node name, #2 the name of the Info cross-reference, #3 the printed
		7976	% node name, #4 the name of the Info file, #5 the name of the printed
		7977	% manual. All but the node name can be omitted.
		7978	%
		7979	\def\pxref#1{\putwordsee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
		7980	\def\xref#1{\putwordSee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
		7981	\def\ref#1{\xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
		7982	%
		7983	\newbox\toprefbox
		7984	\newbox\printedrefnamebox
		7985	\newbox\infofilenamebox
		7986	\newbox\printedmanualbox
		7987	%
		7988	\def\xrefX[#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6]{\begingroup
		7989	\unsepspaces
		7990	%
		7991	% Get args without leading/trailing spaces.
		7992	\def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #3}%
		7993	\setbox\printedrefnamebox = \hbox{\printedrefname\unskip}%
		7994	%
		7995	\def\infofilename{\ignorespaces #4}%
		7996	\setbox\infofilenamebox = \hbox{\infofilename\unskip}%
		7997	%
		7998	\def\printedmanual{\ignorespaces #5}%
		7999	\setbox\printedmanualbox = \hbox{\printedmanual\unskip}%
		8000	%
		8001	% If the printed reference name (arg #3) was not explicitly given in
		8002	% the @xref, figure out what we want to use.
		8003	\ifdim \wd\printedrefnamebox = 0pt
		8004	% No printed node name was explicitly given.
		8005	\expandafter\ifx\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname \relax
		8006	% Not auto section-title: use node name inside the square brackets.
		8007	\def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}%
		8008	\else
		8009	% Auto section-title: use chapter/section title inside
		8010	% the square brackets if we have it.
		8011	\ifdim \wd\printedmanualbox > 0pt
		8012	% It is in another manual, so we don't have it; use node name.
		8013	\def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}%
		8014	\else
		8015	\ifhavexrefs
		8016	% We (should) know the real title if we have the xref values.
		8017	\def\printedrefname{\refx{#1-title}{}}%
		8018	\else
		8019	% Otherwise just copy the Info node name.
		8020	\def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}%
		8021	\fi%
		8022	\fi
		8023	\fi
		8024	\fi
		8025	%
		8026	% Make link in pdf output.
		8027	\ifpdf
		8028	{\indexnofonts
		8029	\turnoffactive
		8030	\makevalueexpandable
		8031	% This expands tokens, so do it after making catcode changes, so _
		8032	% etc. don't get their TeX definitions. This ignores all spaces in
		8033	% #4, including (wrongly) those in the middle of the filename.
		8034	\getfilename{#4}%
		8035	%
		8036	% This (wrongly) does not take account of leading or trailing
		8037	% spaces in #1, which should be ignored.
		8038	\edef\pdfxrefdest{#1}%
		8039	\ifx\pdfxrefdest\empty
		8040	\def\pdfxrefdest{Top}% no empty targets
		8041	\else
		8042	\txiescapepdf\pdfxrefdest % escape PDF special chars
		8043	\fi
		8044	%
		8045	\leavevmode
		8046	\startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}%
		8047	\ifnum\filenamelength>0
		8048	goto file{\the\filename.pdf} name{\pdfxrefdest}%
		8049	\else
		8050	goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\pdfxrefdest}}%
		8051	\fi
		8052	}%
		8053	\setcolor{\linkcolor}%
		8054	\fi
		8055	%
		8056	% Float references are printed completely differently: "Figure 1.2"
		8057	% instead of "[somenode], p.3". We distinguish them by the
		8058	% LABEL-title being set to a magic string.
		8059	{%
		8060	% Have to otherify everything special to allow the \csname to
		8061	% include an _ in the xref name, etc.
		8062	\indexnofonts
		8063	\turnoffactive
		8064	\expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\Xthisreftitle
		8065	\csname XR#1-title\endcsname
		8066	}%
		8067	\iffloat\Xthisreftitle
		8068	% If the user specified the print name (third arg) to the ref,
		8069	% print it instead of our usual "Figure 1.2".
		8070	\ifdim\wd\printedrefnamebox = 0pt
		8071	\refx{#1-snt}{}%
		8072	\else
		8073	\printedrefname
		8074	\fi
		8075	%
		8076	% If the user also gave the printed manual name (fifth arg), append
		8077	% "in MANUALNAME".
		8078	\ifdim \wd\printedmanualbox > 0pt
		8079	\space \putwordin{} \cite{\printedmanual}%
		8080	\fi
		8081	\else
		8082	% node/anchor (non-float) references.
		8083	%
		8084	% If we use \unhbox to print the node names, TeX does not insert
		8085	% empty discretionaries after hyphens, which means that it will not
		8086	% find a line break at a hyphen in a node names. Since some manuals
		8087	% are best written with fairly long node names, containing hyphens,
		8088	% this is a loss. Therefore, we give the text of the node name
		8089	% again, so it is as if TeX is seeing it for the first time.
		8090	%
		8091	\ifdim \wd\printedmanualbox > 0pt
		8092	% Cross-manual reference with a printed manual name.
		8093	%
		8094	\crossmanualxref{\cite{\printedmanual\unskip}}%
		8095	%
		8096	\else\ifdim \wd\infofilenamebox > 0pt
		8097	% Cross-manual reference with only an info filename (arg 4), no
		8098	% printed manual name (arg 5). This is essentially the same as
		8099	% the case above; we output the filename, since we have nothing else.
		8100	%
		8101	\crossmanualxref{\code{\infofilename\unskip}}%
		8102	%
		8103	\else
		8104	% Reference within this manual.
		8105	%
		8106	% _ (for example) has to be the character _ for the purposes of the
		8107	% control sequence corresponding to the node, but it has to expand
		8108	% into the usual \leavevmode...\vrule stuff for purposes of
		8109	% printing. So we \turnoffactive for the \refx-snt, back on for the
		8110	% printing, back off for the \refx-pg.
		8111	{\turnoffactive
		8112	% Only output a following space if the -snt ref is nonempty; for
		8113	% @unnumbered and @anchor, it won't be.
		8114	\setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces \refx{#1-snt}{}}%
		8115	\ifdim \wd2 > 0pt \refx{#1-snt}\space\fi
		8116	}%
		8117	% output the `[mynode]' via the macro below so it can be overridden.
		8118	\xrefprintnodename\printedrefname
		8119	%
		8120	% But we always want a comma and a space:
		8121	,\space
		8122	%
		8123	% output the `page 3'.
		8124	\turnoffactive \putwordpage\tie\refx{#1-pg}{}%
		8125	\fi\fi
		8126	\fi
		8127	\endlink
		8128	\endgroup}
		8129
		8130	% Output a cross-manual xref to #1. Used just above (twice).
		8131	%
		8132	% Only include the text "Section ``foo'' in" if the foo is neither
		8133	% missing or Top. Thus, @xref{,,,foo,The Foo Manual} outputs simply
		8134	% "see The Foo Manual", the idea being to refer to the whole manual.
		8135	%
		8136	% But, this being TeX, we can't easily compare our node name against the
		8137	% string "Top" while ignoring the possible spaces before and after in
		8138	% the input. By adding the arbitrary 7sp below, we make it much less
		8139	% likely that a real node name would have the same width as "Top" (e.g.,
		8140	% in a monospaced font). Hopefully it will never happen in practice.
		8141	%
		8142	% For the same basic reason, we retypeset the "Top" at every
		8143	% reference, since the current font is indeterminate.
		8144	%
		8145	\def\crossmanualxref#1{%
		8146	\setbox\toprefbox = \hbox{Top\kern7sp}%
		8147	\setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces \printedrefname \unskip \kern7sp}%
		8148	\ifdim \wd2 > 7sp % nonempty?
		8149	\ifdim \wd2 = \wd\toprefbox \else % same as Top?
		8150	\putwordSection{} ``\printedrefname'' \putwordin{}\space
		8151	\fi
		8152	\fi
		8153	#1%
		8154	}
		8155
		8156	% This macro is called from \xrefX for the `[nodename]' part of xref
		8157	% output. It's a separate macro only so it can be changed more easily,
		8158	% since square brackets don't work well in some documents. Particularly
		8159	% one that Bob is working on :).
		8160	%
		8161	\def\xrefprintnodename#1{[#1]}
		8162
		8163	% Things referred to by \setref.
		8164	%
		8165	\def\Ynothing{}
		8166	\def\Yomitfromtoc{}
		8167	\def\Ynumbered{%
		8168	\ifnum\secno=0
		8169	\putwordChapter@tie \the\chapno
		8170	\else \ifnum\subsecno=0
		8171	\putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno
		8172	\else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0
		8173	\putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno
		8174	\else
		8175	\putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno
		8176	\fi\fi\fi
		8177	}
		8178	\def\Yappendix{%
		8179	\ifnum\secno=0
		8180	\putwordAppendix@tie @char\the\appendixno{}%
		8181	\else \ifnum\subsecno=0
		8182	\putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno
		8183	\else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0
		8184	\putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno
		8185	\else
		8186	\putwordSection@tie
		8187	@char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno
		8188	\fi\fi\fi
		8189	}
		8190
		8191	% Define \refx{NAME}{SUFFIX} to reference a cross-reference string named NAME.
		8192	% If its value is nonempty, SUFFIX is output afterward.
		8193	%
		8194	\def\refx#1#2{%
		8195	{%
		8196	\indexnofonts
		8197	\otherbackslash
		8198	\expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\thisrefX
		8199	\csname XR#1\endcsname
		8200	}%
		8201	\ifx\thisrefX\relax
		8202	% If not defined, say something at least.
		8203	\angleleft un\-de\-fined\angleright
		8204	\iflinks
		8205	\ifhavexrefs
		8206	{\toks0 = {#1}% avoid expansion of possibly-complex value
		8207	\message{\linenumber Undefined cross reference `\the\toks0'.}}%
		8208	\else
		8209	\ifwarnedxrefs\else
		8210	\global\warnedxrefstrue
		8211	\message{Cross reference values unknown; you must run TeX again.}%
		8212	\fi
		8213	\fi
		8214	\fi
		8215	\else
		8216	% It's defined, so just use it.
		8217	\thisrefX
		8218	\fi
		8219	#2% Output the suffix in any case.
		8220	}
		8221
		8222	% This is the macro invoked by entries in the aux file. Usually it's
		8223	% just a \def (we prepend XR to the control sequence name to avoid
		8224	% collisions). But if this is a float type, we have more work to do.
		8225	%
		8226	\def\xrdef#1#2{%
		8227	{% The node name might contain 8-bit characters, which in our current
		8228	% implementation are changed to commands like @'e. Don't let these
		8229	% mess up the control sequence name.
		8230	\indexnofonts
		8231	\turnoffactive
		8232	\xdef\safexrefname{#1}%
		8233	}%
		8234	%
		8235	\expandafter\gdef\csname XR\safexrefname\endcsname{#2}% remember this xref
		8236	%
		8237	% Was that xref control sequence that we just defined for a float?
		8238	\expandafter\iffloat\csname XR\safexrefname\endcsname
		8239	% it was a float, and we have the (safe) float type in \iffloattype.
		8240	\expandafter\let\expandafter\floatlist
		8241	\csname floatlist\iffloattype\endcsname
		8242	%
		8243	% Is this the first time we've seen this float type?
		8244	\expandafter\ifx\floatlist\relax
		8245	\toks0 = {\do}% yes, so just \do
		8246	\else
		8247	% had it before, so preserve previous elements in list.
		8248	\toks0 = \expandafter{\floatlist\do}%
		8249	\fi
		8250	%
		8251	% Remember this xref in the control sequence \floatlistFLOATTYPE,
		8252	% for later use in \listoffloats.
		8253	\expandafter\xdef\csname floatlist\iffloattype\endcsname{\the\toks0
		8254	{\safexrefname}}%
		8255	\fi
		8256	}
		8257
		8258	% Read the last existing aux file, if any. No error if none exists.
		8259	%
		8260	\def\tryauxfile{%
		8261	\openin 1 \jobname.aux
		8262	\ifeof 1 \else
		8263	\readdatafile{aux}%
		8264	\global\havexrefstrue
		8265	\fi
		8266	\closein 1
		8267	}
		8268
		8269	\def\setupdatafile{%
		8270	\catcode`\^^@=\other
		8271	\catcode`\^^A=\other
		8272	\catcode`\^^B=\other
		8273	\catcode`\^^C=\other
		8274	\catcode`\^^D=\other
		8275	\catcode`\^^E=\other
		8276	\catcode`\^^F=\other
		8277	\catcode`\^^G=\other
		8278	\catcode`\^^H=\other
		8279	\catcode`\^^K=\other
		8280	\catcode`\^^L=\other
		8281	\catcode`\^^N=\other
		8282	\catcode`\^^P=\other
		8283	\catcode`\^^Q=\other
		8284	\catcode`\^^R=\other
		8285	\catcode`\^^S=\other
		8286	\catcode`\^^T=\other
		8287	\catcode`\^^U=\other
		8288	\catcode`\^^V=\other
		8289	\catcode`\^^W=\other
		8290	\catcode`\^^X=\other
		8291	\catcode`\^^Z=\other
		8292	\catcode`\^^[=\other
		8293	\catcode`\^^\=\other
		8294	\catcode`\^^]=\other
		8295	\catcode`\^^^=\other
		8296	\catcode`\^^_=\other
		8297	% It was suggested to set the catcode of ^ to 7, which would allow ^^e4 etc.
		8298	% in xref tags, i.e., node names. But since ^^e4 notation isn't
		8299	% supported in the main text, it doesn't seem desirable. Furthermore,
		8300	% that is not enough: for node names that actually contain a ^
		8301	% character, we would end up writing a line like this: 'xrdef {'hat
		8302	% b-title}{'hat b} and \xrdef does a \csname...\endcsname on the first
		8303	% argument, and \hat is not an expandable control sequence. It could
		8304	% all be worked out, but why? Either we support ^^ or we don't.
		8305	%
		8306	% The other change necessary for this was to define \auxhat:
		8307	% \def\auxhat{\def^{'hat }}% extra space so ok if followed by letter
		8308	% and then to call \auxhat in \setq.
		8309	%
		8310	\catcode`\^=\other
		8311	%
		8312	% Special characters. Should be turned off anyway, but...
		8313	\catcode`\~=\other
		8314	\catcode`\[=\other
		8315	\catcode`\]=\other
		8316	\catcode`\"=\other
		8317	\catcode`\_=\other
		8318	\catcode`\|=\other
		8319	\catcode`\<=\other
		8320	\catcode`\>=\other
		8321	\catcode`\$=\other
		8322	\catcode`\#=\other
		8323	\catcode`\&=\other
		8324	\catcode`\%=\other
		8325	\catcode`+=\other % avoid \+ for paranoia even though we've turned it off
		8326	%
		8327	% This is to support \ in node names and titles, since the \
		8328	% characters end up in a \csname. It's easier than
		8329	% leaving it active and making its active definition an actual \
		8330	% character. What I don't understand is why it works in the *value*
		8331	% of the xrdef. Seems like it should be a catcode12 \, and that
		8332	% should not typeset properly. But it works, so I'm moving on for
		8333	% now. --karl, 15jan04.
		8334	\catcode`\\=\other
		8335	%
		8336	% Make the characters 128-255 be printing characters.
		8337	{%
		8338	\count1=128
		8339	\def\loop{%
		8340	\catcode\count1=\other
		8341	\advance\count1 by 1
		8342	\ifnum \count1<256 \loop \fi
		8343	}%
		8344	}%
		8345	%
		8346	% @ is our escape character in .aux files, and we need braces.
		8347	\catcode`\{=1
		8348	\catcode`\}=2
		8349	\catcode`\@=0
		8350	}
		8351
		8352	\def\readdatafile#1{%
		8353	\begingroup
		8354	\setupdatafile
		8355	\input\jobname.#1
		8356	\endgroup}
		8357
		8358
		8359	\message{insertions,}
		8360	% including footnotes.
		8361
		8362	\newcount \footnoteno
		8363
		8364	% The trailing space in the following definition for supereject is
		8365	% vital for proper filling; pages come out unaligned when you do a
		8366	% pagealignmacro call if that space before the closing brace is
		8367	% removed. (Generally, numeric constants should always be followed by a
		8368	% space to prevent strange expansion errors.)
		8369	\def\supereject{\par\penalty -20000\footnoteno =0 }
		8370
		8371	% @footnotestyle is meaningful for Info output only.
		8372	\let\footnotestyle=\comment
		8373
		8374	{\catcode `\@=11
		8375	%
		8376	% Auto-number footnotes. Otherwise like plain.
		8377	\gdef\footnote{%
		8378	\global\advance\footnoteno by \@ne
		8379	\edef\thisfootno{$^{\the\footnoteno}$}%
		8380	%
		8381	% In case the footnote comes at the end of a sentence, preserve the
		8382	% extra spacing after we do the footnote number.
		8383	\let\@sf\empty
		8384	\ifhmode\edef\@sf{\spacefactor\the\spacefactor}\ptexslash\fi
		8385	%
		8386	% Remove inadvertent blank space before typesetting the footnote number.
		8387	\unskip
		8388	\thisfootno\@sf
		8389	\dofootnote
		8390	}%
		8391
		8392	% Don't bother with the trickery in plain.tex to not require the
		8393	% footnote text as a parameter. Our footnotes don't need to be so general.
		8394	%
		8395	% Oh yes, they do; otherwise, @ifset (and anything else that uses
		8396	% \parseargline) fails inside footnotes because the tokens are fixed when
		8397	% the footnote is read. --karl, 16nov96.
		8398	%
		8399	\gdef\dofootnote{%
		8400	\insert\footins\bgroup
		8401	%
		8402	% Nested footnotes are not supported in TeX, that would take a lot
		8403	% more work. (\startsavinginserts does not suffice.)
		8404	\let\footnote=\errfootnotenest
		8405	%
		8406	% We want to typeset this text as a normal paragraph, even if the
		8407	% footnote reference occurs in (for example) a display environment.
		8408	% So reset some parameters.
		8409	\hsize=\pagewidth
		8410	\interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty
		8411	\splittopskip\ht\strutbox % top baseline for broken footnotes
		8412	\splitmaxdepth\dp\strutbox
		8413	\floatingpenalty\@MM
		8414	\leftskip\z@skip
		8415	\rightskip\z@skip
		8416	\spaceskip\z@skip
		8417	\xspaceskip\z@skip
		8418	\parindent\defaultparindent
		8419	%
		8420	\smallfonts \rm
		8421	%
		8422	% Because we use hanging indentation in footnotes, a @noindent appears
		8423	% to exdent this text, so make it be a no-op. makeinfo does not use
		8424	% hanging indentation so @noindent can still be needed within footnote
		8425	% text after an @example or the like (not that this is good style).
		8426	\let\noindent = \relax
		8427	%
		8428	% Hang the footnote text off the number. Use \everypar in case the
		8429	% footnote extends for more than one paragraph.
		8430	\everypar = {\hang}%
		8431	\textindent{\thisfootno}%
		8432	%
		8433	% Don't crash into the line above the footnote text. Since this
		8434	% expands into a box, it must come within the paragraph, lest it
		8435	% provide a place where TeX can split the footnote.
		8436	\footstrut
		8437	%
		8438	% Invoke rest of plain TeX footnote routine.
		8439	\futurelet\next\fo@t
		8440	}
		8441	}%end \catcode `\@=11
		8442
		8443	\def\errfootnotenest{%
		8444	\errhelp=\EMsimple
		8445	\errmessage{Nested footnotes not supported in texinfo.tex,
		8446	even though they work in makeinfo; sorry}
		8447	}
		8448
		8449	\def\errfootnoteheading{%
		8450	\errhelp=\EMsimple
		8451	\errmessage{Footnotes in chapters, sections, etc., are not supported}
		8452	}
		8453
		8454	% In case a @footnote appears in a vbox, save the footnote text and create
		8455	% the real \insert just after the vbox finished. Otherwise, the insertion
		8456	% would be lost.
		8457	% Similarly, if a @footnote appears inside an alignment, save the footnote
		8458	% text to a box and make the \insert when a row of the table is finished.
		8459	% And the same can be done for other insert classes. --kasal, 16nov03.
		8460	%
		8461	% Replace the \insert primitive by a cheating macro.
		8462	% Deeper inside, just make sure that the saved insertions are not spilled
		8463	% out prematurely.
		8464	%
		8465	\def\startsavinginserts{%
		8466	\ifx \insert\ptexinsert
		8467	\let\insert\saveinsert
		8468	\else
		8469	\let\checkinserts\relax
		8470	\fi
		8471	}
		8472
		8473	% This \insert replacement works for both \insert\footins{foo} and
		8474	% \insert\footins\bgroup foo\egroup, but it doesn't work for \insert27{foo}.
		8475	%
		8476	\def\saveinsert#1{%
		8477	\edef\next{\noexpand\savetobox \makeSAVEname#1}%
		8478	\afterassignment\next
		8479	% swallow the left brace
		8480	\let\temp =
		8481	}
		8482	\def\makeSAVEname#1{\makecsname{SAVE\expandafter\gobble\string#1}}
		8483	\def\savetobox#1{\global\setbox#1 = \vbox\bgroup \unvbox#1}
		8484
		8485	\def\checksaveins#1{\ifvoid#1\else \placesaveins#1\fi}
		8486
		8487	\def\placesaveins#1{%
		8488	\ptexinsert \csname\expandafter\gobblesave\string#1\endcsname
		8489	{\box#1}%
		8490	}
		8491
		8492	% eat @SAVE -- beware, all of them have catcode \other:
		8493	{
		8494	\def\dospecials{\do S\do A\do V\do E} \uncatcodespecials % ;-)
		8495	\gdef\gobblesave @SAVE{}
		8496	}
		8497
		8498	% initialization:
		8499	\def\newsaveins #1{%
		8500	\edef\next{\noexpand\newsaveinsX \makeSAVEname#1}%
		8501	\next
		8502	}
		8503	\def\newsaveinsX #1{%
		8504	\csname newbox\endcsname #1%
		8505	\expandafter\def\expandafter\checkinserts\expandafter{\checkinserts
		8506	\checksaveins #1}%
		8507	}
		8508
		8509	% initialize:
		8510	\let\checkinserts\empty
		8511	\newsaveins\footins
		8512	\newsaveins\margin
		8513
		8514
		8515	% @image. We use the macros from epsf.tex to support this.
		8516	% If epsf.tex is not installed and @image is used, we complain.
		8517	%
		8518	% Check for and read epsf.tex up front. If we read it only at @image
		8519	% time, we might be inside a group, and then its definitions would get
		8520	% undone and the next image would fail.
		8521	\openin 1 = epsf.tex
		8522	\ifeof 1 \else
		8523	% Do not bother showing banner with epsf.tex v2.7k (available in
		8524	% doc/epsf.tex and on ctan).
		8525	\def\epsfannounce{\toks0 = }%
		8526	\input epsf.tex
		8527	\fi
		8528	\closein 1
		8529	%
		8530	% We will only complain once about lack of epsf.tex.
		8531	\newif\ifwarnednoepsf
		8532	\newhelp\noepsfhelp{epsf.tex must be installed for images to
		8533	work. It is also included in the Texinfo distribution, or you can get
		8534	it from ftp://tug.org/tex/epsf.tex.}
		8535	%
		8536	\def\image#1{%
		8537	\ifx\epsfbox\thisisundefined
		8538	\ifwarnednoepsf \else
		8539	\errhelp = \noepsfhelp
		8540	\errmessage{epsf.tex not found, images will be ignored}%
		8541	\global\warnednoepsftrue
		8542	\fi
		8543	\else
		8544	\imagexxx #1,,,,,\finish
		8545	\fi
		8546	}
		8547	%
		8548	% Arguments to @image:
		8549	% #1 is (mandatory) image filename; we tack on .eps extension.
		8550	% #2 is (optional) width, #3 is (optional) height.
		8551	% #4 is (ignored optional) html alt text.
		8552	% #5 is (ignored optional) extension.
		8553	% #6 is just the usual extra ignored arg for parsing stuff.
		8554	\newif\ifimagevmode
		8555	\def\imagexxx#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6\finish{\begingroup
		8556	\catcode`\^^M = 5 % in case we're inside an example
		8557	\normalturnoffactive % allow _ et al. in names
		8558	% If the image is by itself, center it.
		8559	\ifvmode
		8560	\imagevmodetrue
		8561	\else \ifx\centersub\centerV
		8562	% for @center @image, we need a vbox so we can have our vertical space
		8563	\imagevmodetrue
		8564	\vbox\bgroup % vbox has better behavior than vtop herev
		8565	\fi\fi
		8566	%
		8567	\ifimagevmode
		8568	\nobreak\medskip
		8569	% Usually we'll have text after the image which will insert
		8570	% \parskip glue, so insert it here too to equalize the space
		8571	% above and below.
		8572	\nobreak\vskip\parskip
		8573	\nobreak
		8574	\fi
		8575	%
		8576	% Leave vertical mode so that indentation from an enclosing
		8577	% environment such as @quotation is respected.
		8578	% However, if we're at the top level, we don't want the
		8579	% normal paragraph indentation.
		8580	% On the other hand, if we are in the case of @center @image, we don't
		8581	% want to start a paragraph, which will create a hsize-width box and
		8582	% eradicate the centering.
		8583	\ifx\centersub\centerV\else \noindent \fi
		8584	%
		8585	% Output the image.
		8586	\ifpdf
		8587	\dopdfimage{#1}{#2}{#3}%
		8588	\else
		8589	% \epsfbox itself resets \epsf?size at each figure.
		8590	\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfxsize=#2\relax \fi
		8591	\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfysize=#3\relax \fi
		8592	\epsfbox{#1.eps}%
		8593	\fi
		8594	%
		8595	\ifimagevmode
		8596	\medskip % space after a standalone image
		8597	\fi
		8598	\ifx\centersub\centerV \egroup \fi
		8599	\endgroup}
		8600
		8601
		8602	% @float FLOATTYPE,LABEL,LOC ... @end float for displayed figures, tables,
		8603	% etc. We don't actually implement floating yet, we always include the
		8604	% float "here". But it seemed the best name for the future.
		8605	%
		8606	\envparseargdef\float{\eatcommaspace\eatcommaspace\dofloat#1, , ,\finish}
		8607
		8608	% There may be a space before second and/or third parameter; delete it.
		8609	\def\eatcommaspace#1, {#1,}
		8610
		8611	% #1 is the optional FLOATTYPE, the text label for this float, typically
		8612	% "Figure", "Table", "Example", etc. Can't contain commas. If omitted,
		8613	% this float will not be numbered and cannot be referred to.
		8614	%
		8615	% #2 is the optional xref label. Also must be present for the float to
		8616	% be referable.
		8617	%
		8618	% #3 is the optional positioning argument; for now, it is ignored. It
		8619	% will somehow specify the positions allowed to float to (here, top, bottom).
		8620	%
		8621	% We keep a separate counter for each FLOATTYPE, which we reset at each
		8622	% chapter-level command.
		8623	\let\resetallfloatnos=\empty
		8624	%
		8625	\def\dofloat#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{%
		8626	\let\thiscaption=\empty
		8627	\let\thisshortcaption=\empty
		8628	%
		8629	% don't lose footnotes inside @float.
		8630	%
		8631	% BEWARE: when the floats start float, we have to issue warning whenever an
		8632	% insert appears inside a float which could possibly float. --kasal, 26may04
		8633	%
		8634	\startsavinginserts
		8635	%
		8636	% We can't be used inside a paragraph.
		8637	\par
		8638	%
		8639	\vtop\bgroup
		8640	\def\floattype{#1}%
		8641	\def\floatlabel{#2}%
		8642	\def\floatloc{#3}% we do nothing with this yet.
		8643	%
		8644	\ifx\floattype\empty
		8645	\let\safefloattype=\empty
		8646	\else
		8647	{%
		8648	% the floattype might have accents or other special characters,
		8649	% but we need to use it in a control sequence name.
		8650	\indexnofonts
		8651	\turnoffactive
		8652	\xdef\safefloattype{\floattype}%
		8653	}%
		8654	\fi
		8655	%
		8656	% If label is given but no type, we handle that as the empty type.
		8657	\ifx\floatlabel\empty \else
		8658	% We want each FLOATTYPE to be numbered separately (Figure 1,
		8659	% Table 1, Figure 2, ...). (And if no label, no number.)
		8660	%
		8661	\expandafter\getfloatno\csname\safefloattype floatno\endcsname
		8662	\global\advance\floatno by 1
		8663	%
		8664	{%
		8665	% This magic value for \lastsection is output by \setref as the
		8666	% XREFLABEL-title value. \xrefX uses it to distinguish float
		8667	% labels (which have a completely different output format) from
		8668	% node and anchor labels. And \xrdef uses it to construct the
		8669	% lists of floats.
		8670	%
		8671	\edef\lastsection{\floatmagic=\safefloattype}%
		8672	\setref{\floatlabel}{Yfloat}%
		8673	}%
		8674	\fi
		8675	%
		8676	% start with \parskip glue, I guess.
		8677	\vskip\parskip
		8678	%
		8679	% Don't suppress indentation if a float happens to start a section.
		8680	\restorefirstparagraphindent
		8681	}
		8682
		8683	% we have these possibilities:
		8684	% @float Foo,lbl & @caption{Cap}: Foo 1.1: Cap
		8685	% @float Foo,lbl & no caption: Foo 1.1
		8686	% @float Foo & @caption{Cap}: Foo: Cap
		8687	% @float Foo & no caption: Foo
		8688	% @float ,lbl & Caption{Cap}: 1.1: Cap
		8689	% @float ,lbl & no caption: 1.1
		8690	% @float & @caption{Cap}: Cap
		8691	% @float & no caption:
		8692	%
		8693	\def\Efloat{%
		8694	\let\floatident = \empty
		8695	%
		8696	% In all cases, if we have a float type, it comes first.
		8697	\ifx\floattype\empty \else \def\floatident{\floattype}\fi
		8698	%
		8699	% If we have an xref label, the number comes next.
		8700	\ifx\floatlabel\empty \else
		8701	\ifx\floattype\empty \else % if also had float type, need tie first.
		8702	\appendtomacro\floatident{\tie}%
		8703	\fi
		8704	% the number.
		8705	\appendtomacro\floatident{\chaplevelprefix\the\floatno}%
		8706	\fi
		8707	%
		8708	% Start the printed caption with what we've constructed in
		8709	% \floatident, but keep it separate; we need \floatident again.
		8710	\let\captionline = \floatident
		8711	%
		8712	\ifx\thiscaption\empty \else
		8713	\ifx\floatident\empty \else
		8714	\appendtomacro\captionline{: }% had ident, so need a colon between
		8715	\fi
		8716	%
		8717	% caption text.
		8718	\appendtomacro\captionline{\scanexp\thiscaption}%
		8719	\fi
		8720	%
		8721	% If we have anything to print, print it, with space before.
		8722	% Eventually this needs to become an \insert.
		8723	\ifx\captionline\empty \else
		8724	\vskip.5\parskip
		8725	\captionline
		8726	%
		8727	% Space below caption.
		8728	\vskip\parskip
		8729	\fi
		8730	%
		8731	% If have an xref label, write the list of floats info. Do this
		8732	% after the caption, to avoid chance of it being a breakpoint.
		8733	\ifx\floatlabel\empty \else
		8734	% Write the text that goes in the lof to the aux file as
		8735	% \floatlabel-lof. Besides \floatident, we include the short
		8736	% caption if specified, else the full caption if specified, else nothing.
		8737	{%
		8738	\atdummies
		8739	%
		8740	% since we read the caption text in the macro world, where ^^M
		8741	% is turned into a normal character, we have to scan it back, so
		8742	% we don't write the literal three characters "^^M" into the aux file.
		8743	\scanexp{%
		8744	\xdef\noexpand\gtemp{%
		8745	\ifx\thisshortcaption\empty
		8746	\thiscaption
		8747	\else
		8748	\thisshortcaption
		8749	\fi
		8750	}%
		8751	}%
		8752	\immediate\write\auxfile{@xrdef{\floatlabel-lof}{\floatident
		8753	\ifx\gtemp\empty \else : \gtemp \fi}}%
		8754	}%
		8755	\fi
		8756	\egroup % end of \vtop
		8757	%
		8758	% place the captured inserts
		8759	%
		8760	% BEWARE: when the floats start floating, we have to issue warning
		8761	% whenever an insert appears inside a float which could possibly
		8762	% float. --kasal, 26may04
		8763	%
		8764	\checkinserts
		8765	}
		8766
		8767	% Append the tokens #2 to the definition of macro #1, not expanding either.
		8768	%
		8769	\def\appendtomacro#1#2{%
		8770	\expandafter\def\expandafter#1\expandafter{#1#2}%
		8771	}
		8772
		8773	% @caption, @shortcaption
		8774	%
		8775	\def\caption{\docaption\thiscaption}
		8776	\def\shortcaption{\docaption\thisshortcaption}
		8777	\def\docaption{\checkenv\float \bgroup\scanargctxt\defcaption}
		8778	\def\defcaption#1#2{\egroup \def#1{#2}}
		8779
		8780	% The parameter is the control sequence identifying the counter we are
		8781	% going to use. Create it if it doesn't exist and assign it to \floatno.
		8782	\def\getfloatno#1{%
		8783	\ifx#1\relax
		8784	% Haven't seen this figure type before.
		8785	\csname newcount\endcsname #1%
		8786	%
		8787	% Remember to reset this floatno at the next chap.
		8788	\expandafter\gdef\expandafter\resetallfloatnos
		8789	\expandafter{\resetallfloatnos #1=0 }%
		8790	\fi
		8791	\let\floatno#1%
		8792	}
		8793
		8794	% \setref calls this to get the XREFLABEL-snt value. We want an @xref
		8795	% to the FLOATLABEL to expand to "Figure 3.1". We call \setref when we
		8796	% first read the @float command.
		8797	%
		8798	\def\Yfloat{\floattype@tie \chaplevelprefix\the\floatno}%
		8799
		8800	% Magic string used for the XREFLABEL-title value, so \xrefX can
		8801	% distinguish floats from other xref types.
		8802	\def\floatmagic{!!float!!}
		8803
		8804	% #1 is the control sequence we are passed; we expand into a conditional
		8805	% which is true if #1 represents a float ref. That is, the magic
		8806	% \lastsection value which we \setref above.
		8807	%
		8808	\def\iffloat#1{\expandafter\doiffloat#1==\finish}
		8809	%
		8810	% #1 is (maybe) the \floatmagic string. If so, #2 will be the
		8811	% (safe) float type for this float. We set \iffloattype to #2.
		8812	%
		8813	\def\doiffloat#1=#2=#3\finish{%
		8814	\def\temp{#1}%
		8815	\def\iffloattype{#2}%
		8816	\ifx\temp\floatmagic
		8817	}
		8818
		8819	% @listoffloats FLOATTYPE - print a list of floats like a table of contents.
		8820	%
		8821	\parseargdef\listoffloats{%
		8822	\def\floattype{#1}% floattype
		8823	{%
		8824	% the floattype might have accents or other special characters,
		8825	% but we need to use it in a control sequence name.
		8826	\indexnofonts
		8827	\turnoffactive
		8828	\xdef\safefloattype{\floattype}%
		8829	}%
		8830	%
		8831	% \xrdef saves the floats as a \do-list in \floatlistSAFEFLOATTYPE.
		8832	\expandafter\ifx\csname floatlist\safefloattype\endcsname \relax
		8833	\ifhavexrefs
		8834	% if the user said @listoffloats foo but never @float foo.
		8835	\message{\linenumber No `\safefloattype' floats to list.}%
		8836	\fi
		8837	\else
		8838	\begingroup
		8839	\leftskip=\tocindent % indent these entries like a toc
		8840	\let\do=\listoffloatsdo
		8841	\csname floatlist\safefloattype\endcsname
		8842	\endgroup
		8843	\fi
		8844	}
		8845
		8846	% This is called on each entry in a list of floats. We're passed the
		8847	% xref label, in the form LABEL-title, which is how we save it in the
		8848	% aux file. We strip off the -title and look up \XRLABEL-lof, which
		8849	% has the text we're supposed to typeset here.
		8850	%
		8851	% Figures without xref labels will not be included in the list (since
		8852	% they won't appear in the aux file).
		8853	%
		8854	\def\listoffloatsdo#1{\listoffloatsdoentry#1\finish}
		8855	\def\listoffloatsdoentry#1-title\finish{{%
		8856	% Can't fully expand XR#1-lof because it can contain anything. Just
		8857	% pass the control sequence. On the other hand, XR#1-pg is just the
		8858	% page number, and we want to fully expand that so we can get a link
		8859	% in pdf output.
		8860	\toksA = \expandafter{\csname XR#1-lof\endcsname}%
		8861	%
		8862	% use the same \entry macro we use to generate the TOC and index.
		8863	\edef\writeentry{\noexpand\entry{\the\toksA}{\csname XR#1-pg\endcsname}}%
		8864	\writeentry
		8865	}}
		8866
		8867
		8868	\message{localization,}
		8869
		8870	% For single-language documents, @documentlanguage is usually given very
		8871	% early, just after @documentencoding. Single argument is the language
		8872	% (de) or locale (de_DE) abbreviation.
		8873	%
		8874	{
		8875	\catcode`\_ = \active
		8876	\globaldefs=1
		8877	\parseargdef\documentlanguage{%
		8878	\tex % read txi-??.tex file in plain TeX.
		8879	% Read the file by the name they passed if it exists.
		8880	\let_ = \normalunderscore % normal _ character for filename test
		8881	\openin 1 txi-#1.tex
		8882	\ifeof 1
		8883	\documentlanguagetrywithoutunderscore #1_\finish
		8884	\else
		8885	\globaldefs = 1 % everything in the txi-LL files needs to persist
		8886	\input txi-#1.tex
		8887	\fi
		8888	\closein 1
		8889	\endgroup % end raw TeX
		8890	}
		8891	%
		8892	% If they passed de_DE, and txi-de_DE.tex doesn't exist,
		8893	% try txi-de.tex.
		8894	%
		8895	\gdef\documentlanguagetrywithoutunderscore#1_#2\finish{%
		8896	\openin 1 txi-#1.tex
		8897	\ifeof 1
		8898	\errhelp = \nolanghelp
		8899	\errmessage{Cannot read language file txi-#1.tex}%
		8900	\else
		8901	\globaldefs = 1 % everything in the txi-LL files needs to persist
		8902	\input txi-#1.tex
		8903	\fi
		8904	\closein 1
		8905	}
		8906	}% end of special _ catcode
		8907	%
		8908	\newhelp\nolanghelp{The given language definition file cannot be found or
		8909	is empty. Maybe you need to install it? Putting it in the current
		8910	directory should work if nowhere else does.}
		8911
		8912	% This macro is called from txi-??.tex files; the first argument is the
		8913	% \language name to set (without the "\lang@" prefix), the second and
		8914	% third args are \{left,right}hyphenmin.
		8915	%
		8916	% The language names to pass are determined when the format is built.
		8917	% See the etex.log file created at that time, e.g.,
		8918	% /usr/local/texlive/2008/texmf-var/web2c/pdftex/etex.log.
		8919	%
		8920	% With TeX Live 2008, etex now includes hyphenation patterns for all
		8921	% available languages. This means we can support hyphenation in
		8922	% Texinfo, at least to some extent. (This still doesn't solve the
		8923	% accented characters problem.)
		8924	%
		8925	\catcode`@=11
		8926	\def\txisetlanguage#1#2#3{%
		8927	% do not set the language if the name is undefined in the current TeX.
		8928	\expandafter\ifx\csname lang@#1\endcsname \relax
		8929	\message{no patterns for #1}%
		8930	\else
		8931	\global\language = \csname lang@#1\endcsname
		8932	\fi
		8933	% but there is no harm in adjusting the hyphenmin values regardless.
		8934	\global\lefthyphenmin = #2\relax
		8935	\global\righthyphenmin = #3\relax
		8936	}
		8937
		8938	% Helpers for encodings.
		8939	% Set the catcode of characters 128 through 255 to the specified number.
		8940	%
		8941	\def\setnonasciicharscatcode#1{%
		8942	\count255=128
		8943	\loop\ifnum\count255<256
		8944	\global\catcode\count255=#1\relax
		8945	\advance\count255 by 1
		8946	\repeat
		8947	}
		8948
		8949	\def\setnonasciicharscatcodenonglobal#1{%
		8950	\count255=128
		8951	\loop\ifnum\count255<256
		8952	\catcode\count255=#1\relax
		8953	\advance\count255 by 1
		8954	\repeat
		8955	}
		8956
		8957	% @documentencoding sets the definition of non-ASCII characters
		8958	% according to the specified encoding.
		8959	%
		8960	\parseargdef\documentencoding{%
		8961	% Encoding being declared for the document.
		8962	\def\declaredencoding{\csname #1.enc\endcsname}%
		8963	%
		8964	% Supported encodings: names converted to tokens in order to be able
		8965	% to compare them with \ifx.
		8966	\def\ascii{\csname US-ASCII.enc\endcsname}%
		8967	\def\latnine{\csname ISO-8859-15.enc\endcsname}%
		8968	\def\latone{\csname ISO-8859-1.enc\endcsname}%
		8969	\def\lattwo{\csname ISO-8859-2.enc\endcsname}%
		8970	\def\utfeight{\csname UTF-8.enc\endcsname}%
		8971	%
		8972	\ifx \declaredencoding \ascii
		8973	\asciichardefs
		8974	%
		8975	\else \ifx \declaredencoding \lattwo
		8976	\setnonasciicharscatcode\active
		8977	\lattwochardefs
		8978	%
		8979	\else \ifx \declaredencoding \latone
		8980	\setnonasciicharscatcode\active
		8981	\latonechardefs
		8982	%
		8983	\else \ifx \declaredencoding \latnine
		8984	\setnonasciicharscatcode\active
		8985	\latninechardefs
		8986	%
		8987	\else \ifx \declaredencoding \utfeight
		8988	\setnonasciicharscatcode\active
		8989	\utfeightchardefs
		8990	%
		8991	\else
		8992	\message{Unknown document encoding #1, ignoring.}%
		8993	%
		8994	\fi % utfeight
		8995	\fi % latnine
		8996	\fi % latone
		8997	\fi % lattwo
		8998	\fi % ascii
		8999	}
		9000
		9001	% A message to be logged when using a character that isn't available
		9002	% the default font encoding (OT1).
		9003	%
		9004	\def\missingcharmsg#1{\message{Character missing in OT1 encoding: #1.}}
		9005
		9006	% Take account of \c (plain) vs. \, (Texinfo) difference.
		9007	\def\cedilla#1{\ifx\c\ptexc\c{#1}\else\,{#1}\fi}
		9008
		9009	% First, make active non-ASCII characters in order for them to be
		9010	% correctly categorized when TeX reads the replacement text of
		9011	% macros containing the character definitions.
		9012	\setnonasciicharscatcode\active
		9013	%
		9014	% Latin1 (ISO-8859-1) character definitions.
		9015	\def\latonechardefs{%
		9016	\gdef^^a0{\tie}
		9017	\gdef^^a1{\exclamdown}
		9018	\gdef^^a2{\missingcharmsg{CENT SIGN}}
		9019	\gdef^^a3{{\pounds}}
		9020	\gdef^^a4{\missingcharmsg{CURRENCY SIGN}}
		9021	\gdef^^a5{\missingcharmsg{YEN SIGN}}
		9022	\gdef^^a6{\missingcharmsg{BROKEN BAR}}
		9023	\gdef^^a7{\S}
		9024	\gdef^^a8{\"{}}
		9025	\gdef^^a9{\copyright}
		9026	\gdef^^aa{\ordf}
		9027	\gdef^^ab{\guillemetleft}
		9028	\gdef^^ac{$\lnot$}
		9029	\gdef^^ad{\-}
		9030	\gdef^^ae{\registeredsymbol}
		9031	\gdef^^af{\={}}
		9032	%
		9033	\gdef^^b0{\textdegree}
		9034	\gdef^^b1{$\pm$}
		9035	\gdef^^b2{$^2$}
		9036	\gdef^^b3{$^3$}
		9037	\gdef^^b4{\'{}}
		9038	\gdef^^b5{$\mu$}
		9039	\gdef^^b6{\P}
		9040	%
		9041	\gdef^^b7{$^.$}
		9042	\gdef^^b8{\cedilla\ }
		9043	\gdef^^b9{$^1$}
		9044	\gdef^^ba{\ordm}
		9045	%
		9046	\gdef^^bb{\guillemetright}
		9047	\gdef^^bc{$1\over4$}
		9048	\gdef^^bd{$1\over2$}
		9049	\gdef^^be{$3\over4$}
		9050	\gdef^^bf{\questiondown}
		9051	%
		9052	\gdef^^c0{\`A}
		9053	\gdef^^c1{\'A}
		9054	\gdef^^c2{\^A}
		9055	\gdef^^c3{\~A}
		9056	\gdef^^c4{\"A}
		9057	\gdef^^c5{\ringaccent A}
		9058	\gdef^^c6{\AE}
		9059	\gdef^^c7{\cedilla C}
		9060	\gdef^^c8{\`E}
		9061	\gdef^^c9{\'E}
		9062	\gdef^^ca{\^E}
		9063	\gdef^^cb{\"E}
		9064	\gdef^^cc{\`I}
		9065	\gdef^^cd{\'I}
		9066	\gdef^^ce{\^I}
		9067	\gdef^^cf{\"I}
		9068	%
		9069	\gdef^^d0{\DH}
		9070	\gdef^^d1{\~N}
		9071	\gdef^^d2{\`O}
		9072	\gdef^^d3{\'O}
		9073	\gdef^^d4{\^O}
		9074	\gdef^^d5{\~O}
		9075	\gdef^^d6{\"O}
		9076	\gdef^^d7{$\times$}
		9077	\gdef^^d8{\O}
		9078	\gdef^^d9{\`U}
		9079	\gdef^^da{\'U}
		9080	\gdef^^db{\^U}
		9081	\gdef^^dc{\"U}
		9082	\gdef^^dd{\'Y}
		9083	\gdef^^de{\TH}
		9084	\gdef^^df{\ss}
		9085	%
		9086	\gdef^^e0{\`a}
		9087	\gdef^^e1{\'a}
		9088	\gdef^^e2{\^a}
		9089	\gdef^^e3{\~a}
		9090	\gdef^^e4{\"a}
		9091	\gdef^^e5{\ringaccent a}
		9092	\gdef^^e6{\ae}
		9093	\gdef^^e7{\cedilla c}
		9094	\gdef^^e8{\`e}
		9095	\gdef^^e9{\'e}
		9096	\gdef^^ea{\^e}
		9097	\gdef^^eb{\"e}
		9098	\gdef^^ec{\`{\dotless i}}
		9099	\gdef^^ed{\'{\dotless i}}
		9100	\gdef^^ee{\^{\dotless i}}
		9101	\gdef^^ef{\"{\dotless i}}
		9102	%
		9103	\gdef^^f0{\dh}
		9104	\gdef^^f1{\~n}
		9105	\gdef^^f2{\`o}
		9106	\gdef^^f3{\'o}
		9107	\gdef^^f4{\^o}
		9108	\gdef^^f5{\~o}
		9109	\gdef^^f6{\"o}
		9110	\gdef^^f7{$\div$}
		9111	\gdef^^f8{\o}
		9112	\gdef^^f9{\`u}
		9113	\gdef^^fa{\'u}
		9114	\gdef^^fb{\^u}
		9115	\gdef^^fc{\"u}
		9116	\gdef^^fd{\'y}
		9117	\gdef^^fe{\th}
		9118	\gdef^^ff{\"y}
		9119	}
		9120
		9121	% Latin9 (ISO-8859-15) encoding character definitions.
		9122	\def\latninechardefs{%
		9123	% Encoding is almost identical to Latin1.
		9124	\latonechardefs
		9125	%
		9126	\gdef^^a4{\euro}
		9127	\gdef^^a6{\v S}
		9128	\gdef^^a8{\v s}
		9129	\gdef^^b4{\v Z}
		9130	\gdef^^b8{\v z}
		9131	\gdef^^bc{\OE}
		9132	\gdef^^bd{\oe}
		9133	\gdef^^be{\"Y}
		9134	}
		9135
		9136	% Latin2 (ISO-8859-2) character definitions.
		9137	\def\lattwochardefs{%
		9138	\gdef^^a0{\tie}
		9139	\gdef^^a1{\ogonek{A}}
		9140	\gdef^^a2{\u{}}
		9141	\gdef^^a3{\L}
		9142	\gdef^^a4{\missingcharmsg{CURRENCY SIGN}}
		9143	\gdef^^a5{\v L}
		9144	\gdef^^a6{\'S}
		9145	\gdef^^a7{\S}
		9146	\gdef^^a8{\"{}}
		9147	\gdef^^a9{\v S}
		9148	\gdef^^aa{\cedilla S}
		9149	\gdef^^ab{\v T}
		9150	\gdef^^ac{\'Z}
		9151	\gdef^^ad{\-}
		9152	\gdef^^ae{\v Z}
		9153	\gdef^^af{\dotaccent Z}
		9154	%
		9155	\gdef^^b0{\textdegree}
		9156	\gdef^^b1{\ogonek{a}}
		9157	\gdef^^b2{\ogonek{ }}
		9158	\gdef^^b3{\l}
		9159	\gdef^^b4{\'{}}
		9160	\gdef^^b5{\v l}
		9161	\gdef^^b6{\'s}
		9162	\gdef^^b7{\v{}}
		9163	\gdef^^b8{\cedilla\ }
		9164	\gdef^^b9{\v s}
		9165	\gdef^^ba{\cedilla s}
		9166	\gdef^^bb{\v t}
		9167	\gdef^^bc{\'z}
		9168	\gdef^^bd{\H{}}
		9169	\gdef^^be{\v z}
		9170	\gdef^^bf{\dotaccent z}
		9171	%
		9172	\gdef^^c0{\'R}
		9173	\gdef^^c1{\'A}
		9174	\gdef^^c2{\^A}
		9175	\gdef^^c3{\u A}
		9176	\gdef^^c4{\"A}
		9177	\gdef^^c5{\'L}
		9178	\gdef^^c6{\'C}
		9179	\gdef^^c7{\cedilla C}
		9180	\gdef^^c8{\v C}
		9181	\gdef^^c9{\'E}
		9182	\gdef^^ca{\ogonek{E}}
		9183	\gdef^^cb{\"E}
		9184	\gdef^^cc{\v E}
		9185	\gdef^^cd{\'I}
		9186	\gdef^^ce{\^I}
		9187	\gdef^^cf{\v D}
		9188	%
		9189	\gdef^^d0{\DH}
		9190	\gdef^^d1{\'N}
		9191	\gdef^^d2{\v N}
		9192	\gdef^^d3{\'O}
		9193	\gdef^^d4{\^O}
		9194	\gdef^^d5{\H O}
		9195	\gdef^^d6{\"O}
		9196	\gdef^^d7{$\times$}
		9197	\gdef^^d8{\v R}
		9198	\gdef^^d9{\ringaccent U}
		9199	\gdef^^da{\'U}
		9200	\gdef^^db{\H U}
		9201	\gdef^^dc{\"U}
		9202	\gdef^^dd{\'Y}
		9203	\gdef^^de{\cedilla T}
		9204	\gdef^^df{\ss}
		9205	%
		9206	\gdef^^e0{\'r}
		9207	\gdef^^e1{\'a}
		9208	\gdef^^e2{\^a}
		9209	\gdef^^e3{\u a}
		9210	\gdef^^e4{\"a}
		9211	\gdef^^e5{\'l}
		9212	\gdef^^e6{\'c}
		9213	\gdef^^e7{\cedilla c}
		9214	\gdef^^e8{\v c}
		9215	\gdef^^e9{\'e}
		9216	\gdef^^ea{\ogonek{e}}
		9217	\gdef^^eb{\"e}
		9218	\gdef^^ec{\v e}
		9219	\gdef^^ed{\'{\dotless{i}}}
		9220	\gdef^^ee{\^{\dotless{i}}}
		9221	\gdef^^ef{\v d}
		9222	%
		9223	\gdef^^f0{\dh}
		9224	\gdef^^f1{\'n}
		9225	\gdef^^f2{\v n}
		9226	\gdef^^f3{\'o}
		9227	\gdef^^f4{\^o}
		9228	\gdef^^f5{\H o}
		9229	\gdef^^f6{\"o}
		9230	\gdef^^f7{$\div$}
		9231	\gdef^^f8{\v r}
		9232	\gdef^^f9{\ringaccent u}
		9233	\gdef^^fa{\'u}
		9234	\gdef^^fb{\H u}
		9235	\gdef^^fc{\"u}
		9236	\gdef^^fd{\'y}
		9237	\gdef^^fe{\cedilla t}
		9238	\gdef^^ff{\dotaccent{}}
		9239	}
		9240
		9241	% UTF-8 character definitions.
		9242	%
		9243	% This code to support UTF-8 is based on LaTeX's utf8.def, with some
		9244	% changes for Texinfo conventions. It is included here under the GPL by
		9245	% permission from Frank Mittelbach and the LaTeX team.
		9246	%
		9247	\newcount\countUTFx
		9248	\newcount\countUTFy
		9249	\newcount\countUTFz
		9250
		9251	\gdef\UTFviiiTwoOctets#1#2{\expandafter
		9252	\UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\endcsname}
		9253	%
		9254	\gdef\UTFviiiThreeOctets#1#2#3{\expandafter
		9255	\UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\string #3\endcsname}
		9256	%
		9257	\gdef\UTFviiiFourOctets#1#2#3#4{\expandafter
		9258	\UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\string #3\string #4\endcsname}
		9259
		9260	\gdef\UTFviiiDefined#1{%
		9261	\ifx #1\relax
		9262	\message{\linenumber Unicode char \string #1 not defined for Texinfo}%
		9263	\else
		9264	\expandafter #1%
		9265	\fi
		9266	}
		9267
		9268	\begingroup
		9269	\catcode`\~13
		9270	\catcode`\"12
		9271
		9272	\def\UTFviiiLoop{%
		9273	\global\catcode\countUTFx\active
		9274	\uccode`\~\countUTFx
		9275	\uppercase\expandafter{\UTFviiiTmp}%
		9276	\advance\countUTFx by 1
		9277	\ifnum\countUTFx < \countUTFy
		9278	\expandafter\UTFviiiLoop
		9279	\fi}
		9280
		9281	\countUTFx = "C2
		9282	\countUTFy = "E0
		9283	\def\UTFviiiTmp{%
		9284	\xdef~{\noexpand\UTFviiiTwoOctets\string~}}
		9285	\UTFviiiLoop
		9286
		9287	\countUTFx = "E0
		9288	\countUTFy = "F0
		9289	\def\UTFviiiTmp{%
		9290	\xdef~{\noexpand\UTFviiiThreeOctets\string~}}
		9291	\UTFviiiLoop
		9292
		9293	\countUTFx = "F0
		9294	\countUTFy = "F4
		9295	\def\UTFviiiTmp{%
		9296	\xdef~{\noexpand\UTFviiiFourOctets\string~}}
		9297	\UTFviiiLoop
		9298	\endgroup
		9299
		9300	\def\globallet{\global\let} % save some \expandafter's below
		9301
		9302	% @U{xxxx} to produce U+xxxx, if we support it.
		9303	\def\U#1{%
		9304	\expandafter\ifx\csname uni:#1\endcsname \relax
		9305	\errhelp = \EMsimple
		9306	\errmessage{Unicode character U+#1 not supported, sorry}%
		9307	\else
		9308	\csname uni:#1\endcsname
		9309	\fi
		9310	}
		9311
		9312	\begingroup
		9313	\catcode`\"=12
		9314	\catcode`\<=12
		9315	\catcode`\.=12
		9316	\catcode`\,=12
		9317	\catcode`\;=12
		9318	\catcode`\!=12
		9319	\catcode`\~=13
		9320	\gdef\DeclareUnicodeCharacter#1#2{%
		9321	\countUTFz = "#1\relax
		9322	%\wlog{\space\space defining Unicode char U+#1 (decimal \the\countUTFz)}%
		9323	\begingroup
		9324	\parseXMLCharref
		9325	\def\UTFviiiTwoOctets##1##2{%
		9326	\csname u8:##1\string ##2\endcsname}%
		9327	\def\UTFviiiThreeOctets##1##2##3{%
		9328	\csname u8:##1\string ##2\string ##3\endcsname}%
		9329	\def\UTFviiiFourOctets##1##2##3##4{%
		9330	\csname u8:##1\string ##2\string ##3\string ##4\endcsname}%
		9331	\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter
		9332	\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter
		9333	\gdef\UTFviiiTmp{#2}%
		9334	% define an additional control sequence for this code point.
		9335	\expandafter\globallet\csname uni:#1\endcsname \UTFviiiTmp
		9336	\endgroup}
		9337
		9338	\gdef\parseXMLCharref{%
		9339	\ifnum\countUTFz < "A0\relax
		9340	\errhelp = \EMsimple
		9341	\errmessage{Cannot define Unicode char value < 00A0}%
		9342	\else\ifnum\countUTFz < "800\relax
		9343	\parseUTFviiiA,%
		9344	\parseUTFviiiB C\UTFviiiTwoOctets.,%
		9345	\else\ifnum\countUTFz < "10000\relax
		9346	\parseUTFviiiA;%
		9347	\parseUTFviiiA,%
		9348	\parseUTFviiiB E\UTFviiiThreeOctets.{,;}%
		9349	\else
		9350	\parseUTFviiiA;%
		9351	\parseUTFviiiA,%
		9352	\parseUTFviiiA!%
		9353	\parseUTFviiiB F\UTFviiiFourOctets.{!,;}%
		9354	\fi\fi\fi
		9355	}
		9356
		9357	\gdef\parseUTFviiiA#1{%
		9358	\countUTFx = \countUTFz
		9359	\divide\countUTFz by 64
		9360	\countUTFy = \countUTFz
		9361	\multiply\countUTFz by 64
		9362	\advance\countUTFx by -\countUTFz
		9363	\advance\countUTFx by 128
		9364	\uccode `#1\countUTFx
		9365	\countUTFz = \countUTFy}
		9366
		9367	\gdef\parseUTFviiiB#1#2#3#4{%
		9368	\advance\countUTFz by "#10\relax
		9369	\uccode `#3\countUTFz
		9370	\uppercase{\gdef\UTFviiiTmp{#2#3#4}}}
		9371	\endgroup
		9372
		9373	\def\utfeightchardefs{%
		9374	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A0}{\tie}
		9375	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A1}{\exclamdown}
		9376	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A3}{\pounds}
		9377	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A8}{\"{ }}
		9378	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A9}{\copyright}
		9379	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AA}{\ordf}
		9380	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AB}{\guillemetleft}
		9381	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AD}{\-}
		9382	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AE}{\registeredsymbol}
		9383	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AF}{\={ }}
		9384
		9385	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B0}{\ringaccent{ }}
		9386	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B4}{\'{ }}
		9387	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B8}{\cedilla{ }}
		9388	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BA}{\ordm}
		9389	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BB}{\guillemetright}
		9390	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BF}{\questiondown}
		9391
		9392	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C0}{\`A}
		9393	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C1}{\'A}
		9394	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C2}{\^A}
		9395	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C3}{\~A}
		9396	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C4}{\"A}
		9397	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C5}{\AA}
		9398	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C6}{\AE}
		9399	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C7}{\cedilla{C}}
		9400	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C8}{\`E}
		9401	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C9}{\'E}
		9402	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CA}{\^E}
		9403	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CB}{\"E}
		9404	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CC}{\`I}
		9405	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CD}{\'I}
		9406	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CE}{\^I}
		9407	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CF}{\"I}
		9408
		9409	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D0}{\DH}
		9410	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D1}{\~N}
		9411	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D2}{\`O}
		9412	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D3}{\'O}
		9413	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D4}{\^O}
		9414	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D5}{\~O}
		9415	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D6}{\"O}
		9416	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D8}{\O}
		9417	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D9}{\`U}
		9418	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DA}{\'U}
		9419	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DB}{\^U}
		9420	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DC}{\"U}
		9421	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DD}{\'Y}
		9422	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DE}{\TH}
		9423	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DF}{\ss}
		9424
		9425	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E0}{\`a}
		9426	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E1}{\'a}
		9427	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E2}{\^a}
		9428	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E3}{\~a}
		9429	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E4}{\"a}
		9430	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E5}{\aa}
		9431	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E6}{\ae}
		9432	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E7}{\cedilla{c}}
		9433	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E8}{\`e}
		9434	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E9}{\'e}
		9435	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EA}{\^e}
		9436	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EB}{\"e}
		9437	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EC}{\`{\dotless{i}}}
		9438	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00ED}{\'{\dotless{i}}}
		9439	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EE}{\^{\dotless{i}}}
		9440	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EF}{\"{\dotless{i}}}
		9441
		9442	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F0}{\dh}
		9443	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F1}{\~n}
		9444	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F2}{\`o}
		9445	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F3}{\'o}
		9446	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F4}{\^o}
		9447	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F5}{\~o}
		9448	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F6}{\"o}
		9449	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F8}{\o}
		9450	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F9}{\`u}
		9451	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FA}{\'u}
		9452	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FB}{\^u}
		9453	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FC}{\"u}
		9454	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FD}{\'y}
		9455	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FE}{\th}
		9456	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FF}{\"y}
		9457
		9458	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0100}{\=A}
		9459	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0101}{\=a}
		9460	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0102}{\u{A}}
		9461	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0103}{\u{a}}
		9462	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0104}{\ogonek{A}}
		9463	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0105}{\ogonek{a}}
		9464	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0106}{\'C}
		9465	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0107}{\'c}
		9466	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0108}{\^C}
		9467	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0109}{\^c}
		9468	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0118}{\ogonek{E}}
		9469	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0119}{\ogonek{e}}
		9470	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010A}{\dotaccent{C}}
		9471	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010B}{\dotaccent{c}}
		9472	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010C}{\v{C}}
		9473	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010D}{\v{c}}
		9474	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010E}{\v{D}}
		9475
		9476	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0112}{\=E}
		9477	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0113}{\=e}
		9478	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0114}{\u{E}}
		9479	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0115}{\u{e}}
		9480	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0116}{\dotaccent{E}}
		9481	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0117}{\dotaccent{e}}
		9482	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011A}{\v{E}}
		9483	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011B}{\v{e}}
		9484	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011C}{\^G}
		9485	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011D}{\^g}
		9486	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011E}{\u{G}}
		9487	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011F}{\u{g}}
		9488
		9489	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0120}{\dotaccent{G}}
		9490	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0121}{\dotaccent{g}}
		9491	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0124}{\^H}
		9492	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0125}{\^h}
		9493	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0128}{\~I}
		9494	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0129}{\~{\dotless{i}}}
		9495	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012A}{\=I}
		9496	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012B}{\={\dotless{i}}}
		9497	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012C}{\u{I}}
		9498	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012D}{\u{\dotless{i}}}
		9499
		9500	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0130}{\dotaccent{I}}
		9501	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0131}{\dotless{i}}
		9502	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0132}{IJ}
		9503	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0133}{ij}
		9504	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0134}{\^J}
		9505	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0135}{\^{\dotless{j}}}
		9506	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0139}{\'L}
		9507	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013A}{\'l}
		9508
		9509	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0141}{\L}
		9510	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0142}{\l}
		9511	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0143}{\'N}
		9512	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0144}{\'n}
		9513	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0147}{\v{N}}
		9514	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0148}{\v{n}}
		9515	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014C}{\=O}
		9516	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014D}{\=o}
		9517	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014E}{\u{O}}
		9518	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014F}{\u{o}}
		9519
		9520	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0150}{\H{O}}
		9521	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0151}{\H{o}}
		9522	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0152}{\OE}
		9523	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0153}{\oe}
		9524	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0154}{\'R}
		9525	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0155}{\'r}
		9526	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0158}{\v{R}}
		9527	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0159}{\v{r}}
		9528	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015A}{\'S}
		9529	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015B}{\'s}
		9530	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015C}{\^S}
		9531	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015D}{\^s}
		9532	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015E}{\cedilla{S}}
		9533	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015F}{\cedilla{s}}
		9534
		9535	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0160}{\v{S}}
		9536	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0161}{\v{s}}
		9537	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0162}{\cedilla{t}}
		9538	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0163}{\cedilla{T}}
		9539	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0164}{\v{T}}
		9540
		9541	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0168}{\~U}
		9542	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0169}{\~u}
		9543	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016A}{\=U}
		9544	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016B}{\=u}
		9545	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016C}{\u{U}}
		9546	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016D}{\u{u}}
		9547	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016E}{\ringaccent{U}}
		9548	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016F}{\ringaccent{u}}
		9549
		9550	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0170}{\H{U}}
		9551	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0171}{\H{u}}
		9552	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0174}{\^W}
		9553	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0175}{\^w}
		9554	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0176}{\^Y}
		9555	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0177}{\^y}
		9556	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0178}{\"Y}
		9557	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0179}{\'Z}
		9558	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017A}{\'z}
		9559	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017B}{\dotaccent{Z}}
		9560	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017C}{\dotaccent{z}}
		9561	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017D}{\v{Z}}
		9562	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017E}{\v{z}}
		9563
		9564	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C4}{D\v{Z}}
		9565	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C5}{D\v{z}}
		9566	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C6}{d\v{z}}
		9567	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C7}{LJ}
		9568	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C8}{Lj}
		9569	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C9}{lj}
		9570	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CA}{NJ}
		9571	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CB}{Nj}
		9572	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CC}{nj}
		9573	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CD}{\v{A}}
		9574	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CE}{\v{a}}
		9575	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CF}{\v{I}}
		9576
		9577	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D0}{\v{\dotless{i}}}
		9578	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D1}{\v{O}}
		9579	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D2}{\v{o}}
		9580	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D3}{\v{U}}
		9581	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D4}{\v{u}}
		9582
		9583	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E2}{\={\AE}}
		9584	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E3}{\={\ae}}
		9585	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E6}{\v{G}}
		9586	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E7}{\v{g}}
		9587	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E8}{\v{K}}
		9588	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E9}{\v{k}}
		9589
		9590	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F0}{\v{\dotless{j}}}
		9591	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F1}{DZ}
		9592	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F2}{Dz}
		9593	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F3}{dz}
		9594	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F4}{\'G}
		9595	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F5}{\'g}
		9596	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F8}{\`N}
		9597	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F9}{\`n}
		9598	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FC}{\'{\AE}}
		9599	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FD}{\'{\ae}}
		9600	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FE}{\'{\O}}
		9601	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FF}{\'{\o}}
		9602
		9603	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{021E}{\v{H}}
		9604	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{021F}{\v{h}}
		9605
		9606	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0226}{\dotaccent{A}}
		9607	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0227}{\dotaccent{a}}
		9608	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0228}{\cedilla{E}}
		9609	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0229}{\cedilla{e}}
		9610	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{022E}{\dotaccent{O}}
		9611	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{022F}{\dotaccent{o}}
		9612
		9613	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0232}{\=Y}
		9614	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0233}{\=y}
		9615	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0237}{\dotless{j}}
		9616
		9617	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{02DB}{\ogonek{ }}
		9618
		9619	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E02}{\dotaccent{B}}
		9620	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E03}{\dotaccent{b}}
		9621	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E04}{\udotaccent{B}}
		9622	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E05}{\udotaccent{b}}
		9623	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E06}{\ubaraccent{B}}
		9624	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E07}{\ubaraccent{b}}
		9625	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0A}{\dotaccent{D}}
		9626	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0B}{\dotaccent{d}}
		9627	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0C}{\udotaccent{D}}
		9628	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0D}{\udotaccent{d}}
		9629	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0E}{\ubaraccent{D}}
		9630	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0F}{\ubaraccent{d}}
		9631
		9632	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E1E}{\dotaccent{F}}
		9633	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E1F}{\dotaccent{f}}
		9634
		9635	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E20}{\=G}
		9636	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E21}{\=g}
		9637	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E22}{\dotaccent{H}}
		9638	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E23}{\dotaccent{h}}
		9639	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E24}{\udotaccent{H}}
		9640	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E25}{\udotaccent{h}}
		9641	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E26}{\"H}
		9642	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E27}{\"h}
		9643
		9644	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E30}{\'K}
		9645	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E31}{\'k}
		9646	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E32}{\udotaccent{K}}
		9647	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E33}{\udotaccent{k}}
		9648	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E34}{\ubaraccent{K}}
		9649	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E35}{\ubaraccent{k}}
		9650	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E36}{\udotaccent{L}}
		9651	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E37}{\udotaccent{l}}
		9652	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3A}{\ubaraccent{L}}
		9653	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3B}{\ubaraccent{l}}
		9654	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3E}{\'M}
		9655	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3F}{\'m}
		9656
		9657	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E40}{\dotaccent{M}}
		9658	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E41}{\dotaccent{m}}
		9659	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E42}{\udotaccent{M}}
		9660	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E43}{\udotaccent{m}}
		9661	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E44}{\dotaccent{N}}
		9662	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E45}{\dotaccent{n}}
		9663	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E46}{\udotaccent{N}}
		9664	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E47}{\udotaccent{n}}
		9665	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E48}{\ubaraccent{N}}
		9666	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E49}{\ubaraccent{n}}
		9667
		9668	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E54}{\'P}
		9669	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E55}{\'p}
		9670	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E56}{\dotaccent{P}}
		9671	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E57}{\dotaccent{p}}
		9672	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E58}{\dotaccent{R}}
		9673	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E59}{\dotaccent{r}}
		9674	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5A}{\udotaccent{R}}
		9675	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5B}{\udotaccent{r}}
		9676	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5E}{\ubaraccent{R}}
		9677	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5F}{\ubaraccent{r}}
		9678
		9679	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E60}{\dotaccent{S}}
		9680	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E61}{\dotaccent{s}}
		9681	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E62}{\udotaccent{S}}
		9682	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E63}{\udotaccent{s}}
		9683	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6A}{\dotaccent{T}}
		9684	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6B}{\dotaccent{t}}
		9685	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6C}{\udotaccent{T}}
		9686	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6D}{\udotaccent{t}}
		9687	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6E}{\ubaraccent{T}}
		9688	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6F}{\ubaraccent{t}}
		9689
		9690	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7C}{\~V}
		9691	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7D}{\~v}
		9692	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7E}{\udotaccent{V}}
		9693	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7F}{\udotaccent{v}}
		9694
		9695	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E80}{\`W}
		9696	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E81}{\`w}
		9697	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E82}{\'W}
		9698	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E83}{\'w}
		9699	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E84}{\"W}
		9700	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E85}{\"w}
		9701	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E86}{\dotaccent{W}}
		9702	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E87}{\dotaccent{w}}
		9703	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E88}{\udotaccent{W}}
		9704	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E89}{\udotaccent{w}}
		9705	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8A}{\dotaccent{X}}
		9706	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8B}{\dotaccent{x}}
		9707	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8C}{\"X}
		9708	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8D}{\"x}
		9709	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8E}{\dotaccent{Y}}
		9710	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8F}{\dotaccent{y}}
		9711
		9712	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E90}{\^Z}
		9713	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E91}{\^z}
		9714	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E92}{\udotaccent{Z}}
		9715	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E93}{\udotaccent{z}}
		9716	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E94}{\ubaraccent{Z}}
		9717	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E95}{\ubaraccent{z}}
		9718	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E96}{\ubaraccent{h}}
		9719	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E97}{\"t}
		9720	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E98}{\ringaccent{w}}
		9721	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E99}{\ringaccent{y}}
		9722
		9723	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EA0}{\udotaccent{A}}
		9724	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EA1}{\udotaccent{a}}
		9725
		9726	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EB8}{\udotaccent{E}}
		9727	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EB9}{\udotaccent{e}}
		9728	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EBC}{\~E}
		9729	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EBD}{\~e}
		9730
		9731	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECA}{\udotaccent{I}}
		9732	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECB}{\udotaccent{i}}
		9733	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECC}{\udotaccent{O}}
		9734	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECD}{\udotaccent{o}}
		9735
		9736	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EE4}{\udotaccent{U}}
		9737	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EE5}{\udotaccent{u}}
		9738
		9739	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF2}{\`Y}
		9740	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF3}{\`y}
		9741	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF4}{\udotaccent{Y}}
		9742
		9743	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF8}{\~Y}
		9744	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF9}{\~y}
		9745
		9746	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2013}{--}
		9747	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2014}{---}
		9748	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2018}{\quoteleft}
		9749	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2019}{\quoteright}
		9750	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201A}{\quotesinglbase}
		9751	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201C}{\quotedblleft}
		9752	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201D}{\quotedblright}
		9753	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201E}{\quotedblbase}
		9754	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2022}{\bullet}
		9755	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2026}{\dots}
		9756	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2039}{\guilsinglleft}
		9757	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{203A}{\guilsinglright}
		9758	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{20AC}{\euro}
		9759
		9760	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2192}{\expansion}
		9761	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D2}{\result}
		9762
		9763	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2212}{\minus}
		9764	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2217}{\point}
		9765	\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2261}{\equiv}
		9766	}% end of \utfeightchardefs
		9767
		9768
		9769	% US-ASCII character definitions.
		9770	\def\asciichardefs{% nothing need be done
		9771	\relax
		9772	}
		9773
		9774	% Make non-ASCII characters printable again for compatibility with
		9775	% existing Texinfo documents that may use them, even without declaring a
		9776	% document encoding.
		9777	%
		9778	\setnonasciicharscatcode \other
		9779
		9780
		9781	\message{formatting,}
		9782
		9783	\newdimen\defaultparindent \defaultparindent = 15pt
		9784
		9785	\chapheadingskip = 15pt plus 4pt minus 2pt
		9786	\secheadingskip = 12pt plus 3pt minus 2pt
		9787	\subsecheadingskip = 9pt plus 2pt minus 2pt
		9788
		9789	% Prevent underfull vbox error messages.
		9790	\vbadness = 10000
		9791
		9792	% Don't be very finicky about underfull hboxes, either.
		9793	\hbadness = 6666
		9794
		9795	% Following George Bush, get rid of widows and orphans.
		9796	\widowpenalty=10000
		9797	\clubpenalty=10000
		9798
		9799	% Use TeX 3.0's \emergencystretch to help line breaking, but if we're
		9800	% using an old version of TeX, don't do anything. We want the amount of
		9801	% stretch added to depend on the line length, hence the dependence on
		9802	% \hsize. We call this whenever the paper size is set.
		9803	%
		9804	\def\setemergencystretch{%
		9805	\ifx\emergencystretch\thisisundefined
		9806	% Allow us to assign to \emergencystretch anyway.
		9807	\def\emergencystretch{\dimen0}%
		9808	\else
		9809	\emergencystretch = .15\hsize
		9810	\fi
		9811	}
		9812
		9813	% Parameters in order: 1) textheight; 2) textwidth;
		9814	% 3) voffset; 4) hoffset; 5) binding offset; 6) topskip;
		9815	% 7) physical page height; 8) physical page width.
		9816	%
		9817	% We also call \setleading{\textleading}, so the caller should define
		9818	% \textleading. The caller should also set \parskip.
		9819	%
		9820	\def\internalpagesizes#1#2#3#4#5#6#7#8{%
		9821	\voffset = #3\relax
		9822	\topskip = #6\relax
		9823	\splittopskip = \topskip
		9824	%
		9825	\vsize = #1\relax
		9826	\advance\vsize by \topskip
		9827	\outervsize = \vsize
		9828	\advance\outervsize by 2\topandbottommargin
		9829	\pageheight = \vsize
		9830	%
		9831	\hsize = #2\relax
		9832	\outerhsize = \hsize
		9833	\advance\outerhsize by 0.5in
		9834	\pagewidth = \hsize
		9835	%
		9836	\normaloffset = #4\relax
		9837	\bindingoffset = #5\relax
		9838	%
		9839	\ifpdf
		9840	\pdfpageheight #7\relax
		9841	\pdfpagewidth #8\relax
		9842	% if we don't reset these, they will remain at "1 true in" of
		9843	% whatever layout pdftex was dumped with.
		9844	\pdfhorigin = 1 true in
		9845	\pdfvorigin = 1 true in
		9846	\fi
		9847	%
		9848	\setleading{\textleading}
		9849	%
		9850	\parindent = \defaultparindent
		9851	\setemergencystretch
		9852	}
		9853
		9854	% @letterpaper (the default).
		9855	\def\letterpaper{{\globaldefs = 1
		9856	\parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
		9857	\textleading = 13.2pt
		9858	%
		9859	% If page is nothing but text, make it come out even.
		9860	\internalpagesizes{607.2pt}{6in}% that's 46 lines
		9861	{\voffset}{.25in}%
		9862	{\bindingoffset}{36pt}%
		9863	{11in}{8.5in}%
		9864	}}
		9865
		9866	% Use @smallbook to reset parameters for 7x9.25 trim size.
		9867	\def\smallbook{{\globaldefs = 1
		9868	\parskip = 2pt plus 1pt
		9869	\textleading = 12pt
		9870	%
		9871	\internalpagesizes{7.5in}{5in}%
		9872	{-.2in}{0in}%
		9873	{\bindingoffset}{16pt}%
		9874	{9.25in}{7in}%
		9875	%
		9876	\lispnarrowing = 0.3in
		9877	\tolerance = 700
		9878	\hfuzz = 1pt
		9879	\contentsrightmargin = 0pt
		9880	\defbodyindent = .5cm
		9881	}}
		9882
		9883	% Use @smallerbook to reset parameters for 6x9 trim size.
		9884	% (Just testing, parameters still in flux.)
		9885	\def\smallerbook{{\globaldefs = 1
		9886	\parskip = 1.5pt plus 1pt
		9887	\textleading = 12pt
		9888	%
		9889	\internalpagesizes{7.4in}{4.8in}%
		9890	{-.2in}{-.4in}%
		9891	{0pt}{14pt}%
		9892	{9in}{6in}%
		9893	%
		9894	\lispnarrowing = 0.25in
		9895	\tolerance = 700
		9896	\hfuzz = 1pt
		9897	\contentsrightmargin = 0pt
		9898	\defbodyindent = .4cm
		9899	}}
		9900
		9901	% Use @afourpaper to print on European A4 paper.
		9902	\def\afourpaper{{\globaldefs = 1
		9903	\parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
		9904	\textleading = 13.2pt
		9905	%
		9906	% Double-side printing via postscript on Laserjet 4050
		9907	% prints double-sided nicely when \bindingoffset=10mm and \hoffset=-6mm.
		9908	% To change the settings for a different printer or situation, adjust
		9909	% \normaloffset until the front-side and back-side texts align. Then
		9910	% do the same for \bindingoffset. You can set these for testing in
		9911	% your texinfo source file like this:
		9912	% @tex
		9913	% \global\normaloffset = -6mm
		9914	% \global\bindingoffset = 10mm
		9915	% @end tex
		9916	\internalpagesizes{673.2pt}{160mm}% that's 51 lines
		9917	{\voffset}{\hoffset}%
		9918	{\bindingoffset}{44pt}%
		9919	{297mm}{210mm}%
		9920	%
		9921	\tolerance = 700
		9922	\hfuzz = 1pt
		9923	\contentsrightmargin = 0pt
		9924	\defbodyindent = 5mm
		9925	}}
		9926
		9927	% Use @afivepaper to print on European A5 paper.
		9928	% From romildo@urano.iceb.ufop.br, 2 July 2000.
		9929	% He also recommends making @example and @lisp be small.
		9930	\def\afivepaper{{\globaldefs = 1
		9931	\parskip = 2pt plus 1pt minus 0.1pt
		9932	\textleading = 12.5pt
		9933	%
		9934	\internalpagesizes{160mm}{120mm}%
		9935	{\voffset}{\hoffset}%
		9936	{\bindingoffset}{8pt}%
		9937	{210mm}{148mm}%
		9938	%
		9939	\lispnarrowing = 0.2in
		9940	\tolerance = 800
		9941	\hfuzz = 1.2pt
		9942	\contentsrightmargin = 0pt
		9943	\defbodyindent = 2mm
		9944	\tableindent = 12mm
		9945	}}
		9946
		9947	% A specific text layout, 24x15cm overall, intended for A4 paper.
		9948	\def\afourlatex{{\globaldefs = 1
		9949	\afourpaper
		9950	\internalpagesizes{237mm}{150mm}%
		9951	{\voffset}{4.6mm}%
		9952	{\bindingoffset}{7mm}%
		9953	{297mm}{210mm}%
		9954	%
		9955	% Must explicitly reset to 0 because we call \afourpaper.
		9956	\globaldefs = 0
		9957	}}
		9958
		9959	% Use @afourwide to print on A4 paper in landscape format.
		9960	\def\afourwide{{\globaldefs = 1
		9961	\afourpaper
		9962	\internalpagesizes{241mm}{165mm}%
		9963	{\voffset}{-2.95mm}%
		9964	{\bindingoffset}{7mm}%
		9965	{297mm}{210mm}%
		9966	\globaldefs = 0
		9967	}}
		9968
		9969	% @pagesizes TEXTHEIGHT[,TEXTWIDTH]
		9970	% Perhaps we should allow setting the margins, \topskip, \parskip,
		9971	% and/or leading, also. Or perhaps we should compute them somehow.
		9972	%
		9973	\parseargdef\pagesizes{\pagesizesyyy #1,,\finish}
		9974	\def\pagesizesyyy#1,#2,#3\finish{{%
		9975	\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \hsize=#2\relax \fi
		9976	\globaldefs = 1
		9977	%
		9978	\parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
		9979	\setleading{\textleading}%
		9980	%
		9981	\dimen0 = #1\relax
		9982	\advance\dimen0 by \voffset
		9983	%
		9984	\dimen2 = \hsize
		9985	\advance\dimen2 by \normaloffset
		9986	%
		9987	\internalpagesizes{#1}{\hsize}%
		9988	{\voffset}{\normaloffset}%
		9989	{\bindingoffset}{44pt}%
		9990	{\dimen0}{\dimen2}%
		9991	}}
		9992
		9993	% Set default to letter.
		9994	%
		9995	\letterpaper
		9996
		9997
		9998	\message{and turning on texinfo input format.}
		9999
		10000	\def^^L{\par} % remove \outer, so ^L can appear in an @comment
		10001
		10002	% DEL is a comment character, in case @c does not suffice.
		10003	\catcode`\^^? = 14
		10004
		10005	% Define macros to output various characters with catcode for normal text.
		10006	\catcode`\"=\other \def\normaldoublequote{"}
		10007	\catcode`\$=\other \def\normaldollar{$}%$ font-lock fix
		10008	\catcode`\+=\other \def\normalplus{+}
		10009	\catcode`\<=\other \def\normalless{<}
		10010	\catcode`\>=\other \def\normalgreater{>}
		10011	\catcode`\^=\other \def\normalcaret{^}
		10012	\catcode`\_=\other \def\normalunderscore{_}
		10013	\catcode`\|=\other \def\normalverticalbar{|}
		10014	\catcode`\~=\other \def\normaltilde{~}
		10015
		10016	% This macro is used to make a character print one way in \tt
		10017	% (where it can probably be output as-is), and another way in other fonts,
		10018	% where something hairier probably needs to be done.
		10019	%
		10020	% #1 is what to print if we are indeed using \tt; #2 is what to print
		10021	% otherwise. Since all the Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero
		10022	% interword stretch (and shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all
		10023	% typewriter fonts to have this, we can check that font parameter.
		10024	%
		10025	\def\ifusingtt#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen3\font=0pt #1\else #2\fi}
		10026
		10027	% Same as above, but check for italic font. Actually this also catches
		10028	% non-italic slanted fonts since it is impossible to distinguish them from
		10029	% italic fonts. But since this is only used by $ and it uses \sl anyway
		10030	% this is not a problem.
		10031	\def\ifusingit#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen1\font>0pt #1\else #2\fi}
		10032
		10033	% Turn off all special characters except @
		10034	% (and those which the user can use as if they were ordinary).
		10035	% Most of these we simply print from the \tt font, but for some, we can
		10036	% use math or other variants that look better in normal text.
		10037
		10038	\catcode`\"=\active
		10039	\def\activedoublequote{{\tt\char34}}
		10040	\let"=\activedoublequote
		10041	\catcode`\~=\active \def\activetilde{{\tt\char126}} \let~ = \activetilde
		10042	\chardef\hat=`\^
		10043	\catcode`\^=\active \def\activehat{{\tt \hat}} \let^ = \activehat
		10044
		10045	\catcode`\_=\active
		10046	\def_{\ifusingtt\normalunderscore\_}
		10047	\let\realunder=_
		10048	% Subroutine for the previous macro.
		10049	\def\_{\leavevmode \kern.07em \vbox{\hrule width.3em height.1ex}\kern .07em }
		10050
		10051	\catcode`\|=\active
		10052	\def|{{\tt\char124}}
		10053
		10054	\chardef \less=`\<
		10055	\catcode`\<=\active \def\activeless{{\tt \less}}\let< = \activeless
		10056	\chardef \gtr=`\>
		10057	\catcode`\>=\active \def\activegtr{{\tt \gtr}}\let> = \activegtr
		10058	\catcode`\+=\active \def+{{\tt \char 43}}
		10059	\catcode`\$=\active \def${\ifusingit{{\sl\$}}\normaldollar}%$ font-lock fix
		10060
		10061	% used for headline/footline in the output routine, in case the page
		10062	% breaks in the middle of an @tex block.
		10063	\def\texinfochars{%
		10064	\let< = \activeless
		10065	\let> = \activegtr
		10066	\let~ = \activetilde
		10067	\let^ = \activehat
		10068	\markupsetuplqdefault \markupsetuprqdefault
		10069	\let\b = \strong
		10070	\let\i = \smartitalic
		10071	% in principle, all other definitions in \tex have to be undone too.
		10072	}
		10073
		10074	% If a .fmt file is being used, characters that might appear in a file
		10075	% name cannot be active until we have parsed the command line.
		10076	% So turn them off again, and have \everyjob (or @setfilename) turn them on.
		10077	% \otherifyactive is called near the end of this file.
		10078	\def\otherifyactive{\catcode`+=\other \catcode`\_=\other}
		10079
		10080	% Used sometimes to turn off (effectively) the active characters even after
		10081	% parsing them.
		10082	\def\turnoffactive{%
		10083	\normalturnoffactive
		10084	\otherbackslash
		10085	}
		10086
		10087	\catcode`\@=0
		10088
		10089	% \backslashcurfont outputs one backslash character in current font,
		10090	% as in \char`\\.
		10091	\global\chardef\backslashcurfont=`\\
		10092	\global\let\rawbackslashxx=\backslashcurfont % let existing .??s files work
		10093
		10094	% \realbackslash is an actual character `\' with catcode other, and
		10095	% \doublebackslash is two of them (for the pdf outlines).
		10096	{\catcode`\\=\other @gdef@realbackslash{\} @gdef@doublebackslash{\\}}
		10097
		10098	% In texinfo, backslash is an active character; it prints the backslash
		10099	% in fixed width font.
		10100	\catcode`\\=\active % @ for escape char from now on.
		10101
		10102	% The story here is that in math mode, the \char of \backslashcurfont
		10103	% ends up printing the roman \ from the math symbol font (because \char
		10104	% in math mode uses the \mathcode, and plain.tex sets
		10105	% \mathcode`\\="026E). It seems better for @backslashchar{} to always
		10106	% print a typewriter backslash, hence we use an explicit \mathchar,
		10107	% which is the decimal equivalent of "715c (class 7, e.g., use \fam;
		10108	% ignored family value; char position "5C). We can't use " for the
		10109	% usual hex value because it has already been made active.
		10110	@def@normalbackslash{{@tt @ifmmode @mathchar29020 @else @backslashcurfont @fi}}
		10111	@let@backslashchar = @normalbackslash % @backslashchar{} is for user documents.
		10112
		10113	% On startup, @fixbackslash assigns:
		10114	% @let \ = @normalbackslash
		10115	% \rawbackslash defines an active \ to do \backslashcurfont.
		10116	% \otherbackslash defines an active \ to be a literal `\' character with
		10117	% catcode other. We switch back and forth between these.
		10118	@gdef@rawbackslash{@let\=@backslashcurfont}
		10119	@gdef@otherbackslash{@let\=@realbackslash}
		10120
		10121	% Same as @turnoffactive except outputs \ as {\tt\char`\\} instead of
		10122	% the literal character `\'. Also revert - to its normal character, in
		10123	% case the active - from code has slipped in.
		10124	%
		10125	{@catcode`- = @active
		10126	@gdef@normalturnoffactive{%
		10127	@let-=@normaldash
		10128	@let"=@normaldoublequote
		10129	@let$=@normaldollar %$ font-lock fix
		10130	@let+=@normalplus
		10131	@let<=@normalless
		10132	@let>=@normalgreater
		10133	@let\=@normalbackslash
		10134	@let^=@normalcaret
		10135	@let_=@normalunderscore
		10136	@let|=@normalverticalbar
		10137	@let~=@normaltilde
		10138	@markupsetuplqdefault
		10139	@markupsetuprqdefault
		10140	@unsepspaces
		10141	}
		10142	}
		10143
		10144	% Make _ and + \other characters, temporarily.
		10145	% This is canceled by @fixbackslash.
		10146	@otherifyactive
		10147
		10148	% If a .fmt file is being used, we don't want the `\input texinfo' to show up.
		10149	% That is what \eatinput is for; after that, the `\' should revert to printing
		10150	% a backslash.
		10151	%
		10152	@gdef@eatinput input texinfo{@fixbackslash}
		10153	@global@let\ = @eatinput
		10154
		10155	% On the other hand, perhaps the file did not have a `\input texinfo'. Then
		10156	% the first `\' in the file would cause an error. This macro tries to fix
		10157	% that, assuming it is called before the first `\' could plausibly occur.
		10158	% Also turn back on active characters that might appear in the input
		10159	% file name, in case not using a pre-dumped format.
		10160	%
		10161	@gdef@fixbackslash{%
		10162	@ifx\@eatinput @let\ = @normalbackslash @fi
		10163	@catcode`+=@active
		10164	@catcode`@_=@active
		10165	}
		10166
		10167	% Say @foo, not \foo, in error messages.
		10168	@escapechar = `@@
		10169
		10170	% These (along with & and #) are made active for url-breaking, so need
		10171	% active definitions as the normal characters.
		10172	@def@normaldot{.}
		10173	@def@normalquest{?}
		10174	@def@normalslash{/}
		10175
		10176	% These look ok in all fonts, so just make them not special.
		10177	% @hashchar{} gets its own user-level command, because of #line.
		10178	@catcode`@& = @other @def@normalamp{&}
		10179	@catcode`@# = @other @def@normalhash{#}
		10180	@catcode`@% = @other @def@normalpercent{%}
		10181
		10182	@let @hashchar = @normalhash
		10183
		10184	@c Finally, make ` and ' active, so that txicodequoteundirected and
		10185	@c txicodequotebacktick work right in, e.g., @w{@code{`foo'}}. If we
		10186	@c don't make ` and ' active, @code will not get them as active chars.
		10187	@c Do this last of all since we use ` in the previous @catcode assignments.
		10188	@catcode`@'=@active
		10189	@catcode`@`=@active
		10190	@markupsetuplqdefault
		10191	@markupsetuprqdefault
		10192
		10193	@c Local variables:
		10194	@c eval: (add-hook 'write-file-hooks 'time-stamp)
		10195	@c page-delimiter: "^\\\\message"
		10196	@c time-stamp-start: "def\\\\texinfoversion{"
		10197	@c time-stamp-format: "%:y-%02m-%02d.%02H"
		10198	@c time-stamp-end: "}"
		10199	@c End:
		10200
		10201	@c vim:sw=2:
		10202
		10203	@ignore
		10204	arch-tag: e1b36e32-c96e-4135-a41a-0b2efa2ea115
		10205	@end ignore